


^6* 



^x 



<\ 




- - /\ 






L* 





























^ 



* 0, V 





*c 



•> 






,-0 o°"°- o aT <•'■"■» ■**, 





• * \ v 












w 
,^^ 



., *^s 






JLECTURES 



OX THE 



MILLENNIUM. 



BY JOSEPH EMERSON, 

Lately Pastor of a Church in Bevtrly 



boston: 

PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL T. ARMSTRONG 

No. 50, CornhilJ, 






h 



DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS— To tw> 

District Clerk's Office. 
Be it remembered, that on the sixteenth day of 
March, A. D. 1818, and in the forty-second year of the 
independence of the United States of America, Joseph 
Emerson, of the said District, has deposited in this office 
the title of a hook, the right whereof he claims as Author 
in the words following, to wit: 

"Lectures on the Millennium; hy Joseph Emerson, lately 
Pastor of a Church in Beverly. 5 ' 

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United 
States, intitled, "An act for the encouragement of learning, 
by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the 
authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times 
therein mentioned;" and also to an act intitled, "An act 
supplementary to an act, intitled an act for the encourage- 
ment of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and 
books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during 
the times therein mentioned; and extending the benefits 
thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etchings 
bistoneal and other prints." J NO. W. DAVIS, 

Clerk of the District of Massachusetts, 



The Library 
washington 



PREFACE. 



There is scarcely any subject, which is 
better suited to comfort and encourage, to 
strengthen and animate, the children of Zion* 
than the Millennium. It is wonderfully cal- 
culated to feed and feast and delight their 
souls. And yet, how great a proportion of 
Christians, are there, who have scarcely 
tasted the milk and honey, the marrow and 
fatness, which the great Master of the feast 
has prepared, and freely offers them in this 
rich and glorious subject. What can be the 
cause? Perhaps there may be more causes 
than one. In many it may be a want of con- 
sideration. They have scarcely heard of 
the Millennium, or thought seriously upon 
the subject^ tho two petitions of the Lord's* 



IV I'HEFACE. 

prayer teach them to pray for it every day, 
Some may think the subject too great and 
deep and abstruse for their understanding, 
Some may think there have been so many 
opinions upon the Millennium, that nothing 
can be known, and that it is very doubtful 
whether there will be a Millennium; or wheth- 
er the state of the world will ever be very 
much better than it now is, 

Christians, who are possessed of any of 
these notions, do exceedingly err, and I trust 
will see and renounce their error, if they will 
take the trouble to give the following pages 
a candid perusal. While Christians cherish 
any of the above notions, they must suffer 
loss, tho their souls may be finally saved. 
If we neglect every subject, about which 
there have been different and various opin- 
ions, or every subject, which is embarrassed 
with some difficulties, we must neglect al- 
most every subject mentioned in the bible; 
we must neglect the great salvation; we must 
neglect every truth relating to the being and 
perfections of God. 

It is thought there is scarcely any subject 
of a religious nature, of which so many parts 
are plain and easy, and comparatively so 



PREFACE. V 

few abstruse and difficult, as the Millennium; 
and certainly very few subjects are of greater 
practical importance. Surely no other sub- 
ject is better suited to rouse benevolent souls 
to action, and to urge them on to make the 
greatest possible exertions for the advance- 
ment of the Redeemer's kingdom; none bet- 
tersuited to inspire meekness, patience, char- 
ity and every Christian grace; and none bet- 
ter suited to kindle the flame of devotion, 
and inspire the spirit of fervent, unfainting, 
unceasing and effectual prayer. 

It is the design of these Lectures to pre- 
sent this subject in a point of light, as plain 
and easy as possible; and to show the reader 
(if not already convinced) that it is not a 
speculation designed for mere amusement; 
but that he has something to do — that he has 
a very important part to act, in relation to 
the Millennium; that he must exert himself 
to the utmost, to bring on the blessed period. 

The writer has often felt deeply and pain- 
fully sensible, that he has by no means treat- 
ed this great, this stupendous subject, as its 
dignity and importance seem to demand. 
Feeling however that something upon this 
plan is exceedingly needed, he presumes 
1* 



VI PREFACE, 

with trembling heart to offer these Lectures 
to those, who may be disposed to honor them 
with a perusal. If this little work should 
prove instrumental of edifying a single Chris- 
tian, or of rousing a single sinner to a more 
solemn consideration of the reality and im- 
portance of Christ's kingdom, it will not be 
in vain. 

Beverly, March, 1818, 



LECTURE L 

The prevalence of true Religion. — The destruc- 
tion of Idolatry. — The Conversion of the 
Jews* 

REV. 20. 2. — A THOUSAND TEARS. 

THIS period of a thousand years has long 
been called the Millennium. It is sometimes 
called the latter-day-glory. And it is manifest, 
that it will be a most glorious day. Even 
if we knew nothing of it, but what is men- 
tioned in connexion with the text, we might feel 
assured, that it would be a most glorious day. 
Ever since Satan broke into Paradise, and 
seduced the parents of our race from their al- 
legiance to God, that old serpent has been the 
god of this world, the prince of the power of 
the air, working all manner of wickedness 
in the children of disobedience; leading the 
nations captive at his will; the father of lies; 
the accuser of the brethren,setting on fire the 
tongue of slander, that sets on fire the course 
of nature: he has been the instigator of adul- 
tery, fornication, uncleanness,lasciviousness, 
idolatry, witchcraft, hatred, variance, emu- 
lations, wrath, strife, seditions, heresies, 
envyings, murders, drunkenness, revelling, 
covetousness, maliciousness, deceit, malig- 
nity, pride, disobedience to parents/ and 



8 State of the World 

every abomination, that has blackened and 
disgraced the world. Now in the Millennium 
the malignant and horrid influence of the old 
serpent will be restrained; he will cease to 
lie in wait to deceive; nay he will be bound 
and confined (o his own place, his den of 
darkness, where he will remain imprisoned, 
tili die 1000 years be fulfilled. 

Even if this were all, that God had told 
us concerning the Millennial state, might we 
not be encouraged to hope for better tim©6? 
and to believe that the period of the Millen- 
nium would be exceedingly different from 
every other? But instead of being all, this is 
but apart, and comparatively a small part, 
of what God has revealed concerning that 
blessed day. Millennial glory is the bur- 
den of prophetic song; it is one of the grand 
and leading subjects of prediction, from 
Genesis to Revelation. Let us then diligently 
and devoutly search the Scripture;*, and see 
what they declare concerning that illustrious 
day. 

To bring to view and enforce some of the 
most important instructions, which God has 
given us relating to the Millennium, is the 
object of these Lectures. , 

The subject may be embraced under four 
inquiries; 

I. What will be the state of the world 
during the Millennium? or in what respects 
will that period differ from all preceding? 



Dunns; the Millennium. 



]l D 



II. When will the Millennium commence? 

III. How long will be its duration? 

IV. What duties are inculcated by this 
subject? 

I. What will be the state of the world 
during the Millennium? 

The Scriptures lead us to conclude, that 
this period will differ so greatly, and in so 
many respects from all others, that this head 
will require a much more extended discus- 
sion, than either of the rest. I shall arrange 
what I have to say upon this head, under 
several propositions. 

PROPOSITION I. 

True religion will prevail much more in 
the Millennium, than before. 

This proposition may be considered as a 
kind of introduction to the rest. 

"Broad is the road that leads to death, 
And thousands walk together there; 

But wisdom shows a narrow path, 
With here and there a traveller." 

This was the case before the flood; it was 
the case in the days of the patriarchs, pioph- 
ets and apostles; and it has been the case 
ever since. The world lieth in wickedness? 
and it has lain in wickedness for nearly six 
thousand years. But this dreadful state of 
irreligion will have an end. When the Sav- 
ior declared concerning the gate of destruc- 
tion, "Many there be, that go in thereat" 
and also, that "few there be,that find the gate 
of life," he could not mean to describe the 
state of the w ? orld to the end of time, Hun- 



10 State of the World 

dreds of other passages forbid us to under- 
stand this in so broad a sense. Two or three 
may be sufficient to establish the proposition 
we are now considering. 

Gen. 3:15. "And 1 will put enmity be- 
tween thee and the woman, and between thy 
seed and her seed; it shall bruise thy head, 
and thou shalt bruise his heel." Thus the 
serpent's head was to be bruised. Tho this 
expression is figurative, it has a meaning. 
To understand the figure, we must consider 
the circumstances,under which this curse was 
pronounced against the arch deceiver. The 
real agent, that beguiled the mother of man- 
kind, was Satan; who chose to conceal him- 
self in the serpent, the better to effect his 
murderous purpose, tie is therefore repeat- 
edly called the serpent and the old serpent. 
The figure therefore, relates to the animal, 
that Satan employed. In order to destroy 
a serpent, we bruise or crush his head. We 
are not however to suppose, that Satan is to 
be destroyed, as a serpent is destroyed by 
crushing his head. This would be to anni- 
hilate him. But doubtless it is something 
relating to the serpent, that is to be destroy- 
ed, or brought to nothing, by the Seed of the 
woman Now Satan entered the serpent, 
for a particular purpose. It is the conjee-* 
ture of Milton, a conjecture by no means 
improbable, that one great end, for which 
man was created, was to replenish the celes- 
tial ranks, that had been thinned by the re- 



During the Millennium. 11 

bellion of Satan and his followers. If this were 
the case, it was doubtless the design of Satan 
to frustrate the purpose of God by destroying 
the human race. Whether it were to frus- 
trate such a divine purpose or not, we may 
be assured,that it was the design of Satan to 
bring the greatest possible dishonor upon 
God by destroying mankind. And surely 
bruising the serpent's head can mean noth- 
ing short of completely frustrating this pur- 
pose of Satan. No doubt this purpose was 
a great and fundamental part of the works 
of the devil, that the Son of God was mani- 
fested to destroy. 

Now the question arises, Has the serpent's 
head been bruised in any degree answerable 
to the manifest import of the passage under 
consideration? A great part of mankind 
have gone to destruction. Does this look 
like bruising the serpent's head? If the great- 
er part of the human race are to be lost by 
the cunning craftiness of Satan, will that 
look like bruising his head? To me it would 
seem far otherwise. Should Satan continue 
the god of this world from the beginning to 
the end of time, leading whole nations captive 
at his will, surely he will seem to have cause 
to triumph. 

But the head of Satan must be bruised* 
his plots must be crushed. Are all mankind 
then to be saved? Certainly not. That 
would be giving the lye to numerous declar- 
ations of eternal Truth; it would be throw- 



12 Stale of the World 

ing away the bible at once. And if the bible 
be thrown away, it would be impossible to 
prove the salvation of any. But there is 
no doubt that by far the greater part of man- 
kind will be saved. This appears necessary, 
in order that the serpent's head may be 
bruised. I am strongly inclined to the opin- 
ion of Dr. Hopkins, that of the whole hu- 
man race thousands will be saved, to one 
that is lost. If this is to be the case, or if 
the case is not to be vastly different from this, 
the religious state of the world must hereaf- 
ter greatly change; and true religion must 
prevail vastly more than ever it has done. 

That noted passage in the 49th of Genesis 
may imply the same. "The sceptre shall not 
depart from Judah, nor a lawgiver from be- 
tween his feet, until Shiloh come; and unto 
him shall the gathering of the people be." 

By Shiloh here we are doubtless to under- 
stand Christ. To him the people were to be 
gathered. We can hardly suppose that this 
means merely the gathering of the people,who 
attended Christ's ministry on earth. For tho 
great multitudes followed him from various 
regions; yet it is probable, that in this sense, 
there has been a greater gathering to John 
the Baptist, to Luther, to Whitfield and to 
Wesley, than to Christ. But people may 
be said to be gathered to Christ, when they 
are brought into his fold, and become of his 
flock. In this sense indeed multitudes have 
been gathered to Christ; but I think by no 



Lurinz the Millennium, 13 



"3 



means a number sufficient to answer the 
prophecy. For tho the number be positive- 
ly great, it must be considered as compara- 
tively small. But a small part of the human 
race have heard the gospel; and of these but 
a small part have given evidence of sincerely 
receiving it. So that since the promulga- 
tion of the gospel, we have reason to fear, 
that a vastly greater number have been gath- 
ered to Satan, than to Christ. Does not the 
prediction imply that Christ shall have the 
majority? and vastly more than a mere 
majority? 

But possibly the term people in the passage 
should be restricted to the Jews. In that 
case it is very far from having been fulfilled; 
nor can we expect its fulfilment till they 
shall be grafted into the olive, from which 
for unbelief they have been broken oft' — un- 
til the earth be made to bring forth in a day, 
and a nation be born at once — until multi- 
tudes shall fly to Christ, as a cloud, and as 
doves to their windows. 

By the mouth of Zechariah, the Lord 
calls upon his people to rejoice, "Sing, O 
daughter of Zion: for lo I come, and I will 
dwell in the midst of thee, saith the Lord of 
hosts: and many nations shall be joined un- 
to the Lord in that day, and shall be my 
people." 

Hundreds of other passages might be ad- 
duced to establish the point under consider- 

2 



14 State of the World 

ation; but they may be considered elsewhere 
with more propriety. 

PROPOSITION II. 

During the Millennium, idolatry will cease 
through the world. 

The delineation of idolatry would consti- 
tute a principal feature in the picture of all 
nations and all ages, since the flood. The 
conjectures of some, that it existed before, 
appear to be groundless. But since that 
most tremendous catastrophe, idolatry has 
prevailed in Egypt, in Assyria, in Babylon, 
in Persia, in Greece, &c. &c. All the learn- 
ing and arts of the Greeks, with all their re- 
finement and elegance, were not sufficient 
to cure them of this abomination. When 
Paul was at Athens, then the emporium of 
Greece, and in some respects the glory of 
the world, his spirit was stirred within him, 
when he saw the city wholly given to idola- 
try. He was more affected with this, than 
with ail the wonders of art, that had excited 
the admiration of the world. It has been 
said, that the idols of the ancients amount- 
ed to the amazing number of thirty thous- 
and. 

Even God's ancient people, to whom he 
had manifested himself in so many ways, 
and in a manner so glorious, were infected 
with idolatry. Having in Egypt caught this 
worst of Egyptian plagues, it seems they 
were never entirely cured of the dreadful 
disease, till after the Babylonish captivity. 



During the MUlenn ium. 1 5 



rt s 



There is perhaps no other sin, against which 
they were so abundantly warned, and so aw- 
fully threatened, as idolatry. The very first 
of the ten commandments, that were given 
from the top of Sinai in a manner the most 
tremendous and affecting — the very first of 
these was pointed against idolatry; and the 
second with still greater particularity, was 
pointed against the same evil. And for no 
other sin were they so sharply and frequent- 
ly reproved, and so severely punished, It 
was for this sin, more than for any other, 
that they were finally carried captive, and 
scattered among the nations. 

Multitudes of idols have been worshipped 
from ancient times, to the present day. 
Heathen lands are still full of idols. The 
destruction of idolatry, therefore, will pro- 
duce an amazing change in the world. 

And now let us repair to the law and to 
the testimony, and see what reason we have 
to expect, that idolatry will cease. Is. 2: 
IT — 21. "And the loftiness of man shall be 
bowed down, and the haughtiness of men 
shall be made low; and the Lord alone shall 
be exalted in that day. And the idols he 
shall utterly abolish. And they shall go in- 
to the holes of the rocks, and into the caves 
of the e t rth, for fear of the Lord, and for the 
glory of his majesty ,wlien he ariseth to shake 
terribly the earth. In that day, a man shall 
cast his idols of silver, and his idols of gold, 
which tbey have made each one for himself 



16 State of the World 

to worship,to the moles and to the bats; to go 
into the clefts of the rocks, and into the tops 
of the ragged rocks, for the fear of the Lord, 
and for the glory of his majesty, when he 
ariseth to shake terribly the earth." 

Here it may be proper to remark, that we 
have reason to conclude from this passage 
and several others, that there will be tremen- 
dous judgments, that the earth will be most 
terribly shaken, just before the Millennium. 

The following passages also may be ad- 
duced to prove the cessation of idolatry. Is. 
31:7. "In that day every man shall cast 
away his idols of silver and his idols of gold, 
which your own hands have made unto you 
for a sin." Jer. 3:17. "At that time they shall 
call Jerusalem the throne of the Lord; and 
all the nations shall be gathered unto it, to 
the name of the Lord, to Jerusalem; neither 
shall they walk any more after the imagina- 
tion of their evil heart." Jer. 10-11. "The 
gods that have not made the heavens and the 
earth, even they shall perish from the earth, 
and from under these heavens." Jer, 16:19 
— 21. "O Lord, my strength, and my for- 
tress, and my refuge in the day of affliction, 
the Gentiles shall come unto thee from the 
ends of the earth, and shall say, Surely 
our fathers have inherited lies, vanity, and 
things wherein there is no profit. Shall a 
man make gods unto himself, and they arc 
no gods? Therefore, behold, I will this once 
cause them to know, I will cause them to 



During the Millennium. 17 



,l c? 



know mine hand and my might; and they 
shall know that my name is the Lord." 
Mai. 1:11. ^For from the rising of the sun, 
even unto the going down of the same, my 
name shall be great among the Gentiles; 
and in every place incense shall be offered 
unto my name, and a pure offering; for my 
name shall be great among the heathen, saith 
the Lord of hosts." 

Do not these passages clearly prove, that 
the day is coming, when idolatry shall be 
extirpated from the earth? The strange 
opinion, which some have entertained, that 
whole nations will continue in idolatry 
through the Millennium, will be considered, 
and, I trust refuted, in another place. 

PROPOSITION III. 

During the Millennium the Jews will be 
converted to Christ. 

In the first chapter of John, we read con- 
cerning the eternal Word, that was made 
flesh and dwelt among us, "He came to his 
own, and his own received him not." By 
Ms own we may understand the Jews. They 
are peculiarly his own; they are his for more 
reasons than one. In one sense indeed all 
nations are his; as "all things were made by 
him, and without him was not any thing 
made, that was made; — and by him all things 
consist." But the Jews were peculiarly his: 
because he was a Jew, and because they had 
been God's covenant people for nearly two 



18 State of the World 

thousand years. But when Christ came to 
this distinguished and highly favored peo- 
ple, that had so long been his own, they re- 
ceived him not. Tho great multitudes fol- 
lowed him from Galilee, and from Decapo- 
lis, and from Jerusalem, and from Judea, 
and from beyond Jordan, yet very few ap- 
pear to have sincerely received him. Tho 
thousands after thousands were miraculous- 
ly fed by him: and tho even his enemies were 
constrained to acknowledge, that never man 
spake like him, yet comparatively very few 
sincerely received him into their hearts. 
There were his eleven disciples, his seventy 
others, a number of devout women, and a 
few more. But of the many thousands of Is- 
rael, who at one time and another attended 
his preaching and miracles, there is no reason 
to believe, that more than one thousand sin- 
cerely received him, while he remained on 
earth. By reading the ninth chapter of 
John, you will find, that the Jews were so 
exceedingly incensed against Jesus, as to 
agree, that if any man did confess that he 
was the Christ, he should be put out of the 
synagogue. And from the same chapter you 
will find, that they were by no means back- 
ward in executing their engagement; but 
that they actually did cast out of their syn- 
agogue one, whom Jesus had restored to 
sight. And finally they became so exceed- 
ingly mad against the Savior, that with 



During the Millennium* 19 

wicked hands they took him, and condemned 
him, and crucified and slew him. 

After Christ rose from the dead, and as- 
cended into heaven, his gospel was indeed 
preached with more success among the Jews. 
In a short time the church of Jerusalem 
amounted to four or five thousands. But 
still a very small part of the Jewish nation 
were converted to Christ; still Christians 
were despised, opposed and persecuted, by 
those, who gloried in acknowledging Abra- 
ham as their father. Indeed Christ had 
forewarned his disciples, that this should be 
the case. "They shall put you out of their 
synagogues; yea the time cometh that who- 
soever killeth you will think that he doeth 
God service.? 5 Read the Acts of the Apos- 
tles, and you will find, that comparatively 
very few of the Jews were converted to 
Christ. But it is probable, that there were 
more Jewish converts in the days of the 
apostles, than at any time after. It is sup- 
posed that there are now upon earth seven 
or eight million Jews: and probably there 
are not so many as five hundred Christians 
among them all; not one among a thousand. 

But blessed be the God of Abraham, Isaac 
and Jacob, the house of Israel shall not al- 
ways remain in such woful unbelief. For 
thus saith the eternal Johovah, "I am the 
Lord, 1 change not; therefore ye sons of 
Jacob are not consumed." They had com- 
mitted sins enough, and ten thousand times 
more than enough, to merit destruction, 



30 State of the World 

But God had determined to bestow upon 
that stiffnecked and rebellious people, ex- 
ceeding great and precious blessings; he had 
made to them exceeding great and precious 
promvses, which his infinite holiness was 
pledged to accomplish. 

But what are the blessings, which God 
has determined to grant to his ancient peo- 
ple? and what are the promises, that he has 
most solemnly sworn to fulfil? My dear 
Brethren, search the scriptures, and see. 
It is only a small part of the previous and an- 
imating passages relating to thi3 subject, 
that we can now consider. Deut. 30: 1 — 10. 
"And it shall come to pass when all these 
things are come upon thee, the blessing and 
the curse, which I have set before thee, and 
thou shalt call them to mind among all the 
nations, whither the Lord thy God hath 
driven thee, and shalt return unto the Lord 
thy God, and shalt obey his voice, according 
to all that I command thee this day, thou 
and thy children, with all thine heart, and 
with all thy soul; that then the Lord thy 
God will turn thy captivity, and have com- 
passion upon thee, and will return, and 
gather thee from all the nations, whither the 
Lord thy God hath scattered thee. If any 
of thine be driven out unto the utmost parts 
of heaven, from thence will the Lord thy 
God gather thee, and from thence will he 
fetch thee. And the Lord thy God will bring 
there into the land which thy fathers pos- 



During the Millennium. £1 

sessed, and thou shalt possess it; and he 
will do thee good, and multiply thee above 
thy fathers. And the Lord thy God will 
circumcise thine heart, and the heart of thy 
seed, to love the Lord thy God with all thine 
heart, and with all thy soul, that thou may- 
est live. And the Lord thy God will put all 
these curses upon thine enemies, and on them 
that hate thee, which persecuted thee. And 
thou shalt return, and obey the voice of the 
Lord, and do all his commandments, which 
I command thee this day. And the Lord 
thy God will make thee plenteous in every 
work of thine hand, in the fruit of thy body, 
and in the fruit of thy cattle, and in the 
fruit of thy land, for thy good. For the 
Lord thy God will rejoice over thee for 
good, as he rejoiced over thy fathers; if thou 
shalt hearken unto the voice of the Lord thy 
God, to keep his commandments and his 
statutes, which are written in the book of the 
law, and if thou turn unto the Lord thy God 
with all thine heart, and with all thy souL" 

Tho some of these promises are con- 
ditional, yet there can be no reasonable doubt 
that they will all be accomplished according 
to the faithfulness of him, that has promised. 
For the Lord their God has engaged to cir- 
cumcise their hearts, and the hearts of their 
children; and this will ensure the perform- 
ance of every condition on their part, upon 
which any of the promises are suspended. 

In the eleventh of Isaiah, we have one of 



22 State of the World 

the most striking and delightful accounts of 
the peaceful and blessed state of the Millen- 
nium, to be found in the bible. The succeed- 
ing versesycontain a most unequivocal pre- 
diction of the conversion of the Jews, "And 
in that day there shall be a Root of Jesse, 
which shall stand for an ensign of the peo- 
ple; to it shall the Gentiles seek; and his rest 
shall be glorious. And it shall come to pass 
in that day, that the Lord shall set his hand 
again the second time, to recover the rem- 
nant of his people, which shall be left, from 
Assyria, and from Egypt, and from Pathros, 
and from Cush, and from Elam, and from 
Shinar, and from Hamath, and from the 
islands of the sea. And he shall set up an 
ensign for the nations, and shall assemble 
the outcasts of Israel, and gather together 
the dispersed of JiKlah from the four corners 
of the earth. The envy also of Ephraim 
shall depart, and the adversaries of Judah 
shall be cut off; Ephraim shall not envy Ju- 
dah, and Judah shall not vex Ephraim." 

In the latter part of Jer. 3. we have anoth- 
er promise of Israel's conversion. "Turn, 

backsliding children, saith the Lord; for 

1 am married unto you; and I will take you, 
one of a city, and two of a family, and I will 
bring you to Zion. And I will give you 
pastors according to mine heart, which shall 
feed you with knowledge and understanding. 
At that time they shall call Jerusalem the 
throne of the Lord, and all nations shall be 



During the Millennium. 



,1 <D 



gathered unto it, to the name of the Lord, to 
Jerusalem; neither shall they walk any more 
after the imagination of their evil heart. 
In those days the house of Judah shall walk 
with the house of Israel, and they shall come 
together out of the land of the north, to the 
land that 1 have given for an inheritance 
unto your fathers. But I said, How shall I 
put thee among the children, and give thee 
a pleasant land, a goodly heritage of the host 
of nations? And 1 said, Thou shalt call me 
My Father, and shalt not turn away from 
me." 

Jer. 23:3 — 8. "And I will gather the rem- 
nant of my flock out of all countries, whither I 
have driven them, and I will bring them again 
to their folds, and they shall be fruitful, and 
increase. And I will set up shepherds over 
them, which shall feed them; and they shall 
fear no more, nor be dismayed, neither shall 
they be lacking, saith the Lord. Behold the 
days come, saith the Lord, that I will raise 
unto David a righteous Branch; and a King 
shall reign, and prosper, and shall execute 
judgment and justice in the earth. In his 
days Judah shall be saved, and Israel shall 
dwell safely; and this is his name whereby 
he shall be called, The Lord our Right- 
eousness. Therefore, behold, the days 
come, saith the Lord, that they shall no more 
say, The Lord liveth, which brought up the 
children of Israel out of the land of Egypt; 
but the Lord liveth, which brought up, and 



24 State of the World 

which led the seed of the house of Israel out 
of the north country, and from all the coun- 
tries, whither I had driven them; and they 
shall dwell in their own land." 

Jer. 30:7—10. "Alas! for that day is 
great, so that none is like it: it is evea 
the time of Jacob's trouble; but he shall be 
saved out of it. For it shall come to pass in 
that day, saith the Lord of hosts, that I will 
break his yoke from oft* thy neck, and will 
burst thy bonds, and strangers shall no more 
serve themselves of him. But they shall 
serve the Lord their God and David their 
king, whom I will raise up unto them. 
Therefore, fear thou not, my servant Ja- 
cob, saith the Lord; neither be dismayed, O 
Israel; for lo, I will save thee from afar, and 
thy seed from the land of their captivity; 
and Jacob shall return, and shall be in rest, 
and be quiet, and none shall make him 
afraid." This king that the Lord promised 
to raise up unto his people, whom they were 
to serve, could be no other than the spiritual 
David, the Lord Jesus Christ, of whom the 
son of Jesse was an eminent type. 

Jer. 31:31 — 34. "Behold the days come, 
saith the Lord, that I will make a new cove- 
nant with house of Israel, and with the 
house of Judah; not according to the cove- 
nant that I made with their fathers, in the 
day that I took them by the hand, to bring 
them out of the land of Egypt, which my 
covenant they brake, though 1 was an bus- 



During the Millennium, 25 



"c? 



band unto them, saith the Lord. But this 
is the covenant that I will make with the 
house of Israel. After those days, saith the 
Lord, I will put my law in their inward parts, 
and write it in their hearts; and will be their 
God, and they shall be my people. And 
they shall teach no more every man his 
neighbor, and every man his brother, say- 
ing, Know the Lord; for they shall all know 
me from the least of them unto the greatest 
of them, saith the Lord; for I will forgive 
their iniquity, and I w r ill remember their sin 
no more." 

Still more is said upon this subject by Eze- 
kiel. If you begin at the 34th chapter and 
read six chapters in course, you will find 
much, very much, to confirm the proposition 
we are now considering. 

In the New Testament also we have the 
most clear and striking confirmation of the 
same. Rom. 11:15,23—26. "For if the 
casting away of them be the reconciling of 
the world, what will the receiving of them be, 
but life from the dead? And they also, if 
they abide not still in unbelief, shall be 
graffed in; for God is able to graff them in 
again. For if thou wert cut out of the olive 
tree, which is wild by nature, and wert 
graffed, contrary to nature, into a good 
olive tree, how much more shall these, 
which be the natural branches, be graffed 
into their own olive tree? For I would not, 
brethren, that ye should be ignorant of this 
3 



26 State of the World. 

mystery, lest ye should be wise in your own 
conceits, that blindness in part is happened 
to Israel, until the fulness of the Gentiles be 
come in. And so all Israel shall be saved; 
as it is written, There shall come out of Sion 
the Deliverer, and shall turn away ungod- 
liness from Jacob. For this is my covenant 
unto them, when I shall take away their 
sins." This Deliverer, who is to turn away 
ungodliness from Jacob, can be none else 
than Christ the Redeemer; and the time is 
coming, when all Israel shall be saved by 
the blood of the Lamb, so long rejected, des- 
pised and abhorred — when Jew and Gentile 
shall be one sheepfold under Jesus Christ, 
the great Shepherd and Bishop of souls. 



LECTURE II. 

The deliverance of the Church. — The cessation 
of War. 

PROPOSITION IV. 

During the Millennium, the church will 
be delivered from her external enemies. 

Numerous, bitter and dreadful have been 
the enemies of the church, from the begin- 
ning of her existence. The persecution of 
the good — the persecution of the good, on 
account of their goodness, has been almost 
coeval with the world. Almost from the be- 
ginning of time, they that have been born 
after the spirit have been persecuted by 
them, who have been born after the flesh. 
Among the first-born of mankind, behold the 
hands of a brother are bathed in a brother's 
blood! And wherefore slew he him? why did 
Cain slay his brother, his only brother, 
Abel? Because his own works were evil, and 
his brother's righteous. Enoch too was 
probably persecuted. His prophecy, as well 
as his holy walk with God, condemned a 
wicked world. "Behold the Lord cometh," 
said he, "with ten thousand of his saints,to ex- 
ecute judgment upon all, and to convince all 
that are ungodly among them, of all their 
ungodly deeds, which they have ungodly 
committed; and of all their hard speeches, 



28 State of the World 

which ungodly sinners have spoken against 
him." Such conduct and declarations no 
doubt kindled the wrath and rage of those, 
by whom he was reproved. And when it is 
said that he was not founds it probably means, 
that he was not found by his persecutors. 
We know that Lot was persecuted, and that 
his righteous soul was vexed by the Sodom- 
ites from day to day. If Abraham, Isaac 
and Jacob were not persecuted,it was because 
God miraculously restrained their enemies. 
With particular reference to these patriarchs 
it is said, "When they went from one nation 
to another ,from one kingdom to another peo- 
ple, he suffered no man to do them wrong; 
yea he reproved kings for their sakes; say- 
ing, Touch not mine anointed and do my 
prophets no harm."* Joseph was cruelly 
persecuted, first by his own brethren, and 
then by one who attempted to lead him into 
sin; and all this for righteousness' sake. 
How cruel, how inhuman, how execra- 
ble was the treatment, which the children 
of Israel received from the Egyptians. That 
ungrateful people rendered slavery and 
slaughter for the distinguished favors, the 
wonderful deliverance, which they had re- 
ceived by the hand of Joseph. After the 
Israelites were delivered from Egypt, and 
planted and greatly multiplied in the prom- 
ised land, a great part of the nation forgot 

* Ps. 105:13—15. 



During the Millennium* £9 

that God was their Maker, and the most 
high God their Redeemer. Becoming ex- 
ceedingly wicked, they persecuted the little 
remnant of those who were Israelites indeed. 
How grievously did Elijah make supplication 
against Israel, when he said, "Lord they 
have killed thy prophets, and digged down 
thine altars; and I am left alone, and they 
seek my life." And God declared to them 
with awful plainness and emphasis, "Your 
own sword hath devoured your prophets 
like a destroying lion." Accordingly we 
find the Savior expostulating with them, 
and weeping over them in a manner, the 
most tender and affecting. "0 Jerusalem, 
Jerusalem, thou that killest the prophets, and 
stonest them, which are sent unto thee, how 
often would I have gathered thy children 
together, even as a hen gathereth her chick- 
ens under her wings, and ye would not." 

The people of God were also sometimes 
greatly molested by heathen nations, who 
united to crush Israel, and destroy the 
church, Ps. 83: "Keep not thou silence, O 
God; hold not thy peace, and be not still, O 
God. For, lo, thine enemies make a tumult; 
and they that hato thee have lifted up the 
head. . They have taken crafty counsel 
against thy people, and consulted against 
thy hidden ones. They have said, Come, 
and let us cut them off from being a nation, 
that the name of Israel may be no more in 
remembrance. For they have consulted to- 



30 State of the World 

gether with one consent; they are confeder- 
ate against thee; the tabernacles of Edom, 
and the Ishmaelites; of Moab and the Ha- 
garenes; Gcbal and Ammon and Amalek; 
the Philistines with the inhabitants of Tyre; 
Assur also is joined with them; they have 
holpen the children of Lot." How greatly 
were the children of Zion molested in re- 
building their temple and the walls of their 
holy city. They were obliged to hold a wea- 
pon in one hand, while they built with the 
other. In the 11th of Heb. we have a most 
affecting picture of the persecutions, inflict- 
ed upon ancient saints. They were tortur- 
ed, not accepting deliverance — and others 
had trial of cruel mockings and scourgings, 
yea moreover of bonds and imprison- 
ment. They were stoned, they were sawn 
asunder, were tempted, were slain with 
the sword; they wandered about in sheep 
skins and goat skins, being destitute, afflict- 
ed, tormented; of whom the world was 
not worthy} tlicy wandered in deserts, and 
in mountains, and in dens, and caves of 
the earth." 

When the Prince of peace came into the 
world, he did not find it a place of peace for 
hifru Scarcely was the Savior born, when 
the sword of persecution was unsheathed, to 
drink his blood. Behold Rachel, weeping 
for her children, and refusing to be comfort- 
ed, because they are not. Ah, hapless moth- 



During the Millennium. 31 

ers in Bethlehem, suddenly bereaved of your 
sweet smiling innocents, by the relentless 
sword of the cruel. By flight into Egypt, 
the holy Infant is preserved. There he re- 
mains, till it is safe for him to return. Hav- 
ing at length entered upon his public minis- 
try, the Savior's life was almost one contin- 
ued scene of persecution. He was persecut- 
ed by rulers and people, by Scribes and 
Pharisees, by Sadducees and Herodians. 
Enemies could become friends, and combine 
their efforts in opposition to the Savior.* 
After treating him with all manner of abuse, 
and making repeated attempts to take away 
his life, they at length succeeded; and with 
bold and wicked hands they took, and cru« 
ciiicd, and slew, the Lord of glory. 

But the persecution of the righteous did 
not end here. Jesus had forewarned his dis- 
ciples what to expect from a wicked world. 
"Blessed are ye, when men shall revile you, 
and persecute you, and shall say all man- 
iier of evil against you falsely for my sake. 
Rejoice and be exceeding glad; for great is 
your reward in heaven; for so persecuted 
they the prophets which were before you. — - 
And the brother shall deliver the brother to 
death, and the father the child; and the chil- 
dren shall rise up against their parents, and 
cause them to be put to death. And ye shall 
be hated of all men for my name's sake.— 

* Luke 98:11, 



32 State of the World 

The disciple is not above his master, nor the 
servant above his lord. If they have called 
the master of the house Beelzebub, how much 
more shall they call them of his household? 
And fear not them which kill the body, but 
are not able to kill the soul;butratherfear him 
which is able to destroy both soul and body 
in hell." A short time before his death he 
told his disciples, "Then shall they deliver 
you up to be afflicted, and shall kill you; and 
ye shall be hated of all nations for my name's 
sake. And then shall many be offended, 
and shall betray one another and shall hate 
one another. — If the world hate you, ye 
know that it hated me, before it hated you. 
If ye were of ihe world, the world would love 
his own; but because ye are not of the world, 
but I have chosen you out of the world, 
therefore the world hateth you. Remember 
the word that I said unto you, The servant 
is not greater than his lord. If they have 
persecuted me, they will also persecute 
you; if they have kept my saying, they will 
keep yours also. But all these things will 
they do unto you, for my name's sake be- 
cause they know not him that sent me.— . 
They shall put you out of the synagogues; yea 
the time cometh that whosoever killeth you 
will think that he doth God service." 

These solemn premonitions, the followers 
of Jesus found most awfully verified. The 
book of the Acts of the Apostles is in a great 
measure a history of persecutions, inflicted 



During the Millennium. 33 

upon the disciples of Jesus. We find in the 
epistles, some direct accounts of persecution 
for righteousness' sake; and besides these 
there are many allusions to the cruel and 
murderous treatment which Christians re- 
ceived or might expect from their enemies. 
John the Revelator had in vision a pros» 
pect of similar scenes of bloodshed and hor- 
ror. " After this," says he "I beheld, and 
lo, a great multitude, which no man could 
number of all nations, and kindreds, and 
people, and tongues, stood before the throne, 
and before the Lamb, clothed with white 
robes, and palms in their hands; and cried 
with a loud voice, saying, Salvation to our 
God, which sitteth upon the throne, and un- 
to the Lamb. — These are they which come 

OUt Of GREAT TRIBL\LATIOX."# The most 

astonishing object, presented to the apostle's 
view, was a symbol of a persecuting power. 
Rev. 17: ''So he carried me away in the spir- 
it into the wilderness; and I saw a woman 
sit upon a scarlet-colored beast, full of 
names of blasphemy, having seven heads and 
ten horns. And the woman was arrayed in 
purple and scarlet-color, and decked with 
gold and precious stones, and pearls having 
a golden cup in her hand, full of abomina- 
tions and filthiness of her fornication. Aud 
upon her forehead was a name written, 
MYSTERY, BABYLON THE GREAT, 

*Rev. 7:9—14, 



34 State of the World 

THE MOTHER OP HARLOTS AND 
ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH. 

And I saw the woman drunken with the 
blood of the saints, and with the blood of 
the martyrs of Jesus; and when 1 saw her, I 
wondered with great admiration. 55 This 
woman no doubt represented Papal Rome; 
and well might the apostle wonder with great 
admiration, to see the symbol of a hierar- 
chy, professing to be the only true church, 
but in reality the most tremendous persecu- 
tor of the true church, that has ever been 
known. 

Much more might be adduced from this 
mystical book, predicting the persecutions 
of the saints. But I forbear. Perhaps 
enough has been quoted from the Bible up- 
on this awful subject. 

History bears witness, that these predic- 
tions and symbolic representations, were 
from Him, who sees things that are not, as 
tho they were, and is able to declare the end 
from the beginning. The sword of perse- 
cution has been bathed in the blood of mar- 
tyrs for a considerable part of the time, eyer 
since there were Christians to be persecuted. 
Rivers and rivers of Christian blood, have 
been shed by the enemies of the cross, in 
France, in Spain, in Italy, in Germany, in 
Holland, in Britain, in Ireland, &c. It 
seems almost enough to make us weep blood, 
to read the accounts of the cruelties and 
enormities, that have been perpetrated up- 



During the Millennium. 35 

on those, who have loved their Savior more 
than brother or sister, father or mother, wife 
or child — who have loved their Savior even 
unto death. 

But blessed be the Father of mercies, these 
days of blood and horror must have an end; 
and, I trust, if not already finished, they are 
drawing to a close; and all the various forms, 
in which persecution has been inflicted up- 
on the people of God, will soon be termina- 
ted. u Sing O heavens, and be joyful, O earth, 
and break forth into singing, mountains; 
for the Lord hath comforted his peopie, and 
will have mercy upon his afflicted. But 
Zion said, The Lord hath forsaken me, and 
my Lord hath forgotten me. Can a woman 
forget her sucking child, that she should 
have no compassion on the son of her womb? 
Yea, they may forget; yet will I not forget 
thee. Behold I have graven thee upon the 
palms of my hands; thy walls are continu- 
ally before me. Thy children shall make 
haste; thy destroyers and they that made 
thee waste, shall go forth of thee." "Com- 
fort ye, comfort ye my people, saith your 
God. Speak ye comfortably to Jerusalem, 
and cry unto her, that her warfare is accom- 
plished, that her iniquity is pardoned." "For 
the arms of the wicked shall be broken." 
"And my people shall dwell in a peaceable 
habitation, and in sure dwellings, and in 
quiet resting places." "Look upon Zion, 
the city of our solemnities; thine eyes shall 



36 State of the World 

see Jerusalem a quiet habitation, a taberna- 
cle, that shall not be taken down, not one of 
the stakes thereof shall ever be moved, nei- 
ther shall any of the cords thereof be brok- 
en." God declares to Zion, "They that 
swallowed thee up, shall be far away." "In 
righteousness shalt thou be established, and 
thou shalt be far from oppression, for thou 
shalt not fear; and from terror, for it shall 
jiot come near thee. No weapon that is 
formed against thee, shall prosper; and ev- 
ery tongue, that shall rise against thee in 
judgmcnt,thou shalt condemn." "Behold the 
days come, saith the Lord, that I will raise 
unto David a righteous Branch, and a King 
shall reign and prosper, and shall execute 
judgment and justice in the earth. In his 
days Judah shall be saved, and Israel shall 
dwell safely; and this is the name whereby 
lie shall be called, THE LORD OUR 
RIGHTEOUSNESS." "And Jacob shall 
return,and be in rest, and be quiet, and none 
shall make him afraid." "And I will make 
with them a covenant of peace, and will 
cause the evil beasts to cease out of the land, 
and they shall dwell safely in the wilder- 
ness, and sleep in the woods. — And they 
shall no more be a prey to the heathen, nei- 
thershali the beasts of the land devour them; 
but they shall dwell safely, and none shall 
inrke them afraid." 

Thus Christians shall be at peace, and 
dwell safely. They shall not even be molest- 



'During the Millennium. 



"a 



ed by their great accuser. Their grand ad- 
versary, that has taken the lead in every 
persecution since the foundation of the world, 
shall be cast out; he shall be confined during 
the whole Millennial period. 

If any objection should arise in the mind 
of any one, that most of the above mentioned 
passages refer to the Israelites, and there- 
fore cannot imply, that the church generally 
will be at rest, to such objection there are 
two answers. In the first place, if we should 
grant that these passages do refer merely to 
the natural descendents of Abraham and Is- 
rael, still they must imply, that the whole 
church will be equally at rest. For we 
can hardly suppose, that the Jews, after be- 
ing converted to Christianity, will be thus 
at rest, while Gentile Christians are perse- 
cuted. The same causes, that bring peace to 
the Jewish Christian, must bring it equally 
to the Gentile. But there is reason to 
believe, that these promises extend to the 
Gentile church, as well as to the Jewish; or 
rather to the church generally,the one sheep- 
fold, composed of all nations, united under 
the great Shepherd and Bishop of souls. The 
Jews are represented as being broken off 
from the olive tree, and the Gentiles grafted 
into the same. When therefore the Gen- 
tiles are united to the church, or brought 
into the covenant, symbolized by the olive, 
all the promises that were made to the 
church, founded upon that covenant, dc 
4 



38 State of the World 

equally extend to the Gentiles. It is in this 
way, and in this way only, that the Gentiles 
can become partakers with the Jews of the 
root and fatness of the ancient olive. It is in 
this way, that God accomplishes his promise 
to Abraham, to make him the father of many 
nations. All therefore, who are grafted into 
the ancient olive, become Abraham's spirit- 
ual children, and heirs to the exceeding great 
and glorious promises made to Abraham, 
and his spiritual children. In confirmation 
of this the apostle expressly declares, "If ye 
be Christ's, then are ye Abraham's seed, and 
heirs according to the promise." Thus the 
promises are confirmed in Christ, and in him 
are Yea and Amen; and thus they are made 
sure to all the seed: not to that only, which 
is of the law, but to that also, which is of the 
faith of Abraham, who is the father of us all. 
By becoming fellow citizens of Zion, the 
Gentiles become heirs to all the spiritual 
promises, made to ancient Zion. 

There is no doubt that during the Milieu 
nium every Christian on earth will find ene- 
mies in the remaining corruptions of his own 
heart, yet from the passages of scripture, 
which have been quoted, it appears, that 
their warfare with external enemies, will en- 
tirely cease. The same may be made to ap- 
pear with additional evidence under the next 
proposition. 



During the Millennium. 39 

PROPOSITION" V. 

During the Millennium war will be un- 
known. 

The cessation of war will greatly distin- 
guish the Millennial period from all others. 
From the beginning of the world to the 
present day, a great part of the business of 
mankind has been to injure, and to destroy* 
one another. A great part of the history 
of the world, is a history of wars and fight- 
ings. No art was ever more closely studied, 
or more vigorously practised, than the art of 
war. Both the study and the practice com- 
menced before the flood. There were then 
mighty men, men of renown, giants in wick- 
edness, and giants in war. Nay, the earth 
was filled with violence. And this is the 
grand reason, that God assigns, for bringing 
a flood of water upon the earth to drown t!ie 
world. But the flood, tho it cleansed the 
earth from that horrid generation, did not 
wash from the human heart the lust of war. 
Very soon after that tremendous judgment, 
the flames of war were rekindled, and raged 
with perhaps as much fury and devastation, 
as ever. Nimrod is celebrated as a mighty 
hunter before the Lord; and doubtless he was 
no less distinguished, as a warrior. "And 
the beginning of his kingdom was Babel and 
Erech and Accad and Caineh, in the land of 
Shinar." In the days of Abraham, there was 
a war. in which nine kings were engaged, 
four kings against five. But there is not 
time to be particular. M#ny ponderous fo- 



40 State of the World 

lios might be filled, without exhausting the 
subject of war. It is probable, that scarcely 
a year has elapsed, since the days of Abra- 
ham, that has not been marked, and disgrac- 
ed, by war, Tho the slaughter and devasta- 
tion, occasioned by persecution, have been so 
tremendous and horrible, yet we may regard 
it as inconsiderable, compared with what has 
been effected by war. If persecution has slain 
its thousands and its millions, war has slain 
its tens of millions and its hundreds of mil- 
lions. If rivers of blood have been shed by 
the persecutor's sword, oceans of blood have 
been spilt by the weapons of war. It is 
probable, that more have been slain by war, 
multitudes more, than all the vast myriads of 
the human race, that now inhabit the world. 
Bv war the earth has been transformed into 
an Aceldama, a field of blood; into an amaz- 
ing and horrid Golgotha, a filthy and loath- 
some place of sculls. Like EzekiePs valley 
of vision, it has been full of dead men's bones; 
it has been drenched, and soaked, with human 
gore; it has been fattened, with the carcasses 
of men. O shame to men! of all ferocious 
beings, the most ferocious — of all furies, the 
most furious and dreadful. No other ani- 
mals have ever been known thus to prey upon 
their own species. The tender heart is ready 
to exclaim in the language of Cowper, 

"Oh for a lodge in some vast wilderness, 
Some boundless contiguity of shade, 
Where rumor of oppression and deceit, 
Of unsuccessful and successful wax*, 
"Might never reach me more." 



Dining the ^Millennium. 41 

And the Christian with melting heart, and 
streaming eves, lifts a supplicating voice to 
Heaven, 4 <How long, thou God of peace* 
how long shall the sword devour? How long 
must our ears be tortured with the sound of 
wars and rumors of wars? How long shall 
man be suffered to discharge his wrath and 
vengeance, against his brother man? against 
his brother, who is of one flesh and blood with 
himself. thou God of peace and mercy, 
scatter thou the people that delight in war.*' 

Such cries have long been ascending, like 
fragrant incense, before the mercy-seat, and 
have entered the ears of him that heareth 
prayer. An answer of peace is granted, a 
sweet assurance, that these woes shall have 
an end. < c The Lord will give strength to his 
people; the Lord will bless his people with 
peace." "He maketh wars to cease unto 
the end of the earth, he breaketh the bow, 
and cutteth the spear in sunder; he burnetii 
the chariot with fire." "The mountains 
shall bring peace to the people, and the little 
hills by righteousness. He shall judge the 
poor of the people; he shall save the needy, 
and shall break in pieces the oppressor — In 
his days shall the righteous flourish; and 
abundance of peace, so long as the moon en- 
dureth." "He shall judge among the nations, 
and shall rebuke many people; and they 
shall beat their swords into ploughshares and 
their spears into pruning-hooks; nation shall 

sot lift up sword against nation, neither shall 

#4 



42 State of the JVorld, 

they learn war any more. 55 "The wolf also 
shall dwell with the lamb, and the leopard 
shall lie down with the kid, and the calf and 
the young lion, and the fatling together; and 
a little child shall lead them. And the cow 
and the bear shall feed; their young ones shall 
lie down together; and the lion shall eat 
straw, like the ox. And the sucking child 
shall play on the hole of the asp, and the 
weaned child shall put his hand on the cock- 
atrice-den! They shall not hurt or destroy 
in all my holy mountain." "And in that day 
will 1 make a covenant for them with the 
beasts of the field, and with the fowls of 
heaven, and with the creeping things of the 
ground; and I will break the bow, and the 
sword, and the battle, out of the earth, and 
will make them to lie down safely." 

The above passages are from the Old Tes- 
tament. There is one upon this subject in 
the New Testament, that appears more strik- 
ing, than any in the old, tho it may not have 
been generally regarded, Rom. 16:20, "And 
the God of peace shall bruise Satan under 
your feet shortly. By making peace, and 
promoting peace on earth, the God of peace, 
or the Prince of peace, will bruise the ser- 
pent's head. Tho this passage might have 
some reference to the triumphs of the gospel 
of peace in the days of the Apostles, yet no 
doubt its ultimate and more important re- 
ference was to the Millennial day, when "the 
meek shall inherit the earth and delight them- 
selves in the abundance of peace. 53 



LECTURE III. 

The saints 7vill rule the earth; — will possess 
the earth. — The wicked will cease. 

PROPOSITION VI. 

During the Millennium, the saints will rule 
the earth; or in other words, all rulers will be 
saints. 

This has never been the case, since men 
began to multiply upon the earth. There 
have indeed been some pious kings and rul- 
ers, as Melchizedeck, Joseph, Job, Moses, 
Joshua, some of the Judges, Eli, Samuel, 
David, Solomon, Asa, Jehoshaphat, Heze- 
kiah, Josiah, Daniel, Shadrach, Meshach, 
Abednego, and Nehemiah. But these are 
only a few, a very precious few, of the an- 
cient kings and rulers. And scarcely any, 
except these few, have left any evidence of 
their having been good men. It is doubtful 
whether one twentieth part of the kings and 
rulers, mentioned in the Bible, were truly 
virtuous. The rest were evil, enemies to 
God; and a great part of them have been ty- 
rants, oppressors, murderers, enemies to their 
own people, enemies to mankind, proud, 
haughty, licentious, covenant-breakers, im- 
placable, unmerciful, infernal monsters in the 
shape of men — of men, adorned with the en- 
signs of royalty, some of the greatest pests 
and most dreadful plagues, that ever the 



44 State of the World 

wrath of God commissioned to scourge a 
wicked world. 

Look at the kings of God's ancient people, 
"Surely," we may be ready to exclaim,'<SureIy 
these mast have been all righteous. Favor- 
ed and distinguished, as they were, by vari- 
ous privileges, and pressed, as they were, by 
obligations the most weighty, solemn and af- 
fecting, they must have been all good men, 
haters of covetousness, ruling their people in 
the fear of God." No, my brethren, they 
were not all good men. Most of them were 
for, very far indeed, from righteousness. 
There is no reason to think that a quarter of 
them were righteous. Of the twenty kings 
that ruled over Judah, not more than four or 
five were good men, Asa, Jehoshaphat, Hez- 
ekiah, and Josiah. It is doubtful, whether 
we ought to add Manasseh; for tho he repent- 
ed, and died a saint, yet for the greater part 
of his reign, he was the most wicked of all the 
Jewish kings; and it was for his sins, more 
than for those of any other man, that such 
tremendous vials of wrath were poured out 
upon that nation. Tho as an individual, he 
could be pardoned, and saved, yet, as the 
head of a nation, he could not be forgiven; 
hut the people must suffer for the sins of their 
king — sins, in which they were partakers. 
It is doubtful, therefore, whether Manasseh, 
sometimes styled by way of eminence, wicked 
Manasseh, should be ranked among the pious 
kings of Judah. Of the nineteen kings of 



During the Millennium. 45 

the Ten Tribes, not one of them has left the 
least evidence of having been a good man. 
Jeroboam, the son of Nebat, was the firsts 
and he set an example of wickedness for his 
successors, which they were but too careful 
to follow. Every one of them, except Hoshea, 
walked in the ways of "Jeroboam, the son of 
Nebat, who made Israel to sin." And tho 
Hoshea seems to have granted free toleration 
in religion, without compelling his subjects 
to worship idols, like his predecessors, yet 
there is very little reason to doubt, that he 
Mas himself a wicked man, and an idolater. 
Now if we add David and Solomon to the 
four or five pious kings of Judah, we shall 
have six or seven pious kings of the stock of 
Israel; only six or seven, out of forty-twoj 
only one seventh,or at most, one sixth part of 
the whole. And now I would ask the impar- 
tial historian, what nation, that has been 
ruled by as many as forty-two kings, or half 
that number, has ever been favored by so 
large a proportion of those that were pious? 
What a dark, and gloomy, and horrible pic- 
ture does this present of the royal families of 
the earth. Surely none of their descendents 
can have much cause to boast his royal blood. 
But, if through the telescope of prophecy, we 
take a view of future ages, the prospect 
brightens; and a picture of royalty is pre- 
sented, as lovely, as it is splendid. 

Here I would just remark, that I use the 
word royalty y in accommodation to the Ian- 



46 State of the World 

guage of Scripture. I am very far from 
thinking, that, all human governments, (lur- 
ing the Millennium, will be monarchies. In<- 
deed it is by no means clear, that there will then 
be a single king or emperor upon the face of 
the earth. It is very conceivable, that the 
word kings, as used in prophecy, may mean 
no more, than presidents, governors, and 
other officers, exalted from time to time from 
among the people. 

But, tho we do not know what will be the 
form or forms of human governments during 
the Millennium; yet we do know, that there 
will be hum tn governments, and we know 
what will be the character of the rulers. 
They will be all go^>d men. "Because of thy 
temple at Jerusalem." says the inspired 
psalmist, "kings shall bring presents unto 
thee." And concerning Christ, it is said, 
"The kings of Tarshish and of the isles; the 
kings of Shcba and Seba shall offer gifts, yea 
all kings shall fall down before him; all na- 
tions shall serve him." In another place it 
is said, "So the heathen shall fear the name 
of the Lord, and all the kings of the earth 
thy glory." Again, "All kings of the earth 
shall praise thee, O Lord, when they hear 
the word of thy mouth; yea they shall sing 
in the ways of the Lord; for great is the glo- 
ry of the Lord." By the mouth of Isaiah, 
God has promised to his church, "And kings 
shall be thy nursing fathers, and their queens 
thy nursing mothers; they shall bow down to 



Daring the Millennium. 47 

thee with their face toward the earth." 
"And the Gentiles shall come to thy light, 
and kings to the brightness of thy rising — 
And the sons of strangers shall build up thy 
walls, and their kings shall minister unto 
thee — Thou shalt also suck the milk of the 
Gentiles, thou shalt suck the breast of kings — 
I will also make thy officers peace and thine 
exactors righteousness/' In Daniel we read, 
•«But the saints of the Most High shall take 
the kingdom, possess the kingdom forever, 
even forever and ever. — And the kingdom 
and the dominion, and the greatness of the 
kingdom under the whole heaven, shall be 
given to the people of the saints of the Most 
High, whose kingdom is an everlasting king- 
dom; and all dominions shall serve and obey 
him." In the eleventh chapter of Rev. we 
read, "And the seventh angel sounded, and 
there were great voices in heaven, saying 
The kingdoms of this world are become the 
kingdoms of our Lord, and of his Christ; and 
he shall reign forever and ever." In the 
twentieth chapter of the same book, im- 
mediately after the account of the confine- 
ment of Satan, the revelator observes, "And 
I saw thrones, and they sat upon them, and 
judgment was given unto them; and 1 saw 
the souls of them filial were beheaded for the 
witness of Jesus, and for the word of God, 
and which had not worshipped the beast, 
neither his image, neither had received his 
mark upon their foreheads, or in their hands: 



48 State of the World 

and they lived, and reigned with Christ a 
thousand years. " The people will be so 
perfectly satisfied with the conduct of their 
rulers, that they are represented as taking 
part in the government; and all will be trans- 
acted so perfectly according to the will of 
Christ, that they are represented as reigning 
with him. This wonderful passage will be 
more particularly considered hereafter. 

PROPOSITION VII. 

During the Millennium, the righteous 
will possess the earth. 

Hitherto the righteous have possessed but 
a very small proportion of the earth, or of 
earthly goods. They have indeed been but 
a small part of mankind; so that, if they 
had been as wealthy as the wicked, they 
would have possessed but a small part of the 
earth. But it does not appear, that the 
righteous have generally been as wealthy as 
the wicked. Very few Christians indeed 
have been rich; the great majority of them 
have been poor. There appears to be some- 
thing in the possession of great worldly 
wealth, peculiarly unfavorable to embracing 
the religion of Jesus. It is natural for the 
poor to look up to the rich, and to pay them 
homage, as a kind of superior beings. It is 
no less natural — it is perhaps even more nat- 
ural, for the rich to look down upon the 
poor. Now it is peculiarly hard for those 
who receive such homage and adulation, 
and thus look down upon others, to be- 



During the Millennium. 49 

come beggars, to bow the knee, to bow the 
soul to Jesus, to prostrate themselves before 
the meek and lowly Savior, the humble and 
despised Galilean, who was scourged, insult- 
ed, crowned with thorns, mocked, and spit 
upon. But beggars they must be, or they 
cannot be Christians. They must beg — 
they must beg for life, to this same despis- 
ed, abhorred Galilean. For if they will not 
ask, they cannot receive. In order to find 
acceptance, the rich must prostrate himself 
as low as the meanest beggar. Under a 
sense of his own vileness and guilt, he must 
cry with the poor publican, that did not dare 
to lift up so much as his eyes to heaven, 
"God be merciful to me a sinner." It will 
not avail for him to say, "God be merciful 
to me, because 1 am rielfc and increased in 
goods; because I am honorable; because lam 
highly distinguished, and highly esteemed 
among men.-' No, he must cry, "God, be 
merciful to me a sinner." And tho Chris- 
tians often find it a great and delightful priv- 
ilege thus to beg and plead; yet there is 
scarcely any thing, that is more contrary to 
the natural heart. Self-righteous, and self- 
sufficient, the natural man is ashamed to beg. 
And this pride, this self-righteousness, this 
self-sufficiency, is extremely apt to be in- 
creased by riches. The love of money, the 
inordinate love of money, is the usual con- 
comitant of great riches; and this we know- 
is the root of all evil. The parable of the 



50 State of the World 

rich man, recorded in the 12th of Luke, is 
suited to teach us the danger of wealth. 
"The ground of a certain rich man brought 
forth plentifully* And he thought within 
himself, saying, What shall I do? because I 
have no room to bestow my fruits. And lie 
said, This will I do; 1 will pull down my 
barns, and build greater, and there will 1 be- 
stow all my fruits and my goods; and I will 
say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods 
laid up for many years, take thine ease, eat, 
drink, and be merry. But God said unto 
him, Thou fool! this night thy soul shall be 
required of thee; then whose shall those 
things be, which thou hast provided? So is 
he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is 
not rich toward God." Christ was poor; 
he had not where t(|lay his head. The apos- 
tles were poor; they knew what it was to 
suffer need. And we arc expressly inform- 
ed, that in the days of the apostles Christians 
were generally poor. "For ye see your call- 
ing, brethren, how that not many wise men 
after the flesh, not many mighty, not many 
noble, are called." And so it has been 
from that day to the present. 

Do not misunderstand me, my brethren* 
I would by no means imply, that a rich man 
cannot be a good man. He is certainly un- 
der very great and peculiar obligations to be 
good. And some rich men have been good. 
Notwithstanding all the difficulties and temp- 
tations, with which they have been called 



During the Millennium. 51 



r< ^ 



to struggle, some rich men have been 
good. Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, those 
distinguished patriarchs and saints, they 
were rich; Joseph also, and Job, and Dan- 
iel, and Zaccheus, and Joseph of Arimathea, 
and others. Blit notwithstanding these no- 
ble examples, and others in later ages, that 
have been scarcely less laudable, there is 
reason to believe, thai a vast proportion of 
the opulent have belonged to the synagogue 
of Satan, and died in their sins. 

But it will not be thus in the Millennium. 
The earth will then belong to the righteous. 
The preceding proposition may furnish an 
argument in proof of this. If all the rulers 
are to be pious men, we may reasonably 
conclude, that a great proportion of the 
wealthy and honorable of the earth will 
also be pious. 

That the righteous shall possess the earth, 
seems to be clearly intimated in the promise 
made to Abraham, after he had offered up 
his son Isaac. "In blessing I will bless 
thee, and in multiplying, 1 will multiply thy 
seed, as the stars of heaven, and as the sand, 
which is upon the sea-shore; and thy seed 
shall possess the gate of his enemies." Pos- 
sessing the gate of their enemies is consider- 
ed as implying, that the seed of Abraham 
shall possess the cities of their enemies — the 
cities, formerly possessed by their enemies. 
This passage however merely shows, that 
the seed of Abraham shall possess what had 



52 State of the World 

belonged to their enemies. There are sev- 
eral other passages, that most clearly show, 
not only that the righteous shall possess the 
gate of their enemies, and possess the earth; 
but likewise show by what right, they shall 
come into possession. The righteous shall 
possess the earth by inheritance — by the 
right of another. One of the most striking of 
these passages is Rom. 4: 13. "For the promise 
th?t he sh«»uld be the heir of the world, was 
nor to Abra' am, or to his seed through the 
law, hut through the righteousness of faith. 5 * 
This passage, which very few have probably 
considered with the attention it deserves, 
clearly implies, that the seed of Abraham, his 
spiritual children, those who become such by 
the righteousness of faith, shall inherit the 
world. There are several other passages, 
that declare, or imply, that the saints shall 
inherit the earth. Ps. £5:12,13. "What 
man is he that feareth the Lord? him shall 
he teach in the way that he shall choose; his 
soul shall dwell at ease; and his seed shall 
inherit the earth.' 5 By his seed here, we 
are doubtless to understand his spiritual 
seed. In many instances it seems impossi- 
ble, that it can be true, except as applied to 
spiritual seed. Doubtless every real Chris- 
tian may be considered, as the parent of 
spiritual children. Every real Christian is 
a member of the spiritual Zion; and all that 
are born into Christ's kingdom, are the 
children of Zion. Accordingly we read 



During the Millennium. 



b* 



"As soon as Zion travailed, she brought 
forth her children.'* There is no difficulty 
therefore in supposing, that the promises in 
the twenty-fifth Psalm above quoted, extend 
to the spiritual seed of him that feareth the 
Lord. There are many other instances in 
the bible, where by the seed of the righteous, 
we are to understand their spiritual seed; 
and, if I do not exceedingly mistake, there 
are some instances, in which by the seed of 
the wicked, we are to understand their spir- 
itual seed, or the wicked in succeeding ages. 
But to return to the subject. In Is. 54:3. it 
is said to Zion, "For thou shalt break forth 
on the right hand and on the left, and thy 
seed shall inherit the Gentiles, and make thy 
desolate cities to be inhabited." Ps. 37. "For 
evil-doers shall be cut off; but those, that 
wait upon the Lord, they shall inherit the 
earth — But the meek shall inherit the earth, 
and shall delight themselves in the abund- 
ance of peace — The righteous shall inherit 
the land, and dwell therein forever — Wait 
on the Lord and keep his way, and he shall 
exalt thee, to inherit the land." They that 
now wait upon the Lord shall inherit the 
earth, not in their persons, but in their seed. 
In the same sense we may understand Matt. 
5:5. "Blessed are the meek; for they shall 
inherit the land."* I will add but one more 

* If these Lectures were not designed principally for the 
tmlearned, I should think it proper particularly to consider 
the note of Dr. Campbell upon this passage. 

# 5 



54 State of the World 

passage upon this topic. Is 60:21. "Thy 
people also shall be all righteous; they shall 
inherit the land forever, the branch of my 
planting, the work of my hands; that I may 
be glorified." 

PROPOSITION VIII. 

During the Millennium, the wicked will 
cease from the earth. 

Hitherto the world has been exceedingly 
infested with evil-doers. Before the flood, 
almost all mankind were wicked. And since 
the flood, they have been very little better. 
In some respects no doubt, they have been 
worse. Evil men and seducers have waxed 
worse and worse; and have become more wise 
to do evil than their antediluvian progenitors. 
But the earth will not be tji us infested and 
polluted forever. Several passages seem 
very clearly to prove that the earth shall be 
purged from the wicked. Ps. 37:10,35.36. 
"For yet a little while, and the wicked shall 
not be> yea, thou shalt diligently consider 
his place, and it shall not be." We can 
hardly suppose, that this means merely that 
the wicked, then upon earth, should shortly 
die. In this sense it might have been said 
with equal truth, "For yet a little while, and 
the righteous shall not be." But is it not 
manifest, that the inspired penman meant 
to assert something of the wicked, which 
was not equally true of the righteous? It is 
immediately added, "But the meek shall in- 
herit the earth, and shall delight themselves 



93 



During the Millc nniu m. 5 5 

in the abundance of peace. 55 Does not this 
imply, that the righteous shall enjoy peace- 
able times on earth, after the wicked are cut 
off — that they shall delight themselves in the 
abundance of peace, when there are no evil- 
doers to molest, or make them afraid? Again, 
« C I have seen the wicked in great power, 
spreading himself like a green bay tree; yet 
he passed away, and lo, he was not; yea, I 
sought him, but he could not be found 
Here the passing away of the mighty wick- 
ed, an event, that was future, and then about 
three thousand years distant, is represented 
as past. This is a case by no means singular 
in prophetic scripture. Several other pas- 
sages declare, or imply, that the wicked 
shall be cut off from the earth. Ps. 37:1,2, 
9,14,15,20,22,28,34: "Fret not thyself be- 
cause of evil-doers, neither be thou envious 
against the workers of iniquity: for they 
shall soon be cut down like the grass, and 
wither as the green herb — For evil-doers 
shall be cut off; but those that wait upon the 
Lord, they shall inherit the earth — The wick- 
ed have drawn out the sword, they have 
bent their bow to cast down the poor and 
needy, and to slay such as be of upright 
conversation. Their sword shall enter into 
their own heart, and their bow shall be 
broken. — But the wicked shall perish, and 
the enemies of the Lord shall be as the fat 
of lambs; they shall consume, into smoke 
shall they consume away. — For such as be 



56 State of the World 

blessed of him shall inherit the earth; and 
they that be cursed of him shall be cut off. — 
For the Lord loveth judgment, and for- 
saketh not his saints; they are preserved 
forever; but the seed of the wicked shall be 
cut off — Wait on the Lord, and keep his 
way, and he shall exalt thee to inherit the 
land: when the wicked are cut off thou shalt 
see it." Ps. 92: 7 "When the wicked spring 
as the grass, and when all the workers of 
iniquity do flourish; it is that they shall 
be destroyed forever — For, lo, O Lord, for 
lo, thine enemies shall perish; all the work- 
ers of iniquity shall be scattered." 

Many other passages declare, or imply, 
not only that the wicked shall be cut off, but 
that they shall be cut off by Christ, or for 
the promotion of his glorious kingdom. Ps. 
2:8,9,12. "Ask of me, and I shall give thee 
the heathen for thine inheritance, and the ut- 
termost parts of the earth for a possession. 
Thou shalt break them with a rod of iron; 
thou shalt dash them in pieces like a potter's 
vessel — Kiss the Son, lest he be angry, and 
ye perish from the way, when his wrath is 
kindled but a little," Is. 11:1,4. "And 
there shall come forth a rod out of the stem 
of Jesse, and a Branch shall grow out of his 
roots — AmA he shall smite the earth with the 
rod of his mouth, and with the breath of his 
lips shall he slay the wicked." This is 
manifestly introductory to the Millennium; 
for the prophet immediately proceeds to de- 



During the Millennium* 57 

scribe the peaceful and blessed state of that 
period. "The wolf shall dwell with the 
lamb, and the leopard shall lie down with the 
kid — for the earth shall be full of the knowl- 
edge of the Lord, as the waters cover the 
seas.' 5 Again, Is. 60:12. "For the nation 
and kingdom, that will not serve thee, shall 
perish, yea those nations shall be utterly 
wasted." In Is. 63: we have an account of 
the slaughter, which Christ will execute upon 
his enemies, perhaps the most tremendous, 
that is to be found in the Old Testament. 
"Who is he that conieth from Edom, with 
dyed garments from Bozrah? tins that is 
glorious in his apparel, travelling in the 
greatness of his strength? I that speak in 
righteousness, mighty to save. Wherefore 
art thou red in thine apparel, and thy garments 
like him that treadeth in the wine-fat? 1 have 
trodden the wine-press alone; and of the 
people there was none with me; for I will 
tread them in mine anger, and trample them 
in my fury; and their blood shall besprinkled 
upon my garments, and 1 will stain all my 
raiment. For the day of vengeance is in 
mine heart, and the year of my redeemed is 
come. And I looked, and there was none to 
help: and \ wondered that there was none to 
uphold; therefore mine own arm brought sal= 
vation unto me; and my fury, it upheld me. 
And I will tread down the people in mine 
anger, and make them drunk in my fury, and 
I will bring down their strength to the earth/ 3 



58 State of the World 

Nearly as much, perhaps, is implied by 
Ps. 46: '<God is our refuge and strength, a 
very present help in trouble. Therefore will 
we not fear, tho the earth be removed, and 
tho the mountains be carried into the midst 
of the sea — The heathen raged, the king- 
doms were moved; he uttered his voice; the 
earth melted — Come behold the works of 
the Lord, what desolations he hath made 
in the earth. lie maketh wars to cease unto 
the end of the earth; he breaketh the bow, 
and cutteth the spear in sunder; he burneth 
the chariot in the fire. Be still and know 
that I am God; 1 will be exalted among the 
heathen, I will be exalted in the earth/ 1 

Thus it appears, that the peaceful and hap- 
py state of the Millennium is predicted, and 
promised, as being introduced by signal 
desolations in the earth, by dreadful slaugh- 
ter of the wicked. I have sometimes pre- 
sumed to hope, that the greater part of this 
slaughter and desolation was past; but upon 
more close consideration, I am induced to 
think that they arepi incipaliy, if not entire- 
ly, future; and that the whirlwind of the 
Lord's anger will yet go forth, in unexam- 
pled fury, even a grievous whirlwind, and 
that it will fall most grievously upon the 
head of the wicked. In the latter day it 
shall be perfectly considered. * It seems 
that the desolations and slaughter, produced 
by this whirlwind of divine wrath, shall ex- 
cite more attention and consideration, thaa 

*Jer. 23:19,20. 



During the Millennium. 59 

any other, that ever was commissioned to 
chastise the children of men in the present 
world. Tho 1 trust the church has seen her 
darkest days, yet 1 can by no means suppose, 
that the wicked have felt the most signal and 
tremendous judgments, allotted for their 
portion in this world. 

We are not to suppose however, that all are 
to he thus cut off, who may be found opposed 
to Christ and his kingdom. We cannot but 
indulge the hope, that the Millennium will 
not be introduced merely, nor principally, 
by the destruction of the wicked. Not- 
withstanding the amazing slaughter, that is 
to take place, it is to be hoped, that the 
greater part of the wicked will be converted, 
to introduce the blessed and glorious day. 
In Is. 66:7,8. We have a wonderful pas- 
sage upon this subject. "Befoie she travail- 
ed, she brought forth; before her pain came, 
she was delivered of a man-child Who hath 
heard such a thing? who hath seen such 
things? Shall the earth be made to bring 
forth in one day? or shall a nation be born 
at once? for as soon as Z ion travailed, she 
brought forth her children.'* The nation, 
that is to be born at once, may be the Jew- 
ish nation, who will probably be converted 
in a very few years after any considerable 
number of the stock of Israel are called in. 
But the other expressions in the passage, do 
undoubtedly imply, that vast myriads of the 
Gentiles shall be converted, nearly at the 
time. 



LECTURE IV. 

Ml shall know the Lord — Knowledge will 
be greatly increased. 

PROPOSITION IX. 

In the Millennium, all shall know and 
serve the Lord. 

To those who are sighing and crying for 
the abominations of the world — to those who 
are waiting and panting for the consolation 
of Israel, this proposition may be more in- 
teresting, than any other. For this reason, 
and also for another, that will afterwards ap- 
pear, I shall say more upon this proposition, 
than would otherwise be deemed necessary. 

Tho the perfections of God are inscribed 
upon all things as with a sun-beam, and en- 
graven as with the point of a diamond; yet 
how small part of our race have known the 
Lord. It has been a question with some, 
whether ever any man was an atheist. And 
when we consider the abundant evidence, 
the glaring and overwhelming evidence, of 
the divine existence, we may well wonder, 
how it can be possible, that any man should 
ever deny, or doubt, the being of Jehovah. 
But, when we consider what is in man, the 
amazing depravity of the human heart, that 
it is deceitful above all things and desperate- 
ly wicked — when we consider the astonish- 
ing influence of the heart upon the opera- 



During the Millennium. 61 

tions and decisions of the understanding, 
and that the fool hath said in his heart 
"There is no God" — when we consider these 
things, we are not to think it impossible, we 
are not to think it more strange, than any 
thing else, that there have been atheists in 
the world. Tho most men have professed 
to believe in the existence of invisible be- 
ings superior to themselves; and tho a very 
great part of mankind have acknowledged 
lords many and gods many; yet I have not 
the least doubt, that there have been in the 
world, and still are, millions and millions 
of atheists; nay that by far the greater part 
of the human race, that have yet breathed 
the breath of life, have been atheists — have 
had no fixed belief, nor just conception of 
the being and perfections of Him, whose 
name alone is Jehovah. Have not the 
majority of men lived without God in the 
world? — have they not conducted as tho 
they had no fixed belief in the supreme, eter- 
nal, self-existent God? If actions speak 
louder than words, must we not conclude, 
that they had no such fixed belief? Only let 
it be reputable to be thought an atheist, and 
no doubt thousands would soon be heard ex- 
claiming with blasphemous exultation, that 
they had never believed — that they had al- 
ways despised the superstitious notion, that 
there is any being superior to man. But 
atheism will not thus prevail in the Millen- 
nium. Men will then not only believe, but 
6 



62 State of the World 

know, there is a God; and not only believe* 
and know, that God exists; but delight to 
serve and adore him. In time past, but a 
small proportion of those, who have known 
God speculatively, have sincerely obeyed, 
and worshipped him. It is said of ancient 
heathen philosophers, "When they knew 
God, they glorified him not as God, neither 
were thankful." This has doubtless been 
the case with myriads of mankind. How 
many have there been in the world, and how 
many are there still, who have professed, 
that they have known God, and yet in works 
have constantly denied him. But in the 
blessed period, that is approaching, there 
will be no such denial of God. Neither the 
theory nor the practice of atheism will have 
place on earth. 

Knowing the Lord, as the phrase is gen- 
erally used in scripture, implies knowing 
him with the understanding, with the heart, 
and in the life. That all shall know the 
Lord in these senses, is manifest from the 
propositions, that have been already consid- 
ered. If religion is to prevail much more, 
than ever it has prevailed; if idolatry is to 
cease; if the Jews are all to become Christ 
tians; if Zion is to be delivered from all her 
external enemies; if war is to cease; if the 
saints are to rule and inherit the earth; and 
especially if the wicked are all to cease from 
the earth; then surely all that remain upon 
the earth must be righteous- — must know am! 



During the Millennium. 63 

serve the Lord, from the least unto the 
greatest. 

Of the numerous passages of scripture, by 
which this proposition may be established, 
only a part will be adduced. In Gen. 1£:3 
God says to Abraham, "And I will bless 
them that bless thee, and curse him that 
curseth thee; and in thee shall all the fami- 
lies of the earth be blessed. 55 The latter part 
of this exceeding great and precious prom- 
ise, was several times repeated to the father 
of the faithful with very little variation in 
expression. The way, in which the families 
and kindreds of the earth shall be blessed in 
Abraham, is by being blessed in his seed, 
that is Christ. This promise has never been 
fulfilled; it is hardly to be supposed, that 
even some individuals of all nations have 
been blessed in Christ; much less have all the 
families of the earth at any age been blessed 
in him. The promise then is far, very far 
indeed, from having been accomplished. Oiv- 
ly a few of the first fruits have yet been 
gathered in. The vast and glorious harvest 
is yet future. And tho the promise does not 
say, that every individual of the human fam- 
ily shall be righteous, yet its extensive im- 
port seems to amount very nearly to this. 
In Ps. 2: the Father says to the Son, "Ask 
of me, and I will give thee the heathen for 
thine inheritance, and the uttermost parts of 
the earth for a possession." This passage 
cannot be understood, as implying less, than 



64 State of the World 

that mankind generally, at some future period, 
shall he cordially subjected to Christ. Ps. 
22:27. "All the ends of the earth shall re- 
member, and turn unto the Lord; and all 
the kindreds of the nations shall worship be- 
fore thee." "For the kingdom is the Lord's; 
and he is the governor among the nations. 
All they that be fat upon the earth shall eat 
and worship; all they that go down to the 
dust shall bow before him. — A seed shall " 
serve him; it shall be accounted to the Lord 
for a generation. They shall come, and 
shall declare Ids righteousness to a people 
that shall be born, that he hath done this." 
Ps. 48:10. "According to thy name, God, 
is thy praise unto the ends of the earth." 
Ps. 65:2,5. 4 <0 thou that hearest prayer, 
unto thee shall all flesh come." This pas- 
sage docs not directly declare, tho it may 
indeed imply, that it is the duty of all flesh 
to come unto God; but it seems to be a sim- 
ple prediction, that the time shall come, when 
all flesh, all the inhabitants of the world,shall 
draw near to God in prayer. The fifth 
verse seems to imply, that the day, when all 
shall pray to God, will be introduced by 
dreadful judgments; and that these judg- 
ments may be considered in some sense as 
in answer to prayer; and that then God 
will become the confidence of all the inhabi- 
tants of the earth, whether on the sea, or on 
the land: < c By terrible things in righteous- 
ness, thou wilt answer us, God of our sal- 



During the Millennium* 65 

vation; who art the confidence of all the 
ends of the earth, and of them that are afar 
off upon the sea." Ps. 66:1 — 4. "Make a 
joyful noise unto God all ye lands; sing forth 
the honor of his name; make his praise 
glorious. Say unto God, How terrible art 
thou in thy works! through the greatness of 
thy power, shall thine enemies submit them- 
selves unto thee. All the earth shall wor- 
ship thee, and shall sing unto thee; they 
shall sing to thy name." Ps.67:7. "God shall 
bless us; and all the ends of the earth shall 
fear him." In Ps. 72. it is said of the king, 
of whom Solomon was a type, "The kings of 
Tarshish and of the isles shall bring pres- 
ents; the kings of Sheba and Seba shall offer 
gifts; yea, all kings shall fall down before 
him; all nations shall serve him — all nations 
shall call him blessed." Ps. 8<2:8. " Arise, 
O God, judge the earth; for thou shalt inherit 
all nations." Ps. 86:9. U A11 nations, whom 
thou hast made, shall come and worship be- 
fore thee, Lord; and shall glorify thy 
name." Ps. 98:3,4. "He hath remembered 
his mercy and his truth toward the house 
of Israel; all the ends of the earth have seen 
the salvation of God. Make a joyful noise 
unto the Lord, all the earth; make a loud 
noise, and rejoice, and sing praise." Ps. 
113:3. "From the rising of the sun unto 
the going down of the same, the Lord's 
name is to be praised." Is. 11:9. u For 
the earth shall be full of the knowledge ojf 



66 State of the World. 

the Lord, as the waters cover the seas." 
Is, 27:6. "He shall cause them that come of 
Jacob to take root; Israel shall blossom, and 
bud, and fill the face of the world with fruit." 
Tho this may have an important reference 
to the seed of Jacob according to the flesh; 
yet no doubt it has a much more important 
reference to his spiritual seed — to those who 
shall be Israelites indeed. Is. 45:22 — 25. 
"Look unto me and be ye saved, all the ends 
of the earth; for I am God, and there is none 
else. I have sworn by myself, the word is 
gone out of my mouth in righteousness, and 
shall not return, That unto me every knee 
shall bow, every tongue shall swear. Surely, 
shall one say, in the Lord have I righteous- 
ness and strength; even to him shall men 
come; and all, that are incensed against 
him, shall be ashamed. In the Lord shall 
all the seed of Israel be justified, and shall 
glory." Is. 52:9,10. "Break forth into joy, 
sing together, ye waste places of Jerusalem; 
for the Lord hath comforted his people, and 
hath redeemed Jerusalem. The Lord hath 
made bare his holy arm in the eyes of all the 
nations; and all the ends of the earth shall 
see the salvation of our God." Is. 54:4,5. 
''Fear not, for thou shalt not be ashamed; 
neither be thou confounded; for thou shalt 
not be put to shame; for thou shalt forget the 
shame of thy youth, and shalt not remember 
the reproach of thy widowhood any more,. 
For thy Maker is thine husband; the Lor$ 



During the Millennium. 67 



"a 



of hosts is his name; and thy Redeemer, the 
Holy One of Israel; The God of the whole 
earth shall he be called." Is. 60:21. "Thy 
people also shall be all righteous; they shaJl 
inherit the land for ever, the branch of my 
planting the work of my hands; that I may 
be glorified." Is. 66:*23. "And it shall 
come to pass, that from one new moon to 
another, and from one Sabbath to another, 
shall all flesh come to worship before me, 
saiththe Lord." Jer. 3:ir. ^At that time, 
they shall call Jerusalem the throne of the 
Lord, and all nations shall be gathered unto 
it, to the name of the Lord, to Jerusalem; 
neither shall they walk any more after the 
imagination of their evil heart." Hab. 2:14* 
"For the e^rth shall be tilled with the knowl- 
edge of the glory of the Lord, as the waters 
cover the sea." Zee. 14:9. "And the Lord 
shall be King overall the earth; in that day 
there shall be one Lord, and his name one*" 
Upon this passage Mr- Scott observes, near- 
ly in the following words: "The Lord shall 
become King over all the earth; not only iu 
right, but in fact, till neither idols, false re- 
ligion, nor antichristian powers be left his 
rivals; till all princes submit, and serve 
him, and all the earth agree in one object 
and one way of worship, and unite in sub- 
mission and obedience to one Lord." Matt. 
13:33. < c Another parable spake he unto them> 
< c The kingdom of heaven is like unto leaven, 
which a woman took and hid in three meas- 



68 State of the World 

ures of meal, till the whole was leavened/' 
When the gospel of the kingdom has 
spread, and prevailed to such a degree, as to 
leaven the hearts and practices of all man- 
kind, then all must know and serve the Lord. 
In John 12:32, the Savior declares, "And 
I, if I be lifted up from the earth, will draw 
all men unto me." To say, that some of all 
nations shall be drawn to Christ is so far 
from being an adequate exposition of this 
passage, that it seems infinitely unsatisfac- 
tory. Upon such a principle, the exceeding 
great, and precious, and glorious, and stu- 
pendous promises of God, may be interpret- 
ed to mean almost nothing; and heaven and 
hell may be supposed to be very nearly 
alike. Rev. 15:4. "Who shall not fear thee 
O Lord and glorify thy name?" 

But the passage, that in my mind, estab- 
lishes the proposition under consideration 
more decidedly, than any other, is Rev. 
20:5. «'But the rest of the dead lived not 
again, until the thousand years were finish- 
ed." The apostle is here speaking of the 
wicked dead, who should not live, or rise, till 
the end of the Millennium." To me it ap- 
pears very clear, that this resurrection of the 
wicked, at the end of the Millennium, is a 
spiritual resurrection; that the wicked are 
then to live in their successors, in the same 
sense, as Elijah lived in John the Baptist; 
and as the wicked are not to live, till the 
end of the Millennium, there will be no wick- 



During the Millennium. 69 



■a 



ed men upon earth; and consequently all 
must be righteous, during that blessed pe- 
riod. But as this point cannot be obvious to 
those, who have not attended particularly to 
this passage, and as some expositors have 
thought differently, it seems proper, that I 
should state the reasons of my opinion a lit- 
tle more fully. To present a clear view of 
the subject, it may be proper to quote two 
or three verses in connexion. ''And 1 saw 
the souls of them, which were beheaded for 
the witness of Jesus, and for the word of 
God, and which had not worshipped the 
beast, neither his image, neither had re- 
ceived his mark in their foreheads, or in 
their hands; and they lived and reigned with 
Christ a thousand years. But the rest of 
the dead lived not again, until the thousand 
years were finished. This is the first res- 
urrection. Blessed and holy is he, that hath 
part in the first resurrection; on such the 
second death hath no power; but they shall 
bo priests of God and of Christ, and shall 
reign with him a thousand years. And when 
the thousand years are expired, Satan shall 
be loosed out of his prison. 1 ' In the first 
place it appears manifest that the first res- 
urrection will be merely spiritual. As the 
Revelation is in a great measure a book of 
symbols, there is not the least difficulty in 
supposing, that the first resurrection will he 
merely spiritual. Indeed this seems most 
agreeable to the general tenor of this mys- 



70 State of the World 

tical book. In remarking upon this passage 
Mr. Scott observes: "I cannot see that the 
resurrection of souls can literally mean the 
resurrection of bodies." Paul represents 
himself and his fellow martyrs a?nd fellow 
Christians, as rising at the last trump, at 
the end of the world; which cannot be true, 
if they are to rise more than a thousand 
years before. These reasons, if there were 
no other, would be sufficient to convince me, 
beyond the shadow of a doubt, that the first 
resurrection will be merely spiritual; that 
the martyrs will not live upon earth during 
the Millennium, except in their successors, 
or in those possessed of the spirit and zeal 
of martyrs (though they will not be called to 
suffer martyrdom) as John the Baptist is 
said to be Elias or Elijah; because he came 
in the spirit and power of Elijah. 

If the first resurrection is to be spiritual, 
there is equal reason to believe, that the next 
resurrection, or the resurrection of the rest 
of the dead, immediately after the Millenni- 
um, will also be merely spiritual. Indeed, 
I think, all must agree, that these two res- 
urrections will be either both spiritual, or 
both literal. This seems to have been the 
grand argument of Mede, to prove that the 
first resurrection is to be literal, when he 
had taken it for granted, that the next would 
be literal — the argument that had the prin- 
cipal influence in silencing Faber, without 
convincing him. Indeed, as Faber holds, 



During the Millennium* 71 

that whole nations will remain in idolatry- 
through the whole Millennial period, and 
therefore, that millions of the wicked dead 
will be spiritually alive during that time, it 
is plain, that a man of his candor must feel, 
that he ought to be silenced by the argument 
of Mede. The argument is equally strong 
to prove, that the resurrection of the wicked 
immediately after the Millennium will be a 
spiritual resurrection, from the considera- 
tion, that the first resurrection at the be- 
ginning of the Millennium will be spiritual. 
That the resurrection at the end of the 
Millennium will be merely spiritual, is still 
more evident from another consideration. 
The literal resurrection will not take place p 
till the end of the world, when the last trump 
shall sound. But a season will intervene be- 
tween the end of the Millennium and the last 
trump; a season of sufficient length for Satan 
to "go out to deceive the nations, which are 
in the four quarters of the earth, Gog and 
Magog, to gather them together to battle; 
the number of whom is as the sand 
of the sea." And tho this is called a 
little season, it will probably consist of sev- 
eral hundred years. Several hundred years 
may be considered a little season, compar- 
ed with the hundreds of thousands of years, 
of which, I suppose the Millennium will con- 
sist. I cannot think, that a period short of 
several hundred years will be sufficient for 
Satan to perform the work allotted for him 



State of the World 

to do, between the Millennium and the end 
of the world. The argument under consid- 
eration, however, does not depend upon the 
supposition, that the little season will be sev- 
eral hundred years. Even if it should be 
supposed much shorter, it will be sufficient 
to shew, that the resurrection of the wicked, 
at the beginning of the little season, will be 
different from the general resurrection at 
the end of it. There is reason to believe, 
therefore, that the resurrection of the wick- 
ed, at the beginning of the little season, will 
be a spiritual resurrection — that the-, wick- 
ed will live in their successors, as Elijah 
lived in the person of John the Baptist. Mul- 
titudes will be deceived, and led away by Sa- 
tan and will he so engaged in working wick- 
edness, that it will seem, as tho the workers 
of iniquity, who had spread such darkness, 
and terror, and misery in the land of the liv- 
ing before the Millennium had risen from 
the dead. 

As therefore the resurrection at the end 
of the Millennium, will be merely spiritual, 
and as there will be no such resurrection 
during the Millennium, it is plain, that 
through that period, there will be no wicked 
men upon earth; and consequently all will be 
righteous. 

Tho it might have been more logically 
rorrect to have discussed this passage of 
scripture under the preceding proposition; 
yet, as it has some connexion with an objec- 



Daring the Millennium. 73 

tion, which I am about to consider, it was 
thought best to consider it here. 

It has been already mentioned, as the 
opinion of Mr. Faber,* that whole nations 
will continue sunk in idolatry, through the 
whole period of the Millennium. This 
opinion is the objection, that we are now 
to consider; for if this opinion be correct, 
no less than three of the propositions, which 
we have been considering, must be false. 
However strange this opinion may seem, 
the respectability of Mr. Faber entitles it to 
notice. 

All that has been said in these Lectures, 
to prove, that, during the Millennium, idola- 
try will entirely cease through the world, that 
the wicked will all be cut off, or converted, 
and that all will know, and serve the Lord, 
might be adduced with equal propriety, to 
prov e the incorrectness of the opinion under 
consideration. Much other scripture evi- 
dence might be adduced to establish the 
same. A small part only will be considered. 

The very kingdoms, which Mr. Faber 
supposes may remain in wickedness through 
the Millennium, were represented by the im- 
age presented to the view of the sleeping 
king of Babylon. And what was the fate of 
the image? The stone, that was cut out of 
the mountain without hands, "smote the im- 
age upon his feet, that were of iron and clay, 

*See Faber on the 1260 years, Chan, iv, p. 101- Boston 
Edition. 



74 State of the World 

and brake them to pieces. Then was the 
iron, the claj, the brass, the silver, and the 
gold, broken to pieces together, and became 
like the chaff of the summer threshing floors? 
and the wind carried them away that no 
place was found for them; and the stone* 
that smote the image, became a great 
mountain, and filled the whole earth." The 
vision is interpreted by the prophet to signi- 
fy, that "the God of heaven will set up a king- 
dom, which shall never be destroyed; and the 
kingdom shall not be left to another people; 
but it shall break in pieces all these king- 
doms, and it shall stand forever." 

Those, who wish to see Mr. Faber's 
opinion upon this point more fully discussed, 
and demonstrated t< > be incorrect, may find 
much satisfaction in Smith's Dissertation on 
the Prophecies. 

proposition x. 

During the Millennium, knowledge will be 
greatly increased. 

Reason and scripture unite in confirming 
this proposition. The history and present 
state of the world, lead us to conclude, that 
knowledge will be greatly increased in time 
to come. From what has been, we may 
draw an argument to prove what will be, 
under similar circumstances; There has 
been a vast increase of knowledge within a 
few centuries; and as causes, in a great mea- 
sure the same, are still in operation, and 
will probably continue to operate, for many 



During the Millennium. 75 

ages, we may conclude, that knowledge will 
greatly increase for centuries to come. If the 
most enlightened Christian philosopher, that 
flourished five hundred years ago, (if any 
can be said to have been enlightened in that 
age of superstition and persecution, that age 
of intellectual darkness and spiritual gloom) 
if the most enlightened Christian philoso- 
pher of that horrid age, were to rise from the 
dead, could he believe it possible, that he had 
returned to the same world? When he dis- 
covered new 7 manners, new customs, new and 
wonderful improvements in almost every de- 
partment of learning; and when he discover- 
ed even new sciences brought to light, would 
he not be ready to fancy himself on some 
other more favored planet? What would 
be his amazement, when he should be assur- 
ed that it was the same — the very world, that 
he had left in such horrid darkness,darkness, 
that he had so painfully felt, darkness, that 
he had labored so long in vain to dispel, 
and which the most vigorous rays of his 
genius could scarcely penetrate! And if the 
most enlightened Christian philosopher,now 
*ipon earth, should retire from the world, 
and after an absence of five hundred years 
return, may we not suppose, that his de- 
light and amazement would be eqimlly over- 
whelming? 

Some may possibly imagine,that the present 
age is almost perfect in improvement, — that 
now the human mind is almost saturated 



76 State of the World 

with knowledge, and is scarcely capable of 
farther attainments. Not so. It is impossi- 
ble, that any creature should ever be perfect 
in knowledge. "Canst thou by searching 
find out God? canst thou find out the Al- 
mighty unto perfection ?" There is reason to 
believe, that those, who have made the high- 
est attainments in knowledge, have generally 
been most deeply sensible of their ignorance. 
How many things are there in the vast books 
of nature, revelation, and the human heart, 
which have not yet been read by the most sa- 
gacious. As there is sufficient scope for the 
mind to exert its utmost efforts, as the ad- 
vantages for gaining knowledge are constant- 
ly increasing, who can calculate the effects 
of human industry and zeal? — the progress 
of the immortal mind? Who but the Eternal 
can presume to set bounds to human attain- 
ments, and say to genius, "Hitherto shalt 
thou come but no farther, and here shall thy 
soaring investigations be stayed?" Never be- 
fore were greater exertions made for the ad- 
vancement of knowledge; and these exertions 
seem to be constantly increasing. From 
year to year, greater and greater numbers 
are engaged in the pursuit, and the ardor of 
each seems only to stimulate the efforts of 
the rest. Those, who are national enemies, 
are found to be cordial fellow-laborers in the 
field of science. One discovery leads to 
another; this to a third, and so on. That 
^wonderful art of all arts, the art of printing, 
records, disseminates, and forever preserves, 



During the JUfflennium. 7S 

every discovery and improvement, tliat is 
worthy of preservation. It is probable, that 
a greater number of valuable improvements 
have been made within the last twenty years, 
than for any other equal period. May we 
not anticipate at least equal improvements in 
the twenty years to come r And is it enthusi- 
asm to indulge the delightful hope, that as 
great progress in knowledge, and as great 
improvement in the arts, will be made in the 
next five hundred years, as in the last? 
Is there not reason to believe, they will be 
even greater? 

But, my brethren, tlio we would most 
gratefully receive every ray of light, which 
reason can afford, upon this animating sub- 
ject, we must not forget, that « 4 we have a 
more sure word of prophecy, to which we 
should take heed as to a light shining in a 
dark place." All the light that reason can 
give, upon this subject, is as darkness, com- 
pared with the light of revelation. Wg are 
assured by Him, that cannot lye, that "many 
shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be 
increased." Nay we are assured, that all 
shall know and serve the Lord. How vastly 
must the knowledge of God be extended, and 
promoted, when all shall know him. The 
expulsion of the prince of darkness, and 
the regeneration of the world, will remove 
many obstacles, and furnish many and great 
facilities in the acquisition of knowledge. 
When wars shall cease to desolate; when the 



78 State of the World 

Gothic foot shall no more trample upon the 
flowers of taste; when vice and immorality 
shall cease; when every kind of intemper- 
ance shall be cured; when the earth shall 
be purged from tyranny and oppres- 
sion; when the darkness of superstition, 
the railing of bigotry, and the contracting, 
blinding influence of illiberality shall cease; 
when not a single Pharisee shall be left to 
take away the key of knowledge, or shut up 
the kingdom of heaven; when the temple of 
knowledge shall be open to all; when all 
shall be disposed to enter it; when all shall be 
wise, and shall feel that it is an important 
part of wisdom, to lay up knowledge; when 
all shall be deeply impressed with the im- 
portance of taking fast hold of instruction; 
when the human mind shall be almost en- 
tirely emancipated from the slavery of passion 
and prejudice; when the means of learning, 
and the number pursuing it, shall be multi- 
plied by hundreds; when each one shall de- 
light to assist his fellow to the utmost: — with 
what new and amazing progress will the 
human mind rush forward in the path of un- 
derstanding! How numerous, and how won- 
derful, will be the discoveries and improve- 
ments in the sciences and arts, from year to 
year! May we not expect that^very cottage 
will be irradiated with science, as well as 
with religion; and that every peasant will 
be able not only to read the bible but to 
read the stars? — to read the stars, with more 
than Newtonian eyes? 



During the Millennium. 79 

More especially will men make advances 
in the knowledge of Gnd, of the bible, of 
their own souls, of things unseen and eternal. 
Tho they will then have a strong thirst for 
every kind of useful information, they will 
have a peculiar relish for that which is spir- 
itual; and the more spiritual and heavenly, 
the more delightful will be their studies. 
Their fondness for such pursuits will ten# 
exceedingly to accelerate their progress* 
Knowledge is easy to him that understand- 
eth. We may be assured, that men in that 
day will not labor in vain, nor spend their 
strength for nought. They will not be ever 
learning, and never able to come to the 
knowledge of the truth. Much less will 
they spend their lives, and exhaust their en- 
ergies, in laboring to subvert the truth, and 
establish error. No, their efforts will bo 
well directed, and abundantly successful. 
They will be filled with that charity which 
"rejoiceth in the truth;" and the God of 
truth will behold them with delight, and add 
his benediction. "If any man will do his 
will, he shall know of the doctrine." "The 
meek will he guide in judgment, the meek 
will he teach his way." "The secret of the 
Lord is with them that fear him, and he will 
show them his covenant." Men will not 
then < c be carried about with every wind of 
doctrine." "Rooted and grounded in the 
truth — they will be stedfast and immoveable, 
always abounding in the work the Lord." 
Forgetting the things behind, and reaching 



80 State 6f the World 

forth to those before, they will be constantly 
pressing forward to higher and higher de- 
grees of knowledge, as well as of grace. 
Then shall their c *sons be as plants grown 
up in their youth; and their daughters shall 
be as corner-stones polished after the simili- 
tude of a palace." 

At the commencement of that blessed period, 
when for thousands and thousands of years, 
darkness shall have covered the earth, and 
gross darkness the people, it will be said to 
Zion, c « Arise and shine; for thy light is come 
and the glory of the Lord is risen upon thee 
— And tiie Gentiles shall come to thy light, 
and kings to the brightness of thy rising," 
In the figurative and elegant language of the 
prophet, "the light of the moon shall be as 
the light of the sun, and the light of the sun 
shall be seven fold, as (he light of seven days, 
in the day that the Lordbindcth upthebreach 
of his people, and healeth the stroke of her 
wound. Nay, * c the moon shall be confounded, 
and the sun shall be ashamed, when the Lord 
of hosts shall reign in mount Zion, and before 
his ancients gloriously." ^They also that 
erred in spirit shall come to understanding, and 
they that murmured shall learn doctrine." 

As the Lord Jesus is most eminently the 
light of the world, he will most illustriously 
show himself to be such; and all nations shall 
rejoice in his light, in the Millennial day. 
Wow blessed and holy shall be the people, 
who shall walk in the light of his meridian 
beam*. 



LECTURE T. 

The attainments of saints. — Health. — Long 
Life. — Multitude of Christians.— Fruitful* 
ness of the Earth. 

PROPOSITION XI. 

During the Millennium, Christians will 
make much higher attainments in grace, than 
before. 

From the beginning of the world to the 
present day, there have been two things, 
which have been peculiarly affecting and 
grievous to the feeling pious heart; one, that 
the righteous have been so few; the other, 
that these few have been so imperfect. Of 
all the saints, whose oharacters are drawn 
at any considerable length in the bible, 
there is scarcely any, of whom there is not 
also some sin recorded; some sin, to deface 
the fair page of history; and proclaim to suc- 
ceeding generations, "Let him, that think- 
eth he standeth, take heed lest he fall. 5 * And 
some, even of the most eminent saints, have 
been left to perpetrate enormous crimes. 
How often have saints in later ages, notwith- 
standing all the warnings, that have been 
left for their admonition, how often have they 
disgraced the glorious Savior, and the holy 
religion, that they were so strongly, and so 



82 State of the World 

peculiarly bound, to glorify and honor. 
How often has Christ been most severely 
wounded in the house of his friends, and 
even by those, who were peculiarly his own. 
And how deeply sensible of their sins have 
been the most eminent saints in all ages; how 
deeply, and how painfully, have they mourn- 
ed and bewailed their aggravated transgres- 
sions. How often have they pierced through 
their own souls with sorrows and agonies, 
by wickedly departing from their covenant 
God, What multitudes have run well for a 
time, seemed exceedingly engaged in relig- 
ion, and alive to the honor of God, who have 
afterwards left their first love, become luke- 
warm, indifferent, and cold in spiritual 
tilings, and almost forgetful of God, their 
Creator, Redeemer and Judge — -with scarce- 
ly life enough to be persuaded to awake from 
their lethargy, and strengthen the things 
that remained and were ready to die. 

And must it be forever thus, with the pro- 
fessing and real friends of Jesus? 

"Dear Lord, and shall they ever lie 

At this poor dying rate, 
Their love so faint, so cold to thee, 
And thine to them so great?" 

No, my dear brethren, it shall not be for- 
ever thus. The time is coming, when the 
robes of salvation, with which Christians 
are clothed and adorned, will shine forth 
with more beauty, than ever has been seen 
in mortals. We have seen, that, dur- 
ing the Millennium^ Christians will greatly 



During the Millennium. 83 



' l z3 



excel in knowledge. There is reason to be- 
lieve that they will be still more distinguish- 
ed by holiness. It is true indeed, that 
knowledge and grace have not always been 
in proportion to each other in Christians. 
But this has probably been owing to differ- 
ent degrees of obstruction, with which they 
have been called to struggle, to the differ- 
ent circumstances, in which they have been 
placed, and the different degrees of special 
grace, with which God has been pleased to 
distinguish them, During the Millennium, 
external obstacles to holiness will be almost 
entirely removed; the great adversary, who 
as a roaring lion has been so long walking 
about, seeking whom he might devour, will 
be chained; almost every circumstance will 
be favorable to the advancement of holiness; 
and it may be, that Christians will be less 
distinguished from each other, by the com- 
munications of divine grace. But even if 
God should make as great a difference in this 
respect as he now makes, there is reason to 
believe, that those, who shall be least favor- 
ed, will be much superior to the saints in gen- 
eral, if not to the greatest saints, of preceding 
ages. The time is coming, when the ^right- 
eous shall flourish like the palm tree, and 
grow like a cedar in Lebanon. Those, that 
be planted in the house of the Lord, shall 
flourish in the courts of our God. They 
shall bring forth fruit in old age; they shall 
he fat and flourishing. 5 ' In the seventy-sec- 



84 Stale of the World 

ond Psalm, which manifestly refers princi- 
pally to the glorious reign of Christ during 
the Millennium, it is said, "In his days shall 
the righteous flourish — and they of the city 
shall flourish, like grass of the earth." In the 
twelfth chapter of Zechariah we have these re- 
markable words: "In that day shall the Lord 
defend Jerusalem; and he that is feeble shall 
be as David, and the house of David shall 
be as God, as the angel of the Lord before 
him." This manifestly refers to the Mil- 
lennium, or to the introduction of that happy 
period. If Christians are to be so vigorous 
at the introduction of that day, what will 
they be at its meridian glory? In Zee. 14: 
20,21, we have the following, "In that day 
shall there be upon the bells of the horses, 
HOLINESS TO THE LORD; and the 
pots, that are in the Lord's house, shall be 
like the bowls before the altar; yea every pot 
in Jerusalem and Judah, shall be Holiness to 
the Lord of hosts." Men shall then be so emi- 
nently holy, that the utensils for the common 
purposes of life will be devoted to the Lord. 
Then the apostolic injunction, "Whether 
therefore ye eat, or drink, or whatsoever ye 
do, do all to the glory of God," however 
strange and unintelligible it now appears to 
many, will be universally understood. "But 
unto you, that fear my name, shall the sun 
of righteousness arise with healing in his 
wings, and ye shall %n forth, and grow up, 
as calves of the stal? "* 

•Matt. 4:2. 



During the MOlennium. 85 

That saints shall be eminently holy in that 
day seems to be implied in what is said of the 
marriage supper of the Lamb, especially in 
what is said of the beautiful garments of the 
spouse of Christ, Rev. 19:6 — 8: "And I 
heard as it were the voice of a great multi- 
tude, and as the voice of mighty thunderings, 
saying, Alleluia; for the Lord God omnip- 
otent reigneth. Let us be glad, and rejoice; 
and give honor to him; for the marriage of 
the Lamb is come; and his wife hath made 
herself ready. And to her was granted, that 
she should be arrayed in fine linen clean and 
white; for the fine linen is the righteous- 
ness of saints.' 5 

What is said in Rev. 20. of those who should 
live and reign with Christ a thousand years, 
leads us to conclude, that they should be em- 
inent saints. <c Aud I saw thrones, and they 
sat upon them; and judgment was given un- 
to them; and i saw the souls of them that 
were beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and 
for the word of God, and which had not wor- 
shipped the beast, neither his image, neither 
had received his mark upon their foreheads, 
or in their hands; and they lived and reign- 
ed with Christ a thousand years. But the 
rest of the dead lived not again, until the 
thousand years were finished. This is the 
first resur lection. Blessed and holy is he, 
that hath part in the first resurrection; on 
such the second death hath no power, but 
they shall be priests of God and of Christ, 
8 



86 State of the World 

and shall reign with him a thousand years.V 
It has been already observed, that the first 
resurrection is to be considered as spiritual* 

or a resurrection of spirits. The spirits of 
former saints will live in those, who shall 
reign with Christ during the Millennium, 
as the spirit of Elijah lived in John the 
Baptist. But it seems that those who arc 
to be thus spiritually raised, to reign with 
Christ, are not ordinary Christians, who 
have been favored with merely ordinary 
measures of grace. They are martyrs; they 
are such as have been valiant for the truth, 
have overcome great temptations, and 
achieved great exploits. Millennial Chris- 
tians will have the hearts of martyrs, tho 
they will not be called to suffer martyrdom; 
they will manifest such a zeal for God, that 
it will seem, as tho all the old martyrs and 
most distinguished saints, had risen from the 
dead; had risen from the dead, more zealous 
than ever. 

It is not to be supposed, that Christians 
will be entirely free from sin, even in the 
happiest part of that happy period. But 
Millennians will not be such imperfect, 
mourning, melancholy, drooping Christians, 
as their predecessors. So far from it, they 
will be as kings and priests, reigning and of- 
fering incense, before God. A great part of 
their business will be praise, thanksgiving, 
exultation and the voice of melody. 



During the Millennium. %7 

PROPOSITION XII. 

During the Millennium people will enjoy 
Bitch better health than before. 

How numerous, how various, how dread- 
ful, are the diseases, "which poor humanity 
is heir to" — which have disheartened, afflict- 
ed and tormented mankind for so many ages. 
We can scarcely find such an object as a 
person of adult years, who does not know, 
by sad experience, what it is to be sick. It 
is probable, that we much more frequently 
find those, who scarcely know what it is to 
be in health. How many are drooping and 
languishing for a great part of their lives. 
You will scarcely find — I do not say a city, 
you will scarcely find a village, where all 
the inhabitants are in health for a single 
hour. And tho we have reason to hope, that 
those dreadful diseases and scourges of the 
human race, the plague and small pox, 
which have made such horrid desolation in 
former ages, are in a great measure staid, 
and banished from the earth; yet other dis- 
eases have come up, like evil spirits from 
the realms of darkness, to baffle the skill of 
themostskilful,and clothe whole regions in the 
garments of mourning. And notwithstand- 
ing the astonishing improvements, which 
have been made in the science of anatomy 
and the art of healing, the arts of luxury and 
vice, the horrid arts of producing fevers, 
consumptions and almost all kinds of disease, 
have advanced with a progress nearly or 



88 State of the World 

quite equal, and perhaps even superior. It 
is probable, there is nearly or quite as great 
a proportion of sickness among mankind, as 
there was in the days of Vesalius, Galen or 
Hippocrates — of David, Moses or Abraham. 
This however may not be wholly owing to 
the increase of intemperance and vice, but 
partly to the injury, that the human constitu- 
tion itself has sustained, from the vices of 
former generations. 

But in the days of the Millennium, sick- 
ness will be greatly diminished, or wholly 
unknown. No disease will then be produced 
by intemperance, nor imprudence, the two 
causes, that have produced more sickness 
than perhaps all others. The art of healing 
and preventing diseases, will no doubt be 
greatly improved. And not only so, but it 
is probable, that after a course of ages, the 
very constitution of man will be improved 
and renovated, by the practice of virtue, the 
skill of man, and the blessing of God; as it 
has been impaired by the practice of vice, 
and the judgments of Heaven. 

When Christ was upon earth, he often ex- 
erted his almighty power in healing the bod- 
ies of men, as well as their souls. And when 
the Sun of righteousness shall rise upon the 
nations with healing in his wings, no doubt 
he will be a physician to the body, as well as 
to the soul. 

God promised to his people, that if they 
would hearken imto his voice, and do his 



During the Millennium'. 89 



' c? 



commandments, he would bless them, and 
multiply thdto; and he adds, "The Lord will 
take away from thee all sickness, and will 
put none of the evil diseases of Egypt, which 
thou knowest, upon thee." In another 
place God says to his people, "And ye shall 
serve the Lord your God, and he shall bless 
thy bread and thy water; and I will take 
sickness away from the midst of thee." 
There is a passage in Is. S3: which appears 
very remarkable, "And the inhabitant shall 
not say, I am sick; and they that dwell 
therein shall be forgiven their iniquity." 
From the connexion of this passage it mani- 
festly refers to the Millennium. 

PROPOSITION XIII. 

There is reason to believe that people will 
live much longer during the Millennium, 
than men have lived since the days of Moses, 

The causes, that prevent diseases and pro- 
mote health, will tend to prolong life. If the 
human constitution is to be improved, this 
also will tend to lengthen out the da)s of 
man. As it was probably owing to the curse 
of God, as well as to natural causes, that the 
life of man was shortened, so it is probable, 
that by the blessing of God, as well as by 
natural causes, the life of man will be length- 
ened. Or perhaps it may be more correct to 
say, that the life of man will be lengthened, 
by the blessing of God, in connexion with 
natural causes. "What man is he that de- 
sireth life, and loveth manv days, that he 
2* 



©0 State of the World 

may see good? Keep thy tongue from evil, 
and thy lips from speaking g#ile; depart 
from evil and do good; seek peace, and pur- 
sue it." "My son, forget not my law, but let 
thy heart keep my commandments; for 
length of days and long life, and peace, shall 
they add to thee. Happy is the man that fmd- 
eth wisdom, and the man that getteth under- 
standing — Length of days is in her right 
hand, and in her left hand, riches and 
honor." "The fear of the Lord is the begin- 
ning of wisdom; and the knowledge of the 
Holy is understanding. For by me, thy 
days shall be multiplied, and the years of thy 
life shall be many." "The fear of the Lord 
prolongeth days, but the years of the wicked 
shall be shortened." 

PROPOSITION XIV. 

Christians will be much more numerous in 
the Millennium, than before. 

Hitherto the flock of Christ has been a 
little flock; his people have been but a rem- 
nant. In but a small part of the inhabited 
world, has the true religion been known; and 
comparatively but few in that small part have 
been found in the strait and narrow way. 
Many besides Elijah have felt, that they 
were almost alone in their pilgrimage. And 
tho the Lord had reserved to himself thou- 
sands of true worshippers, unknown to Eli- 
jah, still those thousands were but a small 
part of the whole host of Israel. My breth- 
ren, it will not be always thus; it will b e far 



During the Millennium* 91 



- 



otherwise. In that blessed and glorious day, 
for which this little flock and remnant have 
been sighing, and panting, and praying, and 
pjeading, for so many ages, the state of the 
world in this respect ^ ill be amazingly 
changed. The time is approaching, when 
the proportion of saints and sinners will be 
reversed: and of all the nations and tribes 
and families of the earth, a remnant only 
shall be left to Satan. And that time, that 
state of things so vastly superior to the pre- 
sent, will be only introductory to the Millen- 
nium; it will be only the twilight of the glo- 
rious day. For when all shall know and 
serve the Lord, not even a remnant shall be 
left to the expelled and imprisoned adversary. 
If therefore, the world should contain no 
more inhabitants than at present, the chil- 
dren of God on earth will be much more nu- 
merous, and probably more than a hundred 
times more numerous, than they ever have 
been. 

But there is reason to believe, that the 
population of the world will be vastly in- 
creased. In the beginning God created a 
single pair; but ere long men began to mul- 
tiply upon the earth; and it is thought in a 
few centuries became very numerous. When 
for their aggravated wickedness, the flood 
came and swept them all away — all but 
eight persons, the posterity of these eight 
in the course of a few centuries were increas- 
ed to millions. And now it is supposed that 



93 State of the WmU 

there are upon the earth more than six hun- 
dred million people. Such has been the in- 
crease of mankind in the course of a few 
thousand years, notwithstanding all the vices, 
hardships, tyrannies, oppressions, diseases* 
persecutions, wars, famines, earthquakes, 
storms, tempests, devouring beasts, and all 
the curses of God, that have swept so many 
myriads of myriads of the human race to an 
untimely grave. Tho these obstacles to the 
increase of mankind have not all existed in 
this country; and tho it is probable that such, 
as have existed here, have had less influence, 
than in almost any other country; yet how 
great has been their influence even here. It 
is probable that more than half the children, 
that have been born in our land, have died in 
infancy, or childhood, or youth. And yet 
notwithstanding these obstacles how rapidly 
lias our population advanced. It is proba- 
ble that we are about four times as numer- 
ous, as we were forty years ago; and a very 
small part of this increase has been by immi- 
gration. If such has been the effect of re- 
moving a part of these obstacles in our belov- 
ed country, what will be the effect of remov- 
ing them all? How rapidly will population 
advance, when very few, if any, shall die in 
infancy, childhood, or youth; especially whers 
God shall bestow the special blessing, by 
which he has promised to distinguish his 
people; when they shall return unto him* 
and seek and serve him with ail their hearts. 



During the MUUnniwm. 93 

God promised to Abraham, "I will make thy 
seed, as the dust of the earth; so that if a 
man ran number the dust of the earth, then 
shall tby seed also he numbered." And again, 
"In blessing, 1 will bless thee, and in multi- 
plying I will multiply thy seed as the stars 
of heaven, and as the sand, which is upon 
the sea-shore." That the people of God shall 
be exceedingly numerous in the latter day, 
is intimated in Is. 49: "For thy waste and 
thy desolate places and the land of thy des- 
truction, shall even be too narrow by reason 
of the inhabitants, and they that swallowed 
thee up, shall be far from thee. The chil- 
dren, that thou shalt have, after thou hast lost 
the other, shall say again in thine ears, The 
place is too strait for me; give place to me 
that I may dwell." Is. 54:1 — 3. "Sing, O 
barren, thou that didst not bear, break forth 
into singing, and cry aloud, thou that didst 
not traxail with child; for more are the chil- 
dren of the desolate, than of the married 
wife, saith the Lord. Enlarge the place of 
thy tent, and let them stretch forth the cur- 
tains of thy habitations; spare not, lengthen 
thy cords, and strengthen thy stakes; for 
thou shalt break forth on the right hand, and 
on the left, and thy seed shall inherit the 
Gentiles, and make the desolate cities to be 
inhabited." Is. 60:22. "And a little one 
shtfll become a thousand, and a small one, a 
strong nation. 1 the Lord will hasten it in 
liis time." Jer. 23: S. "And I will gather 



94 State of the World 

the remnant of my flock out of all countries 
whither 1 have driven them, and will bring 
them again to their folds, and they shall be 
fruitful, and increase." 

It is doubtful, whether at the commence- 
ment of the Millennium, there will be more 
people in the world, than there are now, in 
consequence of the vast multitudes, whom 
the Lord shall cut off, to introduce that day, 
"when he shall arise to shake terribly the 
earth." But they will increase with great 
rapidity, when all obstructions shall be re- 
moved, and when the Lord shall add his spe- 
cial blessing, to make them as the dust, as 
the sand, and as the stars for multitude. 

There is reason to believe, that within a 
few centuries after the commencement of the 
Millennium, the world will contain more 
than a hundred times as many inhabitants, 
as it now contains. All these will be Chris- 
tians. How very small the number of Chris- 
tians, that have yet been upon earth at any 
tin.e, compared with the multitudes and mul- 
titudes, that shall throng the gates of Zion 
in that day. 

But how can the earth support such amaz- 
ing numbers? An answer to this question 
will be attempted in the next proposition. 
proposition xv. 

During the Millennium, the fruits of the 
earth will be much more abundant than be- 
fore. 



Burin* -the Millennium. 95 



,l D 



A much greater portion of the earth's sur- 
face will then be cultivated, than at any time 
before. It is supposed, that about a million 
acres of land remain uncultivated in the an- 
cient and populous island of Great Britain. 
What vast tracts then, must we suppose are 
lying waste, in other countries of much 
greater extent; especially in those, that are 
comparatively new and thinly inhabited. 
Perhaps no country is more completely, and 
faithfully cultivated, than China Proper. 
And what is the consequence? It supports a 
population of 150 or 200 millions — one quar- 
ter or one third of the human race. If all 
other parts of the earth were as w ell culti- 
vated as this, the productions would proba- 
bly be increased more than ten fold. But 
there is reason to believe, that the whole 
habitable earth will be cultivated with much 
more care, than China has received, and 
with ten times the skill. Rulers and subjects, 
philosophers, chemists and cultivators, seem 
to be uniting their efforts in various coun- 
tries, for the advancement of agriculture. 
How great are the improvements, that are 
making from year to year. What wonderful 
effects have often been seen to arise, from a 
few particles of Plaster Paris, used as man- 
ure. May we not hope that such vast ledges 
of this precious substance will be discovered 
in various places, or that it will be so copi- 
ously manufactured by the almost creative 
hand of chemistry, as to render it plenty and 



96 State of the World 

cheap, in every land, to which it is suited? 
Or rather may we not hope thai some other 
substance will be discovered, or prepared, 
and plentifully furnished, as much more fer- 
tilizing than Plaster Paris, as this is superior 
to common manure? There is perhaps no- 
thing else so remote from my profession, that 
1 have considered with such deep, and de- 
lightful interest. How little does the che- 
mist think, while his heart is ready to melt 
at the very thought of his crucible, how little 
does he generally think, how much his labors 
may conduce to bring on that happy state of 
things, which shall distinguish the Millen- 
nial period. May we not expect from these 
considerations, that the time will come, when 
the fruits of the earth will be increased a 
hundred fold? 

But there are other considerations, con- 
siderations much more interesting to Chris- 
tian benevolence, that will justify the expec- 
tation of an increase greater still. Ever 
since the fall of man, the earth has been un- 
der a curse; "groaning and travailing in pain 
until now/ 5 "Cursed be the ground, for thy 
sake," said the incensed Jehovah to our re- 
bellious first parent. The ground was again 
cursed for the murderous conduct of Cain. 
To him it was said by the Almighty, "When 
thou tillest the ground, it shall not hence- 
forth yield to thee her strength." And since 
the days of Adam and Cain, how often has 
the earth been cursed in one part and an- 



Luring the Millennium. 97 

other for the wickedness of man. So that 
now the earth may be considered, as lying 
under an accumulation of curses, like moun- 
tains piled upon mountains. Multitudes of 
mankind, therefore, have been left to suffer, 
and some to perish, of hunger; because the 
earth's productions have been so scanty, 
and the expectations of the husbandman 
have so often failed. It will be far otherwise in 
the Millennium. Witb the exception of per- 
haps one small district there is reason to be- 
lieve, that the earth will then be cultivated 
to the utmost extent, and with a degree of 
skill which probably has not yet been con- 
ceived. Then no doubt the curse will be 
almost or altogether removed, and the earth, 
by the special and abundant blessing of God, 
converted into one vast Eden, will bring 
forth by handfuls. I will mention a few of 
the numerous passages of scripture, that 
might be adduced, to justify the remark. 
Lev. 26:3,4. "If ye walk in my statutes, 
and keep my commandments, and do them, 
then 1 will give you rain in the due season, 
and the land shall yield her increase, and the 
trees of the field shall yield their fruit." 
Deut. 7:12,13. "Wherefore it shall come 
to pass, if ye hearken to these judgments 
and keep and do them, that the Lord thy 
God shall keep unto thee the covenant of 
mercy, which he sware unto thy fathers. 
And he will love thee and bless thee, and 
multiply thee; he will also bless the fruit of 
9 



98 State of the World 

thy womb, and the fruit of thy land, thy 
corn, thy wine, and thine oil, thejncrease of 
fchykine." &c. Deut. 11:13— 15. "And it 
shall come to pass, if ye will hearken dili- 
gently unto my commandments, which I 
command you this day, to love the Lord your 
God, and serve him with all your heart, and 
with all your soul, that I will give you the 
rain of your land in due season, the first rain 
and the latter rain, that thou mayest gather 
in thy corn, and thy wine and thine oil. And 
I will send grass in thy fields for thy cattle, 
that thou mayest eat, and be full." The 
sixty-fifth psalm is a prayer, which mani- 
festly has its principal reference to the Mil- 
lennium. The second verse runs thus. "O 
thou that hearcst prayer, unto thee shall all 
flesh come." This does not appear to me& i 
that it is the duty of all flesh to come to God 
in prayer, as it is sometimes understood, but 
that in due time all flesh shall sincerely wor- 
ship the Father. From this we may con- 
clude, that the principal reference of the 
whole psalm is to the Millennium. This 
psalm concludes with gratefully noticing the 
wonderful fruitful ness, with which the Lord 
w T ould bless the earth. "Thou visitest the 
earth and waterest it: thou greatly enrich- 
est it with the river of God, which is full of 
water; thou preparest corn, when thou hast 
so provided for it. Thou waterest the 
ridges thereof abundantly; thou settlest the 
furrows thereof: thou makcst them soft with 



During the Millennium. 99 

showers; thou blessest the springing thereof. 
Thou crownest the year with thy goodness, 
and thy paths drop fatness. They drop up- 
on the pastures of the wilderness; and the 
little hills rejoice on every side. The pas- 
tures are clothed with flocks; the rallies al- 
so are covered with corn; they shout for joy, 
they also sing/' The sixty seventh psalm 
is still more striking, especially the sixth 
and seventh verses. "Let the people praise 
thee, O God, let all the people praise thee. 
Then shall the earth yield her increase; and 
TJod, even our own God, shall hless us." 
Does not this intimate, that before all peo- 
ple praise the Lord, the earth shall not yield 
her increase; or that all the productions of 
the earth before the Millennium are to be 
considered as nothing, compared with the 
rich and amazing harvests of that glorions 
day. In the seventy second psalm the fruit- 
fulness of the earth is promised in language 
still more strong and striking. "There 
shall be a handful of corn in the earth upon 
the top of the mountains, and the fruit there- 
of shall shake like Lebanon." From a very 
small portion of seed, a crop of grain shall 
be produced, that shall appear like the cedars 
of Lebanon. The expression is indeed 
strong, and may be considered somewhat 
figurative. But it would be a vast mistake 
to suppose it unmeaning, because it is figur- 
ative. Figurative expressions are often 
most replete with meaning. The expression 



100 State of the World 

under consideration, must imply, that the 
earth at the time, to which it refers, will be 
fruitful far beyond any preceding age. If 
it had been represented, that a handful of 
corn should produce such an astonishing 
crop in the fat rallies, it would imply much 
— enough to distinguish that age from eve- 
ry preceding. What then shall we think of 
it, when such fruitfulness is represented as 
being upon the top of the mountains,the most 
unproductive parts of the earth! 

These and many other passages strikingly 
shew, that during the Millennium, the earth 
will bring forth wonderfully* And it is not 
improbable, that agreeably to the conjectures 
of some, vast tracts of country will, like Hol- 
land, be rescued from the reign of the ocean. 
Perhaps the time will come, when more than 
half the surface of the globe will be dry land 
upon which from year to year, or two or 
three times in a year, the corn will shake 
like Lebanon. The habitations of sea-mon- 
sters, converted into fruitful fields, may yet 
rejoiee and sing. 

As already intimated, however, it is prob- 
able there is one place, that will remain an 
exception to the astonishing fruitfulness of 
the earth, throughout the whole period of the 
Millennium — one place that shall forever 
remain under the curse, and under a more 
signal and tremendous curse, than ever blast- 
ed any other portion of the globe. It is not 
certain where the place is situated, that is 



During the JEllinnhm, 101 

thus to be condemned to perpetual desolation 
and horror. It is called Bozrah and Idumea. 
We read of its destiny in Is. 34:5 — 15, 
"For my sword shall be bathed in heaven; 
behold it shall come down, upon Idumea, and 
upon the people of my curse, to judgment. 
The sword of the Lord is filled with blood, 
it is made fat with fatness, and with the 
blood of lambs and goats, with the fat of the 
kidneys of rams: for the Lord hath a sacri- 
fice in Bozrah, and a great slaughter in the 
land of Idumea. And the unicorns shall 
come down with them, and the bullocks with 
the bulls; and their land shall be soaked with 
blood, and their dust made fat with fatness. 
For it is the day of the Lord's vengeance, 
and the year of recompenses, for the contro- 
versy of Zion. And the streams thereof 
shall be turned into pitch, and the dust there- 
of into brimstone, and the land thereof shall 
become burning pitch. It shall not be 
quenched night nor day; the smoke thereof 
shall go up for ever; from generation to gen- 
eration it shall lie waste; none shall pass 
through it for ever and ever But the cor- 
morant and the bittern shall possess it, the 
owl also and the raven shall dwell in it; and 
be shall stretch cut upon it the line of con- 
fusion and the stones of emptiness. They 
shall call the nobles thereof to the kingdom, 
but none shall be there, and all her princes 
shall be nothing. And thorns shall come up 
in her palaces, nettles and brambles in the 
*9 



102 State of the World 

fortresses thereof; and it shall be an habita- 
tion of dragons, and a court for owls. The 
wild beasts of the desert shall also meet with 
the wild beasts of the island, aud the satyr 
shall cry to his fellow; the screech owl also 
shall rest there; and find for herself a place 
of rest. There shall the great owl make her 
nest, and lay and hatch and gather under 
her shadow; there shall the vultures also be 
gathered, every one with her mate." Such 
is the tremendous and perpetual curse pro- 
nounced upon Bozrah and Idumea, for the 
controversy of Zion. It w ill no doubt be set 
forth as a distinguished example, to shew to 
succeeding generations how much the Lord 
abhors the haters of Zion — what indigna- 
tion, wrath and vengeance, he feels against 
those, who oppose his kingdom, and perse- 
cute his people. Whether this curse is des- 
tined to fall upon Bozrah and Idumea liter- 
ally, or some other places, represented by 
these, may admit of a doubt. I am strong- 
ly inclined to think, however, that God will 
set this mark of holy wrath upon some place 
much more distinguished than Bozrah or 
Idumea. This appears probable, from what 
is said in Vae first part of the chapter. If it 
is to be the place which has been the most 
distinguished for opposition to the kingdom 
of Christ, forsheddingthe blood of the saints 
and the martyrs of Jesus, and for the most 
enormous and most heaven-daring abomina- 
tions of every kind ? who that has the slight- 



During the Millennium. 103 

est acquaintance with history can doubt what 
place it must be? What place has the least 
claim to such dreadful distinction, except 
Rome, the mystical Babylon, the seat of the 
beast, and of the mother of harlots and 
abominations of the earth? It may be, that the 
far-famed Tiber will yet be turned into pitch* 
and the dust of the most proud and illustrious 
of cities, into brimstone, and the land round 
about it into burning pitch, that shall not be 
quenched night nor day, "Probably," says 
Mr. Scott, in his note on Rev. 18:11 — 20. 
"Probably the destruction of Rome will be 
finished, by some immediate judgment of 
God; and the nature of the soil in the vi- 
cinity, the frequent eruptions of subterrane- 
ous fires, and the terrible earthquakes,which 
have occurred, seem to point out the method. 
The combustibles are provided; the train is 
laid; there only wants the breath of the 
Lord to kindle it." 

But, except the place that shall lie waste 
from generation to generation under this 
dreadful curse, the rest of the earth will 
probably be so cultivated, and so bless- 
ed, that its productions will be increased a 
thousand-fold. 



LECTURE VI. 

Union of Christians. — First Resurrection. — 
Beauty of the Church. — Display of GoiVs 
glory. — Happiness of Christians. 

PROPOSITION XVI. 

During the Millennium, Christians will 
be imich better united than before. 

The flock of Christ has not only been a 
little flock; but the members of this little 
flock have often been grievously divided 
among themselves. As early as the days of 
the poslles, they began to divide into differ- 
ent stvts, and to arrange themselves under 
different leaders. One was of Paul, another 
of Apollos, another of Cephas, and another 
with perhaps an equal degree of sectarian 
spirit, professed to be more particularly of 
Christ. And since the days of the apostles, 
the denominations of Christians have been 
exceedingly multiplied, and even the mem- 
bers of the same sect have had very different 
opinions concerning important doctrines and 
practices. These divisions have been the 
cause of coldness, disaffection, wrath, strife, 
bitterness, slander, persecution, and almost 
every evil work. And the improper exer- 
tions, that have been made to promote uni- 
formity have'greatly increased and multipli- 
ed he evil. Some have been so affected 
with these things, as almost to despair of 



State of the World. 105 

union among the members of Christ's body 
in the present world. To such desponding 
Christians it may be said, "0 ye of little 
faith, wherefore do ye doubt?" Are we not 
assured that the meek shall inherit the earth, 
and delight themselves in the abundance of 
peace? Yes, my brethren, there will be abun- 
dance of peace, all kinds of peace, that 
the meek can desire and expect in this 
state of probation. Their adversary, the 
devil, will not be able to molest them; nor 
will they be called to contend with any of his 
children. They will enjoy peace of con- 
science, peace with God, and peace among 
themselves. "Ephraim shall not envy Judah, 
nor Judah vex ftphraim." As they will 
make eminent attainments in grace; as their 
hearts will burn and glow with that heaven- 
ly charity, which seeketh not her own, is 
not easily provoked, doth not behave itself 
unseemly, and thinketh no evil, their hearts 
will be most delightfully united together in 
love. As they will not designedly injure 
each other, as they will studiously a\oid giv- 
ing the least cause of offence, as they will 
not be disposed to make a man an offender 
for a word, nor to impute injury, where none 
is intended, they must be at peace. This 
union of heart will tend exceedingly to pro- 
mote every other kind of union; especially 
union in religious sentiments and religious 
practices. It is hardly to be supposed, how- 



1©6 State of the World 

ever, that at the commencement of the Mil- 
lennium, Christians will think alike upon 
all subjects, even upon all subjects of great 
importance; tho doubtless they will be unit- 
ed in all sentiments, that are fundamental. 
But their differences in opinion will be con- 
stantly diminishing. They will never use 
any improper methods to convince each oth- 
er. But the means, which they will use will 
doubtless be kind treatment, liberal discus- 
sion, fair and sound arguments, expressed 
with all the solemnity, affection and tender- 
ness which are becoming in a friend and a 
brother. In addition to these means, they 
will fervently pray for each other, that the 
God of truth would lead them into all truth, 
desirable for them to know. Where they 
differ in opinion, both parties will realize 
the possibility of being in the wrong, and 
fervently seek to the Father of lights to 
shine upon their souk. When they discuss 
subjects, it w ill be in the most free and dis- 
passionate manner; and each one will be as 
desirous to gain information, as to commu- 
nicate — as desirous to correct his own er- 
rors, as those of his friend. Disputings no 
doubtthere willbe in great abundance; but no 
perverse disputings, no vain janglings. They 
will dispute for truth, and for truth alone; 
and neither party will desire any triumph, 
but the triumph of truth. This will probably 
be one great mean of increasing in knowl- 
edge; and as they all increase in the knowl- 



During the Millennium* 107 



l d5 



edge of the same things, they must be more 
and more united in sentiment; as no one can 
know any thing to be true which another 
knows to be false. Truth must ever be con- 
sistent with itself; and what is truth to one, 
cannot be error to another. 

As they become more and more united in 
sentiment, their practices will become more 
and more similar. The practice of a good 
man, so far as he acts in character, and 
is not influenced by prejudice, is founded 
upon his seiHiments: and as far as his senti- 
ments are correct, his practice will be correct. 
In the early part of the Millennium, if not 
at the very commencement, educational pre- 
judices may be expected in a great measure 
to subside; and then the modes and forms of 
worship that shall be best suited for the edi- 
fication of one will be best suited for the 
edification of another; and all will be dis- 
posed to adopt the modes and forms, which 
they may find best adapted to their edifica- 
tion. And as far as the modes and forms of 
worship are prescribed in scripture, so far 
they will be adopted and followed with full 
assurance, that what infinite wisdom has 
prescribed, must be most conducive to edifi- 
cation. 

We may therefore with confidence antici- 
pate the time, not only when all mankind 
shall be Christians; but when all Christians 
shall be of one and the same denomination. 
We may anticipate the time, not only when 
the stick of Judah and the stick of Joseph 



108 State of the World 

shall be one stick,* but when all the sticks, 
that may be supposed to represent the vast 
variety of Christian tribes shall become one 
stick in the hand of the Son of man. 

PROPOSITION XVII. 

During the Millennium, the souls of the 
martyrs of preceding ages will live and reign 
with Christ upon earth. 

This proposition is established by a single 
passage. Rev. 20:4. "And I saw thrones, 
and they sat upon them, and judgment was 
given unto them; and I saw the souls of 
them that were beheaded for the witness of 
Jesus, and for the word of God, and which 
had not worshipped the beast, neither his 
image, neither had received his mark upon 
their foreheads, nor in their hands; and they 
lived and reigned with Christ a thousand 
years." Several other passages assert, that 
Christ will reign on earth, (luring the Mil- 
lennium. In the second psalm, in which the 
Father declares, that he has set his king up- 
on his holy hill of Zion, he is represented, 
as saying to the Son: "Ask of me, and I 
shall give thee the heathen for thine inherit- 
ance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for 
thy possession." Ps. 72:8 — 11. He shall have 
dominion also from sea to sea, and from the 
river unto the ends of the earth. They that 
dwell in the wilderness shall bow before 
him; and his enemies shall lick the dust. The 
kings of Tarshish and of the isles shall 
bring presents; the kings of Sheba and Seba 

*Ezek. 37:16,17. 



Burin* the Millennium. 1 09 



"a 



shall offer gifts. Yea, all kings shall fall 
down before him; all nations shall serve 
him." 

The question may arise, Will Christ reign 
on earth personally, or only spiritually? — 
visibly, or invisibly ? That his reign on earth 
during the Millennium will be spiritual, in 
the hearts of his people, and not personal 
or external, seems capable of satisfactory 
proof. We have already seen, that the res- 
urrection of the martyrs and distinguished 
saints at the beginning of the Millennium, 
which is called the jirst resurrection, is to be 
merely spiritual, er a resurrection of souls, 
not of bodies. John did not see the bodies 
of them that were beheaded, &c. but only 
their souls. As the first resurrection, there- 
fore, is to be merely spiritual, and as the 
martyrs will be only spiritually raised to 
reign with Christ, it seems most rational to 
conclude, that the reign of Christ on earth 
will be merely spiritual. 

Upon this subject Mr. Scott observes, 
"Christ will not come down from heaven 
personally to reign on earth; but he will 
reign spiritually in the prevalence of his 
gospel, and by his Holy Spirit in the hearts 
of men in general. The scriptures constant- 
ly speak of his sitting on the right hand of 
God in heaven, till he shall come the second 
time to judge the world." 

With regard to the spirituality of the first 
resurrection, I shall not repeat what 1 have 
10 



110 State of the World 

already said upon the subject. It may be 
proper here however, to notice an objection. 
It is said 1 Thes. 4:16. "The dead in Christ 
shall rise first." Now as the resurrection, 
that is to precede the Millennium, is to be a 
resurrection of those who were dead in Christ, 
and is expressly called the first resurrection, 
some have concluded with great assurance, 
that the same resurrection is referred to in 
both places; and as the apostle in Thes. un- 
doubtedly refers to a literal resurrection, so 
also the resurrection of the martyrs men- 
tioned in Rev, 20:4. must be a literal resur- 
rection, or resurrection of bodies. 

The plausibility of the objection entitles 
it to particular consideration. That the above 
passages refer to different resurrections may 
appear from the following considerations. 

1. There appears to be no evidence that 
the dead in Christ will rise, before those who 
die in their sins. I cannot see, that the pas- 
sage in Thes. asserts or implies any such 
thing. The apostle is not there speaking of 
the order of time, in which the righteous and 
wicked will rise; nor does the passage, nor 
the chapter in connexion, appear to contain 
the least allusion to the resurrection of the 
wicked. His object in the six concluding 
verses of the chapter, is to comfort his breth- 
ren, who had been bereaved of some of their 
dear Christian friends. The grand comfort- 
ing idea, which he suggests, is, that they and 
their Christian friends and all the friends of 



During the .Millennium. Ill 

Jesus should ever be with the Lord. To 
prepare ihe way to render this remark more 
striking and efficacious, he gives some ac- 
count of the manner, in which all the chil- 
dren of God should he gathered together in 
one, at the end of the world; that Christ 
should descend from heaven with a shout, 
with the voice of the archangel, and with 
the trump of God; that the dead saints should 
be raised, and that these, together with Hie 
saints who had not died, but remained alive 
till the second coming of Christ, should be 
caught up to meet the Lord in the air, and 
So should be ever with the Lord. There is 
nothing said about the resurrection ot the 
wicked. Whatever is implied in the expres- 
sion "And thedead in Lbrist shall rise first,* 
surely it cannot mean, that the righteous 
shall rise before the wicked. I am inclined 
to think, that it is explained in the verse pre- 
ceding. *«We which are alive, and re- 
main unto the coming of the Lord, shall not 
prevent them, which are asleep." According 
to a learned and distinguished critic, the word 
here rendered prevent, "signifies to get be- 
fore another, in a race or journey." The 
meaning of this passage manifestly is, that 
the saints who should be alive at the coming 
of Christ should not get before their sleeping 
or dead brethren, in their race, or flight, to 
meet the Lord in the air. But if the "quiet" 
saints, were not to ascend before the "de&d" 
saints, it is manifest that the dead must rise 



US State of the World 

before the quick should begin their ascen- 
sion. This I humbly conceive is all that is 
meant by the expression, "The (lead in 
Christ shall rise first;" that is, they shall rise 
before their quick brethren begin to ascend. 
If the phrase, "rise first," should still sound 
as tho the wicked should rise after the 
righteous, let it be read with the principal 
emphasis upon the word rise, instead ofjirst, 
and then, I presume, it will sound differently, 
and be much more likely to convey the true 
meaning.* 

If this passage does not prove, that the 
righteous shall rise before the wicked, sure- 
ly no other does, whatever some may have 
conjectured concerning the meaning of the 
passage in 1 Lor. 15:23. It is my decided opin- 
ion, that all the dead both righteous and 
wicked will rise atthesametime,in a moment, 
in the twinkling of an eye,at the last trump, 
at the very moment, when the "quick" shall 
be changed. "The hour is coming, in the 
which all that are in their graves, shall hear 
his voice, and come forth; they that have 
done good unto the resurrection of life, and 
they that have done evil unto the resurrection 
of damnation." 

But even if it should be granted that the 
righteous will rise before the wicked, it 

*No doubt many passages of Scripture have been mis- 
understood in consequence of being read improperly; tho in 
the first instance they were read improperly, in consequenc* 
•f being misunderstood. 



During the Millennium. 113 

would by no means follow, that the apos- 
tles Paul and John speak of the same res- 
urrection in the passages under considera- 
tion, for 

2. It is very manifest, that one is to 
be at the beginning of the Millennium; and 
the other more than a thousand years after, 
when Christ shall come to judge the quick 
and dead. 

3. That different resurrections are meant 
in these passages, appears highly probable, 
from the consideration, that one speaks of 
the resurrection of the righteous dead in 
general, and the other of such only as ••were 
beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and for 
the word of God, and winch had not wor- 
shipped the beast, neither his image, neither 
had received his mark upon their foreheads, 
or in their hands. 5 ' 

But what are we to understand by the 
saints reigning with Christ during the Mil- 
lennium? Mo doubt it implies, that the 
hearts of the saints will be so completely 
conformed to the will of Christ, that they 
will cordially approve all his laws and dis- 
pensations, and exceedingly rejoice in them; 
— that the saints will be exceedingly honor- 
ed and blessed; and that they will be work- 
ers together with Christ in the administra- 
tion of his affairs, in a manner more strik- 
ing and interesting, than in preceding ages, 
But I am inclined to think it means much 
more than has been explicitly revealed, and 
ia* 



114 State of the World 

more than any mortal has yet conceived, or 
will conceive, until it shall be known by 
blessed experience. 

PROPOSITION XVIII. 

Zion will appear exceedingly beautiful and 
glorious, in the Millennium. 

Zion has often been covered with a cloud, 
and the beauty of Israel cast down to the 
ground. Long has the church been travel- 
ling in the wilderness, clothed in sackcloth, 
with dust and ashes upon her head, and 
often with her garments rent. But behold, 
she is coming up from the wilderness, lean- 
ing on her Beloved, her almighty Maker, 
Friend and Husband. And her Beloved is 
now saying to her in the accents of tenderest 
affection, "0 thou afflicted, tost with the tem- 
pest, and not comforted; behold, I will lay 
thy stones with fair colors, and lay thy foun- 
dations with sapphires. And I will make thy 
windows of agates, and thy gates of carbun- 
cles, and all thy borders of pleasant stones." 
— The time is coming, my brethren, when 
the church will "look forth as the morning, 
fair as the moon, clear as the sun, beautiful 
as Tirzah, and comely as Jerusalem." The 
King's daughter shall then be all-glorious 
within, and appear all-glorious without; 
her clothing shall be of wrought gold; she 
shall be brought to the King in raiment 
of needle-work. He shall greatly desire 
her beauty, and exceedingly rejoice in her 
love. 

* !•. £4:t!, 12- 



During the Millennium. 115 

PROPOSITION XIX. 

During the Millennium the earth will be 
filled with the glory of God. 

This is so often predicted, and promised, 
and intimated in the bible, as to supersede 
the necessity of particular quotation. In 
one sense indeed, the earth is now filled with 
the glory of God. It contains numberless 
displays of his power, wisdom and goodness. 
But in the Millennium, it will be filled with 
displays of divine glory much more rich, 
abundant and striking. The wickedness of 
mankind, and the curse of God, under which 
the world shall have been groaning for thou- 
sands of years, will then be removed. Sea- 
sons and climates, winds and waves, will 
probably exhibit a milder and more delight- 
ful aspect. The rich luxuriance of the fruits 
of the earth will exhale a more glorious cloud 
of incense to the God of nature. The beasts 
of the firld and the fowls of the air, instead 
of devouring each other, will dwell peaceful- 
ly together, and seem to unite in harmoni- 
ous anthems of praise to the God of peace. 
But these will be faint glories, compared 
with others more illustrious, with which the 
earth will be filled during the Millennium. 
It will be filled with moral agents almost in- 
numerable, perhaps a thousand times as 
many, as its present inhabitants. These 
will be greatly distinguished above all pre- 
ceding generations, for the powers of their 
minds, for their attainments ia knowledge, 



116 State of the World 

in understanding, in wisdom, in prudence, 
in refinements in every intellectual and social 
excellence; but especially for their zeal for 
the Lord of hosts, for their glowing and ra- 
tional devotion, for their fervent charity 
anions themselves. If for a moment we 
glance forward an eye of faith, and take a 
view of the Millennians, according" to the best 
light that we can gain from the sure word of 
prophecy, must we not exclaim, ••Behold, 
how these Christians love one another!'- •'be- 
hold, how good and how pleasant it is, for 
brethren to dwell together in unity." And 
they will be distinguished for good works,no 
less, than for zeal, charity and devotion. 
The church will then be clothed in the gar- 
ments of salvation, and shine forth with a 
radiance not yet conceived by mortals. It 
Will seem to turn the light of the sun and 
moon into darkness, and their glory into 
sbamc. "The moon shall be confounded, 
and the sun ashamed, when the Lord of hosts 
shall reign in mount Zion, and in Jerusa- 
lem, and before his ancients gloriously." 
Aii the glories that will he displayed in the 
vegetable, animal, intellectual and moral 
world, will be only different forms of the 
glory of God. And the myriads of holy be- 
in.^ that shall then people the earth, will have 
eyes to see. and hearts to admire, the glory 
of God, in every dew drop, in every opening 
bud, and more especially, in every singing, 
shouting, exulting Christian. Then will be- 



Luring the Millennium* 1 1 7 

most eminently fulfilled the exceeding great 
and precious promise, made to Zion, "Thy 
people also shall be all righteous; they shall 
inherit the land for ever, the branch of my 
planting, that I may be glorified." Then 
with most striking propriety may it be said 
by Jehovah, "This people have 1 formed for 
myself; they shall shew forth my praise. " 
"Thou art my servant, Israel, in whom I 
will be glorified." 

PROPOSITION XX. 

During the Millennium, Christians will 
be much happier, than before. 

"Comfort ye, comfort ye, my people, saith 
your God. Speak ye comfortably to Jeru- 
salem, and cry unto her, that her warfare is 
accomplished, and her sin pardoned." How 
great, how unspeakable, will be the enjoy- 
ment of Christians, when pure and undefiled 
religion shall be so extensively, so univer- 
sally triumphant; when every idol shall be cast 
away to the moles and to the bats; when all 
the dark places of the earth shall be enlight- 
ened and cheered by an immortal Sun; when 
the habitations of cruelty shall be filled with 
the humble worshippers and cheerful imi- 
tators of the benevolent Jesus; when the out- 
casts of Jacob shall be all gathered to Shilob, 
and Israel shall blossom, and bud, and fill 
the face of the world with fruit; when the 
persecutor's sword, shall cease to reek with 
human blood; when the arm of violence 
shall be unbraced, and the tongue of slander 
silenced; when Sateu shall be cast out, and 



118 State of the World 

the demon of war chained forever; when all 
shall he permitted to sit under their own 
vines and fig-trees, having none to molest or 
make them afraid; when kings and queens 
shall he nursing fathers and nursing mothers 
to the church; when the saints shall inherit 
the earth, and delight themselves in the 
abundance of peace; when the wicked shall 
entirely cease from the earth; when the earth 
shall not be polluted by a single drunkard, 
nor a glutton, nor any species of vice; when 
the land shall no longer mourn by reason of 
lying, and sw earing, and stealing, and cheat- 
ing, and wrath, and strife, and bitterness; 
when envy and revenge and every hateful 
passion shall be suppressed. How blessed 
will be the state of the world, when all shall 
know 7 , and serve the Lord from the least unto 
the greatest; when the most useful and im- 
portant knowledge shall be exceedingly in- 
creased, and extended to all classes: when 
Christians shall m;ike such attainments in 
grace, that the feeble shall be as David; 
when disease and pain shall scarcely be 
known upon earth; when the world shall 
swarm with Christians — with Christians, 
who, notwithstanding their amazing num- 
bers, shall be furnished with an abundance 
of the necessaries, conveniences and delights 
of life; when all the vast family of Christ on 
earth, shall be most firmly united in love, in 
sentiment, in practice; when the saints, 
glowing with the spirit of martyrs, shall 
reign with Christ, and shout his praise in 



During the Millennium. 1 1 9 

the most exalted strains, that mortals can 
know; and the whole earth shall be filled 
with the glory of God. "Sing, O ye heav- 
ens, for the Lord hath done it; shout, ye 
lower parts of the earth; break forth into 
singing, ye mountains, O forest, and every 
tree therein; for the Lord hath redeemed 
Jacob, and glorified himself in Israel." 

Happv, thrice happy sons of Millennial 
glory, with what tender compassion will you 
look back upon us, who, tho we have so much 
reason to be thankful for the light and priv- 
ileges we enjoy, yet, compared with you, 
are still groping in the dark, and grovelling 
in the dust. 

And now, my brethren, let us pause, and 
for a moment reflect upon the superior glo- 
ries of the upper world, [f such is to be the 
bliss and glory of the Millennium, what is 
heaven! Compared with the light of heaven, 
even the meridian effulgence of the Millen- 
nial day, will be as darkness. Compared 
with the glory of heaven, the Millennium 
itself will have no glory, by reason of the 
glory, that so greatly excelleth. Eye hath 
not seen, nor ear heard, neither have enter- 
ed into the heart of man, the things which 
God hath prepared, for them that love him. 
Dearly beloved, let us give all diligence, to 
make our calling and election sure, and let 
lis most fervently and constantly strive to 
enter into that glorious and eternal rest; that 
reinaineth to the people of God, 



LECTURE VII. 

The Signs of the Times. 

We now proceed to the Second General 
Inquiry, When will the Millennium com- 
mence? 

Tlio this inquiry may not be considered 
quite so important, as the preceding, yet to 
Christians, who have made it a subject of 
their serious and devout consideration, there 
can scarcely be an inquiry more interesting 
in such a day as the present — an inquiry, 
which appears to be growing more and more 
interesting from year to year, as evidence 
accumulates, that the day is approaching. 
The signs of the times unite with the scrip- 
tures in proclaiming the approach of the 
blessed day — in calling aloud to slumbering 
virgins both wise and foolish, "Awake! 
awake! behold, the Bridegroom cometh; 
awake from your slumbers, shake off your 
indolence, unfold your arms, arise from your 
sloth,and go ye out to meet 11™." "Prepare to 
meet your God; prepare to meet your Sar- 
ior, when becomes to bless the world." 

In the first place, the signs of the times 
proclaim that the Millennial day is approach- 
ing. 

In order to discern these signs with any 
considerable clearness, we must contrast the 



Signs of the Times. 121 

former state of the world with the present. 
For this purpose, it may be necessary to go 
back in imagination to a period, nearly 
£000 years distant. 

At the commencement of the Christian 
era, the Roman empire embraced a great 
part of the civilized world.* After three 
or four hundred years, the Romans had be- 
come so degenerate, that, instead of being 
able to extend their dominion, they could 
not even defend themselves from the attacks 
of their enemies; they were unable to pre- 
serve the possessions they had gained. The 
enemies, that then attacked them, were 
barbarians, Goths, Vandals, &c, who issuing 
from the vast regions of the north, poured 
in upon the empire, like an overwhelming 
flood. A few extracts from Dr. Robertson 
may give some idea, tho doubtless a very 
faint idea, of the distress, devastation, and 
degradation, which these enfuriated des- 
peradoes brought upon mankind. 

"Wherever they marched/' says that cel- 
ebrated historian, "their rout was marked 
with blood. They ravaged or destroyed all 
around them. They made no distinction 
between what was sacred, and what was 
profane. They respected no age, or sex, or 
rank. What escaped the fury of the first 
inundation, perished in those, which follow- 
ed it. The most fertile and populous prov 

* Luke 2 



1 22 Signs of the Times, 

inces were converted into deserts; in which 
were scattered the ruins of villages and cit- 
ies, that afforded shelter to a tew miserable 
inhabitants, whom chance had preserved, or 
the sword of the enemy, wearied with de- 
stroying, had spared — Famine and pesti- 
lence, which always march in the train of 
war, when it ravages with such inconsiderate 
cruelty, raged in every part of Europe, and 
completed its Bufferings — The contemporary 
authors, who beheld the scene of desolation,' 
labor, and are at a loss for expressions, to 
describe the horror of it. The scourge of 
God y the destroyer of nations, are the dread- 
ful epithets, by which they distinguish the 
most noted of the barbarous leaders; and 
they compare the ruin, which they had 
brought on the world, to the havoc, occasion- 
ed by earthquakes, con flag rations, or deluges; 
the most formidable and fatal calamities, 
which the imagination of man can conceive, 
— In less than two centuries after their first 
irruptions, the barbarians took possession of 
Thrace, Pannonia, Gaul, Spain, Africa, and 
at last, of Jtaly and Rome itself — Scarcely 
any vestiges of Roman policy, jurisprudence, 
arts, or literature remained. New forms of 
government, new laws, new manners, new 
dresses, new languages, and new names of 
men and countries, were every where intro- 
duced." 

"In less than a century after the barba- 
rous nations settled in their new conquests, 



Signs of the Times. 123 

almost all the effects of the knowledge and 
civilization, which the Romans had spread 
through feurope, disappeared. 5 ' "Not only 
tiie arts of elegance: hut many of the useful 
arts, without which life can scarcely be con- 
sidered as comfortable, were neglected, or 
lost. Literature, science, taste, were words 
scarcely in use. Persons of high rank, and 
in the most eminent stations, could not read, 
or write. The human mind, neglected, un- 
cultivated, and depressed, sunk into the most 
profound ignorance. — Nor was this ignor- 
ance confined to laymen. The greater part 
of the clergy were not greatly superior to 
them in science. Many dignified ecclesias- 
tics could not subscribe the canons of those 
councils, in which they sat as members. — 
Europe did not produce, during four centu- 
ries, one author, who merits to be read, 
either on account of the elegance of his 
composition, or the justness and novelty of 
his sentiments. There is scarcely one in- 
vention, useful or ornamental, of which that 
long period can boast." 

"The barbarous nations were not only 3* 
literate; but they regarded literature with 
contempt. They found the inhabitants of 
the provinces of the empire, sunk in degen- 
eracy, sunk in effeminacy, and averse to 
war.— This degeneracy of manners the il- 
literate barbarians imputed to their love of 
learning. Even after they had settled in 
the countries, which they had conquered^ 



124 Signs of the Times. 

they would not permit their children to be in- 
structed in the sciences." 

"Even the Christian religion degenerated 
during those ages of darkness, into an illib- 
eral superstition. The barbarous nations, 
when converted to Christianity, changed the 
object, not the spirit, of their worship. — In- 
stead of aspiring to the sanctity of virtue, 
which alone can render men acceptable to 
the great Author of order and excellence, 
they imagined that they had satisfied every 
obligation of duty, by a scrupulous observ- 
ance of external ceremonies." Such is an im- 
perfect outline of the account of one of the 
ablest historians,thatever wrote in English.* 

Long and dreadful was this intellectual and 
moral darkness, this midnight of the soul. 
It may be considered, as commencing at the 
fall of the Roman empire in the west,nearthe 
beginning of the fifth century, and continu- 
ing till the revival of learning and religion, 
by the instrumentality of Luther and others, 
in the sixteenth — a period of eleven hundred 
years. The time from the ninth century to 
the thirteenth or fourteenth, was the dark- 
est part of this long darkness; and may be 
denominated the midnight of midnight. 

If a person, unacquainted with history, 
could be carried back five hundred years, 
and take a view of the gloomy degraded 
state of society at that time, he would be filled 
with astonishment and horror. 

* See Robertson's Charles V- Vol. I. Sec. i. in various 
places. 



Signs of the Times. 12'5 

With what admiration and gratitude thei>, 
should we hail the Sun of righteousness, 
whose healing beams have so far dispelled 
this gross and horrible darkness, this worse 
than Egyptian gloom! How numerous, how 
vaiious, how wonderful, are the improve- 
ments, that have been made within five 
hundred years; improvements in the sciences 
and arts; improvements in the social, civil, 
moral, literary, and religious, privileges of 
a great part of mankind. Peculiarly striking 
and astonishing, has been the change in this 
country. Less than half five hundred years 
ago, it was the habitation of savage beasts 
and savage men. How suddenly has the 
wilderness become a fruitful field! 

I shall not attempt to mention all the im- 
portant inventions, discoveries, and improve- 
ments, that have so changed the face of the 
world in five hundred years. Probably very 
few, if any, have information adequate for 
the performance of such a task. It may suf- 
fice to^make a few observations upon some of 
the most important. 

After men began to emerge from the dead 
sea of the dark ages, they continued rising 
faster and faster. One improvement pre- 
pared the way for another; and this for a 
number more.. To trace the improvements, 
that have been made within this period, is 
peculiarly pleasing, delightful, and animat- 
ing, to the friends of man — to the friends of 
the intellectual and moral progress of the 



126 Signs of the Times. 

world, and especially to those, who find pleas- 
ure in contemplating the wonderful works 
of God. 

To the Christian,however,who has arriv- 
ed at the meridian of life, by far the most 
interesting portion of the five hundred years, 
is that, which has elapsed within his own 
memory. A great part of the improvements, 
which have been made for the promotion of 
human welfare, have been made within 
twenty five years. In this short period, 
which, to those who can look through it, may 
appear but as a moment, it is probable, that 
more has been done upon the great scale for 
the good of mankind, than had been done 
for fifteen hundred years before. 

Deeply impressed with the importance of 
combining their efforts, the friends of God 
and man have formed innumerable associa- 
tions for the most benevolent purposes. Their 
success, especially within a few years, has 
been no less astonishing than delightful. 
Only a few of these can now be mentioned. 

The British and Foreign Bible Society 
may be considered, as the most important of 
all these noble institutions. It was formed 
at London, March 7, 1804. It was designed 
to supply the destitute and indigent, with the 
word of God. This is an object, for which 
good men of all denominations can most cor- 
dially unite, and for which they have united. 
The world has gazed with admiration upon 
Catholics, Episcopalians, Presbyterians, 



Signs of the Times. 127 

Congregationalists, Baptists, Methodists, 
Quakers, &c. most zealously engaged in the 
blessed work of sending the gospel to the 
poor — to the poor of every nation, kindred 
and tongue. Thousands and hundreds of 
thousands of bibles, have already been dis- 
persed by that Society. How much good 
the poor of various nations have already 
derived from these numerous and abundant 
donations, will never be known in the present 
world. Nor is this all, In this case, no 
doubt, it has been found as blessed to give, 
as to receive. While these generous souls, 
these holy men of various denominations, have 
been thus engaged in opening the wells of sal- 
vation for the refreshment of othei\s,thcir own 
spirits have been watered and refreshed, 
with heavenly dews. They have felt a mu- 
tual love, a mutual joy, before unknown, and 
unconceived. It has been a sight, which 
angels no doubt have viewed with pleasure, 
a sight, at which Christian charity has gazed 
through tears of joy — to see men of different 
communions, and widely different sentiments 
with regard to rites and ceremonies manifest- 
ing a greater regard for those fundamental 
truths, in which they agree, than the circum- 
stantial points, in which they differ — to see 
them manifesting a greater regard for the 
general welfare of Christ's kingdom, than 
for the advancement of their own particular 
sects. It was a noble reply of a British 
Episcopalian, to one, who had expressed a 



128 Signs of the Times. 

fear, that their church would be endangered 
by circulating the bible without the prayer- 
book, "What, said he, the bible knock down 
the church! then let her fall!" This surely 
was a reply, worthy to be set in letters of gold 
and laid in the rock forever. And yet there 
is no doubt that he regarded that venerable 
church, quite as much as the timid objector. 
He probably regarded it, not principally be- 
cause it was the church, to which lie belong- 
ed, nor because he had been taught from his 
intan y to consider it the apostolic church, 
nor because it has so long been the estab- 
lished religion of his country, nor because 
he thought it best suited topromote thepolitical 
welfare of the king,the nobles,and the people; 
but because he thought it was founded upon 
Christ, and erected according to his word. 
He was willing to have it brought to the law 
and to the testimony, that it might be fairly 
tried; and if it could not stand that holy tesU 
he was willing it should fall; he was willing 
to renounce his church, to keep his bible, if 
he could not retain both. Such, I trust are 
the feelings of every enlightened Christian* 
whatever be his denomination. 
The British and Foreign BibleSociety,whicfi 
I am disposed to consider the most respect- 
able and important of all institutions,that are 
merely human, may be considered as the par- 
ent of a vast family of blooming and vigorous 
children, that are fast rising into manhood* 
the joy of Christians,and the delight of heav- 
?3ii It is probable there are now in the world 



Signs of the Times. 129 

more than a thousand Bible Societies, and 
Bib!? Associations, all engaged in the same 
noble charity of sending the bible without note 
or comment, to those, who are destitute of 
the richest boon of Heaven. Behold, how 
good and how r pleasant it is, for brethren to 
dwell together in unity, and exert their unit- 
ed influence, to fill the world with the oracles 
of eternal truth— the messages of everlasting 
love. With what striking propriety might 
the present age be denominated, THE AGE 
OF* BIBLES! 

But the present age is not distinguished, 
by Bible Societies alone. With equal ardor 
and success have multitudes of different de- 
nominations engaged in forming Missionary 
Societies, Tract Societies, Education Socie- 
ties, Moral Societies, and other Societies of 
various names, for the purpose of feeding the 
hungry, clothing the naked, instructing the 
ignorant, saving the lost, and promoting 
peace on earth and mutual amity among 
mankind. 

So greatly is the present age distinguish- 
ed by missions that we have reason to believe 
that the angel whom John saw in vision, has 
for several years been flying through the 
midst of heaven, "having the everlasting 
gospel to preach, unto them that dwell on the 
earth, and to every nation and kindred and 
tongue and people, saying with a loud voice, 
Fear God, and give glory to him; for the 
hour of his judgment is come; and worship 
him that made heaven and earth, and tlie 



130 Signs of the Times* 

sea, and the fountains of waters." May we 
not hope, that the other angel will soon fol- 
low with the glorious proclamation, "Baby- 
Ion is fallen?"* 

If it were not for other wonderful im- 
provements, the present would doubtless be 
denominated, THE AGE OF SABBATH 
SCHOOLS. Toward the close of the last 
century, Mr. Raikes immortalized his name, 
by devising and beginning an institution, 
the benefit of which it is probably beyond the 
power of angels to compute. It is supposed, 
that there are now about five thousand Sab- 
bath Schools in operation, in which are in- 
structed nearly five hundred thousand chil- 
dren and youth. It is probable the last year 
was more distinguished for exertions in this 
way, than any preceding year; and we have 
reason to hope, that the present year will be 
more distinguished still. 

Mr. Lancaster's method of instruction, by 
which one master can teach several hundred 
at the same time, is one of the wonders of 
the present age. Tho its usefulness will 
probably be confined principally to the in- 
digent of populous places, yet there is no 
doubt, that this method will be found among 
the mighty engines, by which God will de- 
molish the strong holds of Satan, and pre- 
pare the way for the saints to take the king- 
dom, and possess it for ever. 

* Rev. 14:6— S: 



Signs of the Times. 131 

But especially may the present age be 
styled, THE AGE OF PRAYER; and per- 
haps there is no other distinction, so encour- 
aging as this. There have been multitudes 
and multitudes of associations and meetings 
for prayer, for the express purpose of crying 
to God, and pleading with him, that his 
kingdom may come, and that his will may be 
done on earth, as it is in heaven; and that he 
would hasten the glorious day,when all shall 
know, worship, and obey him. Great num- 
bers of Christians in the four quarters of the 
world are accustomed to observe some part 
of the first Monday in each month, as a spe- 
cial season for prayer, and for gaining infor- 
mation respecting the progress of the gospel, 
ana the dawning of the Millennial day. There 
is reason to believe also, that secret prayer is 
more incessantly, and more fervently, and 
much more abundantly, offered up for the 
advancement of the Redeemer's kingdom, 
than in any preceding age. And perhaps 
there is nothing more encouraging upon this 
point, than the thousands of female prayer- 
meetings, that have been recently formed, to 
pray for tiie peace and glory of Jerusalem. 
Tho the feelings of some of the mothers in 
Israel and daughters of Zion in some places, 
may at first have almost revolted at the 
thought of such a meeting; yet, upon fur- 
ther consideration, they have found, that 
there is nothing in scripture nor reason, that 
forbids a devout woman, to pray in a retired 
circle of beloved sisters. And how sweet, 



132 Signs of the Times. 

how delightful, how edifying to themselves, 
how profitable to others, have they often 
found the exercise. 

The Theological Seminary at Andover is 
perhaps as striking, as useful, and as promis- 
ing a monument of Christian liberality, as the 
world has ever seen. There are now at that 
Seminary eighty theological students, most 
of them partly or wholly supported by the 
hand of charity. Several other Theological 
Seminaries have been recently established to 
distinguish and bless the present age. 

In recounting some of the principal won- 
ders of the present age, that are most inter- 
esting to Christians, religious newspapers 
must not be forgotten. Several of thesc,prob- 
ably as many as twelve, have been commen- 
ced in this country within two or three years. 
Of the Boston Recorder, with which I have 
been most acquainted,! can say without hesita- 
tion, that it presents to its pious readers "a 
feast of fat things and of wines on the lecs 7 " 
from week to week. Does not this appear 
like inscribing upon the bells of horses, 
HOLINESS TO THE LORD? To the 
friends of the Redeemer, who are acquaint- 
ed with the worth of the Recorder, it must 
be comforting to learn, that its circulation is 
extending from month to month. 

The Panoplist, or u Panoplist and Mis- 
sionary Magazine United," has probably- 
been productive of more good, than any oiher 
periodical publication hi this country. Tim 



Signs of the Times. 133 

happy union of these excellent publications, 
originally two, is deserving of particular 
notice and peculiar gratitude to the great 
Promoter of brotherly love. The Massa- 
chusetts Missionary Magazine was com- 
menced in the year 1803. Its conductors 
and patrons were principally of that theo- 
logical complexion which is sometimes de- 
nominated Hopkinsian. In 1806, appeared 
the Panoplist, conducted principally by those, 
who would rather be known by the name 
Calvinists. After these two publications had 
for a few years marched, on side by side, in 
the most amicable manner, toward the same 
great and glorious object, it was thought 
best, that they should be conveyed in the 
same vehicle. They were accordingly uni- 
ted, and have since proceeded together un- 
der the same cover. Whatever some may 
have imagined, it is found that the Hopkin- 
sians and Calvinists of Massachusetts can 
walk together, most harmoniously together. 
Thetwo branchesof the Theological Semina- 
ry have exhibited a union very similar; and 
this union has likewise extended in a very 
happy degree to the General Association of 
Massachusetts. It is ardently hoped, it is 
confidently believed, that this triple alliance, 
this three-fold cord, by which Calvinists and 
Hopkinsians are so happily and so firmly 
bound together, will not be quickly broken. 
Perhaps no two denominations of Christians 
ever more sensibly felt, how good and how 



134 &igns of the Times. 

pleasant it is for brethren to dwell together 
in unity. 

But the king of Zion has granted to the 
present age a distinction, that calls for loud- 
er notes ot gratitude, and more joyful strains 
of praise. It is the abundant effusions of the 
Holy Spirit upon a great number of places, 
especially upon so great a proportion o^f our 
colleges. Never before were so many 
of these happy seats of learning so distin- 
guished by the special grace of God, as with- 
in ten years, and especially within two years. 
Within about two years there have been 
wonderful revivals of religion among the stu- 
dents of Williams College in Massachu- 
setts, of Bowdoin College in Maine, of Dart- 
mouth College in New Hampshire, of Mid* 
dlebury College in Vermont,of Yale College 
in Connecticut,of Princeton College in New- 
Jersey, and of Hampden Sidney College in 
Virginia. With regard to the latter, how- 
ever, I would not speak so confidently, as 
I have not been so directly and particularly 
informed. At some of the above mentioned 
colleges, there have been repeated revivals 
within a few years. It seems as tho the 
Lord of the harvest were converting a mul- 
titude of those, who enjoy the highest litera- 
ry advantages, which our country can afford, 
on purpose to replenish the Theological Sem- 
inaries, that have been formed for their re- 
ception; or rather, that the great Lord of 
tUp harvest is providing himself with an on- 



Signs of the Times. 135 

usual number of reapers, in order to gath- 
er in an abundant and glorious harvest of 
souls. 

The successful exertions that have been 
recently made to instruct the deaf and dumb, 
are notfthe least of the wonders of this won- 
derful age. 

We have only glanced at some of the 
principal signs, that distinguish the present 
times from all others. But is not this glance 
sufficient to show us, that Jesus is on his way 
to take the kingdom, and reign in the hearts 
of all?— that in a few centuries the wicked 
shall cease, the meek inherit the earth, and 
righteousness, peace, and joy shall fill the 
world? 



LECTURE VIII. 

In what sense one day is with the Lord, as a 
1000 years. — Nebuchadnezzar's visionary 
image. — Daniel 9 s four beasts. — The eleventh 
horn of the Roman Beast. 

From a very brief consideration of some of 
the principal signs of the times in the pre- 
ceding lecture, we have seen, that from them 
there is reason to hope,that Christ's Millen- 
nial kingdom is at hand. If we turn to the 
bible, the more sure word of prophecy may 
serve to confirm this pleasing hope. 

Some have imagined that the Millennium 
will commence nearly or exactly six thous- 
and years after the creation of the world. 
As God was engaged six days in the work 
of creation, and rested on the seventh, 
and as he sanctified each seventh day 
as a day of holy rest, or Sabbath, so it 
has been supposed, that the church after 
being in a state of labor and toil and 
distress, for six thousand years, will find 
the seven thousandth, a period of holy rest, 
of peace and glory. Accordingly, as the 
world stood about 4000 years before Christ, 
so it is supposed, that the Millennium will 
commence about A. D. 2000. This is indeed 
a very short and easy way of computing the 
commencement of the Millennium. But I 
must acknowledge, I could never feel the 



One Day as 1000 Years. 1ST 

force of the argument, nor perceive the just- 
ness of the conclusion. Upon what ground 
is it concluded, that the six days of creation 
and seventh of rest, have any relation to the 
subject? There are indeed many things 
mentioned in the bible, which are types or 
figures of other things. But what reason 
have we to conclude, that these days are 
typical; unless we adopt the unfounded, the 
wild, the extravagant notion, that every 
thing mentioned in the Old Testament is a 
type, and that every passage has a spiritual 
meaning, distinct from the literal? But 
even if we should grant, that these days 
may be typical, why make each signify just 
a thousand years? Is the passage, which is 
sometimes adduced for this purpose sufficient 
to establish the point? As there is some- 
thing in the sound, which may make it seem 
sufficient, and as many have thought it 
sufficient, it may be proper to attend to 
it for a few moments. 2 Pet. 3:8. <'But 
beloved, be not ignorant of this one thing, 
that one day is with the Lord as a thous- 
and years, and a thousand years as one 
day." By the expression, "Be not igno- 
rant," the apostle seems to intimate, that 
lie alludes to something, with which his 
brethren were well acquainted, or of which 
they ought not to be ignorant. If we can 
ascertain the meaning of the expression, to 
which the apostle alludes, it may assist us in 
understanding the passage under considera- 
*i2 



13 8 One Lay as 1000 Years. 

tion. Now there is no doubt that he alludes 
to Ps. 90:4. "For a thousand years in thy 
sight are but as yesterday, when it is past, 
and as a watch in the night." No one can 
imagine that this passage has the least allu- 
sion to the first seven days at the commence- 
ment of time. No doubt, it means, that to 
Him, who is from everlasting to everlasting, 
a thousand years is but a very short time; 
as "all nations are as nothing, and they are 
counted less than nothing and vanity ,"to Him, 
who is omnipotent,and filleth immensity. The 
apostle adopts the expression with little va- 
riation, and seems to use it in the same sense. 
Let us look at the connexion. The apostle 
had just been speaking of "scoffers, who 
should come in the last days, walking after 
their own lusts, and saying, Where is the 
promise of his coming? for since the fathers 
fell asleep, all things continue as they were 
from the beginning of the creation." The 
scoffer's objection seems to have been, that 
the Lord had delayed his coming so long, 
that it was doubtful whether he would ever 
fulfil his promise for this purpose; or rather, 
that there was no reason to expect the ful- 
filment, so long after the promise was sup- 
posed to have been made. But the apostle 
intimates, that there is no reason to doubt 
the accomplishment, on account of the long 
delay. For tho the time may seem long to 
man, who is of yesterday, and knows com- 
paratively nothing, and whose days are as a 



One Day as 1000 Fears^ l$9 

hand's breadth, yet to Him, who inhabited* 
eternity, with whom one day is as a thousand 
years, and a thousand years as one day, the 
time is not long; and the Lord is by no 
means to be accounted slack in accomplish- 
ing what he has promised. To me this ap- 
pears to be the plain and obvious meaning of 
the passage; and so it appeared to most of 
the commentators, that I have found it con- 
venient to consult, namely, Baxter, Burkitt, 
Pool,(oryather Neal,one of hiscontinuators,) 
Doddridge, Macknight, and Scott. Not one 
of them gives the least intimation, that ever 
it was conjectured, that in any case a day 
was designed to represent a thousand years. 
The paraphrase of Doddridge runs thus, 
''All the divisions of our time are so abso- 
lutely disproportionable to his eternity, that 
the difference between one and another of 
them, seems to be lost in his presence; and 
a vengeance certainly to be inflicted after a 
thousand years, is nearer in his estimations 
than that which is to be executed tomorrow, 
is in ours." Upon the passage we find the 
following Note in Macknight. ''This is an 
allusion to Ps. 90:4. But neither the apos- 
tle, nor the psalmist,meant, that God does not 
perceive any difference, between the unequal 
durations of a day and a thousand years; but, 
that these differences do not affect either his 
designs, or actions, or felicity, as they do 
those of finite creatures. So that what he 
brings tq pass on the day he declares lus 



140 One Day as 1000 Tear*. 

purpose, is not more certain, than what he 
will biing to pass a thousand years after his 
declaration. In like manner, what is to be 
brought to pass a long time after his declar- 
ation, is not less certain, than if it had been 
done when declared." 

But it is said "there is an old tradition 
among Jews and Christians, that at the end 
of six thousand years, the Messiah shall 
come, and the world shall be renewed, the 
reign of the wicked one shall cease, and the 
reign of the saints upon earth shall begin." 
But is it not too late in the day — are we not 
too far removed from the thraldom and dark- 
ness of Popery, to think of gaining light 
upon such a subject as this, from an old tra- 
dition? No doubt we may often derive much 
from traditions in relation to facts, that have 
been long past; but can tradition tell us of 
what is to come? Is it not astonishing that zeal- 
ous Protestants of such talents and piety as 
Hopkins and Hp Newton should think of ask- 
ing tradition, when the Millennium will com- 
mence? Where did that tradition originate? 
No doubt in the lively imagination of some 
person, when thinking of the first week of 
time, and of the abundant use of sevens in the 
bible. But even if it had been the most de- 
liberate opinion of the greatest of the fathers 
of the primitive church, what would his 
opinion be to us? Might we not presume, 
that the opinions of the fathers would most 
probably be incorrect upon such a subject? 



Daniel and Revelation. 141 

It is probable that the prophets themselves 
did not generally know, if indeed they ever 
knew, the time of the distant events,which they 
were inspired to foretel; tho they "searched 
what, or what manner of time, the Spirit of 
Christ, which was in them, did signify. 5 ' 
There is reason to believe, that all the most 
difficult prophecies relating to the Millenni- 
um would remain in great darkness and obscu- 
rity,till near the time of their accomplishment. 
The greatest evidence, that can be derived 
from tradition upon this point,therefore,must 
be considered as of the negative kind, tend- 
ing to disprove the proposition, that it is ad- 
duced to support. 

I am inclined to think, that no parts of the 
bible can afford us any definite information 
respecting the time, when the Millennium 
will commence, except what are to be found 
in Daniel and Revelation. It is confidently 
believed, that these two books contain much 
light upon the subject. But the prophecies 
relating to the subject are so intricate and 
difficult in themselves, and so connected with 
other prophecies, that fully to exhibit the 
light which they contain, would require a dis- 
cussion sufficient to filla volume. Only an im- 
perfect outline of such a discussion can be here 
exhibited. To the uninformed reader, whose 
bosom glows to gain information concerning 
the Millennium, a very imperfect view of 
this part of the subject, may be interesting 
and useful. The reader will have patience 



142 Nebuchadnezzar's Image. 

to take a view of the prophecies relating to 
this subject in their connexion, in* order to 
perceive the force of the arguments deduced 
from them. 

The first intimation of the Millennium, 
which Daniel gives us is in the latter part of 
the second chapter. Nebuchadnezzar had 
dreamed a dream, which lie seems to have 
forgotten, tho it greatly affected him. This 
dream Daniel was inspired to relate, and to 
interpret. "Thou, O king," said the proph- 
et,«'sawest, and behold, a great image. This 
great image, whose brightness was excel- 
lent, stood before thee, and the form thereof 
was terrible. This image's head was of fine 
gold, his breast and his arms of silver, his belly 
and his thighs of brass, his legs of iron, his 
feet part of iron, and part of clay. Thou 
sawest till that a stone was cut out without 
hands, which smote the image upon his feet* 
that were of iron and clay, and brake them 
to pieces. Then was the iron, the clay, the 
brass, the silver, and the gold broken to 
pieces together, and became like the chaff of 
the summer threshing-floors; and the wind 
carried them away, that no place was found 
for them; and the stone that smote th« image 
became a great mountain and filled the earth. 
This is the dream; and we will shew the inter- 
pretation thereof before the king. Thou, 
O king, art a king of kings; for the God of 
heaven hath given thee a kingdom, power, 
and strength and glory. And wheresoever 



Nehichadnezzar's Image. 143 

the children of men dwell, the beasts of the 
field, and the fowls of the heaven, hath 
he given into thine hand, and hath made 
thee ruler over them all. Thou art this head 
of gold. And after thee shall arise another 
kingdom inferior to thee, and another third 
kingdom of brass, which shall bear rule 
over all the earth. And the fourth kingdom 
shall be strong as iron; forasmuch as iron 
breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things; 
and as iron that breaketh all these, shall it 
break in pieces and bruise. And whereas 
thou sawest the feet and toes part of potter's 
clay, and part of iron; the kingdom shall be 
divided; but there shall be in it of the 
strength of iron; forasmuch as thou sawest 
the iron mixed with miry clay. And as the 
toes of the feet were part of iron and part of 
clay, so the kingdom shall be partly strong 
and partly broken. And whereas thou saw- 
est iron mixed with miry clay, they shall 
mingle themselves with the seed of men; but 
they shall not cleave one to another, even as 
iron is not mixed with clay. And in the 
days of these kings shall the God of heaven 
set up a kingdom, which shall never be de- 
stroyed; and the kingdom shall not be left to 
other people, but it shall break in pieces,and 
consume all these kingdoms, and it shall 
stand forever. For as much as thou sawest, 
that the stone was cut out of the mountain 
without hands, and that it break in pieces 
the iron, the brass, the clay, the silver, and 



144 Nebuchadnezzar's Image. 

the gold; the great God hath made known 
to the king what shall come to pass here- 
after." 

The following explanation of the above 
passage is principally taken from the ex- 
cellent Notes of Mr. Scott's Family Bible or 
Commentary. 

«The Chaldean monarchy, over which 
Nebuchadnezzar was the only king of great 
renown, was represented in the vision by tho 
head of gold. For monarchies under a suc- 
cession of princes of the same nation, and 
not individual monarchs, are meant by kings 
in the general language of prophecy. The 
vast riches, magnificence, and prosperity of 
the Chaldean monarchy, and of Babylon,its 
renowned metropolis, give it that pre-emi- 
nence over the succeeding empires, which 
gold has above other metals. Perhaps more 
liberty and peace were enjoyed under it, 
than under those which followed. The head 
of the image, being the emblem of this mon- 
archy, seems only to denote its priority in 
the order of time. The term of its contin- 
uance was far shorter,than that of any of the 
others. 

"The breast and the two arms of silver 
of the image, represented that monarchy, 
which succeeded the Chaldean. This was 
the kingdom of the Mcdes and Persians; the 
united power and authority of which, might 
be denoted by the two arms, shoulders, &c. 
This was inferior to the Chaldean monar- 



Nebuchadnezzar's Image. 145 

chy, as silver is to gold, perhaps in wealth, 
splendor and prosperity; at least it was so 
in the characters of the kings. For the Per- 
sian monarchs, from the death of Cyrus to 
the subversion of the monarchy, were per- 
haps as vile a set of men, as ever disgraced 
human nature. 

"The third kingdom, represented by the 
belly and thighs of the image formed of 
brass, must be that of the Macedonians oi* 
Grecians; which succeeded to the Persian 
monarchy. This was established by the 
conquests of Alexander the Great, and con- 
tinued under his successors. It had less ex- 
ternal magnificence than those which pre- 
ceded; and it was founded and supported by 
arms, many of which were of brass. But 
it was more extensive, than either of the oth- 
ers, including many dominions in Europe, 
as well as those of the Persians in Asia and 
Africa,and many regions farther to the cast, 
than they had ever penetrated. It was there- 
fore foretold, that this kingdom would bear 
rule over all the earth; which may also allude 
to the vain-glorious boast of Alexander, that 
he had subdued the whole world. 

"The Roman kingdom or empire succeed- 
ed to the Macedonian. "It was as strong as 
iron; and like iron it subdued all before it. 
No other people ever made such extensive 
conquest through so many ages. In the ear- 
ly part of their prosperity, they were re- 
markable only for valor, hardiness, frugali- 
13 



146 Nebuchadnezzar's Image 

ty, and poverty, of which iron is a proper 
emblem. The two consuls, by which they 
were long governed, * and the eastern and 
western empires, into which their dominions 
were at length divided, might be denoted by 
the two legs and feet, on which the image 
stood. The ten toes, into which the feet di- 
vided, represented the ten kingdoms, into 
which at length the whole empire was brok- 
en. The civil wars, which weakened the 
state and the conjunction of the Romans 
with the conquered nations, and after- 
wards with theGoths, Vandals and other bar- 
barians who subdued their empire, was de- 
noted by the compounding of the iron with 
the potter's clay, which cannot unite or 
strengthen each other. Thus the Roman em- 
pire decayed in strength, even when it was 
growing more extensive. At length it began 
evidently to decline till it was divided into 
many subordinate kingdoms — This monar- 
chy still subsists in the toes or kingdoms,* 
into which it was broken. 

"Theee four monarchies, probably the 
mightiest that ever appeared on earth, have 
certainly been far more celebrated than any 
others. The history of them in fact com- 
prises the grand transactions of mankind 
from the days of Daniel to this present time. 
The church of God likewise has had vastly 
more concern with these, than with any oth- 
er empires. The countries belonging to 
•them have hitherto been the chief seat of the 



Nebuchadnezzar's Image. 147 

Redeemer's kingdom, which will be render- 
ed universal by the total subversion of the 
last of them. It cannot therefore be thought 
strange, that so many more prophecies 
should be inserted in the sacred oracles con- 
cerning these four kingdoms,than about oth* 
er nations and empires/ 3 

But the grand and all-important subject is 
the kingdom destined to succeed, and greatly 
to surpass them all. 4 <In the days of those 
kings, or during the prevalence of the Ro- 
man authority, the God of heaven had de- 
termined to set up another kingdom, which 
would never be destroyed, or fall under the 
power of any conqueror, seeing it would 
break in pieces and consume all these king- 
doms, and stand for ever. This was repre- 
sented by a stone cut out without hands, 
which smote the image and utterly destroy- 
ed it, and became a great mountain, and fill- 
ed the whole earth." According to Dr. 
Lowth, "the Jews unanimously agree, that 
by the stone is here meant the Messiah. His 
kingdom from small beginnings should pro- 
ceed to fill the whole earth; as if a stone 
should grow to a mountain. Mr. Mede has 
judiciously observed, that this kingdom is de~ 
scribed here in two states, as the kingdom of 
the stone, and the kingdom of the mountain. 
The small and progressive success of Chris- 
tianity is meant by the former; its universal 
triumph, by the latter." "The stone was 
entirely distinct from the image, nay dfc- 



148 Nebuchadnezzar's Image. 

rectly opposite to it in all its interests. It 
must therefore mean a kingdom set up by 
the power of God, without the concurrence 
of human policy or force, and in opposition 
to all the authority and combined efforts of 
the princes of this world, The kingdom of 
Christ was evidently intended. From small 
beginnings it has already made vast pro- 
gress. It has subverted, and will continue 
to subvert, pagan and antichristian king- 
doms, and to entirely destroy and disperse 
them. At length it will triumph over all 
opposition, arid become a great mountain 
and fill the whole earth. This part of the 
prophecy remains to be accomplished. So 
that we have in this dream a most extraor- 
dinary prophetic abstract of the most signal 
events that would take place through all suc- 
ceeding ages, nearly to the consummation 
of all things. As far as the accomplishment 
has proceeded, it has been most exact and 
undeniable; and future ages will be filled with 
astonishment and awe, by witnessing this 
Stone, cut out without hands, destroying the 
remaining toes of the image, and universally 
triumphant." 

Tho this prophecy does not inform us in 
w 7 hat year, nor in what century, the Millen- 
nium is to commence, yet it gives us some in- 
formation upon the subject. It assures us, 
that there will not be another universal hea- 
then or antichristian empire; but that the 
next universal kingdom on earth is to be that 



Daniel's Four Beaste. 149 

of the stone becoming a great mountain and 
filling the earth, and destined to stand for 
ever. As it is a longtime, more than a thou- 
sand years, since the Roma$ empire was 
divided into the ten kingdoms symbolized by 
the toes of the image; and as several of those 
kingdoms have been destroyed, we are en- 
couraged to hope, that the reign of the moun? 
tain cannot be very far distant. 

Thus we have taken one step in the re- 
gion of prophecy toward discovering the 
great and glorious era, when the kingdoms 
of tf lis world shall become the kingdoms of 
our Lord Jesus Christ, We are now 7 pre- 
pared to take another step with greater ease 
and less danger of losing our way. 

In the first year of Belshazzar, Daniel 
had a vision, in which the same kingdoms 
were represented to his view by different 
symbols.* To use nearly the words of Mr. 
Scott. "Mighty conquerors and extensive 
flourishing empires might well be represent- 
ed to the carnal grovelling mind of an am- 
bitious heathen king by a great and splen- 
did image; but to the spiritual heavenly mind 
of the prophet, they might be more fitly rep- 
resented by the most ferocious, destructive 
and terrible of devouring beasts. 59 Of these 
beasts the first was like 3, lion, with wings, 
representing, as we have reason to believe, 
the Chaldean kingdom, like the head of gold; 
the second was like a bear, with three ribs 

* Dan. 7. 
*13 



150 Eleventh Horn. 

in its mouth, representing the Medo-Persian 
empire; the third was like a leopard, with 
four wings upon its back, representing the 
Macedonian empire; the fourth beast was so 
dreadful and terrible, and so exceedingly 
strong, that it seems there was nothing in 
nature, with which it could be fitly compar- 
ed, manifestly representing the Roman em- 
pire. Tho these four beasts symbolized the 
same kingdoms, as the image presented to 
the imagination of Nebuchadnezzar, yet we 
are not to consider the latter vision as a 
mere repetition of the former. In the latter 
the information conveyed seems to be more 
particular and extensive, especially as it re- 
spects the Roman empire. The three first 
beasts seem to he presented principally for 
the sake of introducing the fourth in its prop- 
er chronological order; and the fourth beasjt 
seems to be introduced principally for the 
sake of bringing to view a power intimately 
connected with this beast, and indeed spring- 
ing up out of him — a power, of which there 
is not the least intimaiion in the former vis- 
ion. This power (which I shall denominate 
the eleventh horn to distinguish it from tiie 
little horn of the he-goat, which may be 
called the fifth horn*) seems to constitute the 
grand characteristic feature, the most distin- 
guishing peculiarity of this vision. I am 
inclined to think, therefore, that the eleventh 
horn, or the power which it represents, 

♦Ban. 8:9. 



Eleventh Horn. 151 

should be considered as the grand subject 
of this vision. To this dreadful power, 
therefore, let us direct our chief attention. 

The Roman beast had ten horns, corres- 
ponding with the ten toes of the image. 
Among these, the eleventh seemed to spring 
up very gradually, and almost imperceptibly. 
The account runs thus. "After this I saw 
in the night visions, and behold a fourth 
beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong ex- 
ceedingly; and it had great iron teeth,* it de- 
voured and brake in pieces, and stamped, 
the residue with the feet of it; and it was 
diverse from all the beasts that were before 
it: and it had ten horns. I considered the horns, 
and behold, there came up among them 
another little horn, before whom there were 
three horns plucked up by the roots; and be- 
hold in this horn were eyes, like the eyes of 
a man, and a mouth speaking great things." 

This horn appears to be denominated little, 
not because it was less than the rest, when 
at its full growth; for it was ultimately the 
greatest of all the horns; but because it came 
up after the rest, and was very small, 
when they were full grown. When the 
prophet first saw the tremendous beast, it 
had only ten horns, all of full growth. While 
he considered, or while he was considering 
the ton horns, behold, there came up among 
them another little horn. It seems that this 
horn gradually grew 7 greater and greafei*j 
till at length it eradicated three of the other 



152 Eleventh Horn. 

horns; or three horns were eradicated before 
it, to give it room to expand itself. And it 
became great, so that its "look was more 
atout than its fellows." 

The eleventh horn, then, represents a 
power, that sprang up gradually after thp 
ten kingdoms, into which the Roman empire 
was divided,had arrived at their full strength. 
We may be sure, then, that it was a power, 
which was manifested after the fall of the old 
Roman empire. A. D. 410. It was also a 
power, which came up among the ten king- 
doms, and existed with them for a time, dur- 
ing its infancy, till at length three of those 
kingdoms were overturned, to give it room. 
Whether it overturned these three kingdoms 
by its own strength, or whether it was only 
the occasion of their being overturned by 
some other power, does not appear from the 
vision; nor does it, I think, decidedly appear 
from the explanation, thoit is expressly said, 
"It shall subdue three kings." Persons are 
sometimes said to do those things, of which 
they are only the occasion. But other fea- 
tures of the eleventh horn are strikingly de- 
lineated by the pencil of prophecy, by which 
the likeness may be recognized by every can- 
did and attentive observer, without the dan- 
ger of mistake. Dan. 7:21— -26. "I be- 
held, and the same horn made war with the 
saints, and prevailed against them, until the 
Ancient of days came, and judgment was 
given to the saints of the most Highj and the 



Eleventh Horn. 153 

time came, that the saints possessed tlie 
kingdom. Thus he said, The fourth beast 
shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, 
which shall be diverse from all kingdoms, 
and shall devour the whole earth, and shall 
tread it down, and break it in pieces. And 
the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten 
kings* that shall arise; and another shall rise 
after them; and he shall be diverse from the 
first, and he shall snbdue three kings. And 
he shall speak great words against the most 
High, and shall wear out the saints of the most 
High, and think to change times and laws; 
and theif shall be given into his hand 9 UNTIL 
A TIME AND TIMES AND THE 
DIVIDING OF TIME. But the judgment 
shall sit, and they shall take away his domin- 
ion, and consume and destroy it unto the end. 
And the kingdom and dominion, and the 
greatness of the kingdom under the whole 
heaven, shall be given to the people of the 
saints of the most High, whose kingdom is 
an everlasting kingdom, and all dominions 
shall serve and obey him." 

What then is the power or kingdom sym- 
bolized by the eleventh horn? What great, 
peculiar and wonderful power has risen up 
since the fall of the old Roman empire? — 
has come up among the ten kingdoms into 
which that empire was divided? — has risen 
in a gradual and almost imperceptible man- 
ner, from small beginnings? What power has 
arisen, to give place to which three of those 
kingdoms, have been eradicated? W T hat 



154 Eleventh Horn. 

power has appeared, which in a peculiar 
sense might be said to have eyes like the 
eyes of a man, and a mouth speaking great 
things, even very great things? What power 
has had a look more stout than his fellows, 
or manifested a degree of pride, haughtiness, 
self-sufticiency, and self-exaltation, above 
every other? What power has spoken great 
words against the Most High? — and has 
thought to change times and laws? What 
power, with all the above characteristics, 
has made war with the saints, and has over- 
come them? Who lias worn out the saints of 
the Most High? — and into whose hand have 
they been given, until a time and times and 
the dividing of time? Surely a power with all 
these characteristics, may be easily known. 
There is one power, to which all these char- 
acteristics may undoubtedly be applied; and 
that is the Papacy, or papal power. It is 
probable, that not half of them can be ap- 
plied to any other power with the shadow of 
plausibility. 

That the eleventh horn was designed to 
symbolize the papal power, seems now to be 
placed beyond a reasonable doubt; at least in 
the view of those, who have read what Bish- 
op Newton and Mr. Faberhave written up- 
on the subject. Still however, a question 
may arise, whether that horn represents the 
Pope or succession of Popes the grand centre 
and organ of that power; or whether it re- 
presents the power itself, and if it repre- 
sents the power itself, or Papal kingdom, 



Eleventh Horn. 155 

whether it is the spiritual kingdom, or tem- 
poral kingdom, or both. It may not be very 
easy, nor very important, to decide these 
points with any considerable precision. It 
may not be amiss however to remark, that 
Mr. Faber is "rather inclined to think, that 
the little horn," that is the eleventh horn, 
"typifies, not the temporal, but the spiritual 
kingdom of the Pope, that tyrannical eccle- 
siastical domination, which at first was 
only a small and harmless kingdom, but 
which afterwards became a pretended cath- 
olic" or universal "empire symbolized in 
the Apocalypse by a two horned beast, rising 
up out of the earth or Roman empire, as the 
little horn rises up out of the ten-horned 
beast." 

I shall now endeavor to show briefly, and 
principally in the words of Mr. Faber, how 
the characteristics of the eleventh horn wiH, 
apply to the Papacy or Papal kingdom. 

"1. The eleventh* horn was not only to be 
a small kingdom at its first rise; but it was 
to be different from all the other horns. — 
Accordingly every one of the ten kingdoms 
founded by the northern nations, were terri- 
torial sovereignties; but the papal horn was 
a spiritual sovereignty. And afterwards, 
when it had acquired a secular principality 
by the fall of three of the ten temporal horns 

* In quoting from Mr. Faber, I have generally taken the 
liberty to substitute the word eleventh^ for little, -when cob 
irected with horn. 



1 JO Eleventh Horn. 

it still continued to differ essentially from 
them; being an ecclesiastical and spiritual, 
as well as a civil and temporal power. 

«2. The eleventh horn had eyes, like the 
eyes of a man. This particular, like the 
former, serves to show, that a spiritual, not 
a temporal, kingdom, was intended by the 
symbol. «By its eyes it was a seer; and by 
its mouth speakinggreat things and changing 
times and laws, it was a prophet — A seer, 
cpiscopos, is a bishop in the literal sense of 
the word: and this church claims the univer- 
sal bishopric/ * At its first rise indeed, it 
presumed not to make so bold a claim. Still 
nevertheless it was equally a seer, or a bishop, 
within its own proper diocese. 

"3. The eleventh horn had a mouth, speak- 
ing great things. In his pretended capacity 
of prophet and vicar of Christ, and in the 
plenitude of his usurped power, the Bishop 
of Rome has, at various times, anathema- 
tized all who dared to oppose him; has laid 
whole kingdoms under an interdict; has ex- 
communicated kings and emperors; and has 
absol ved their subjects from their allegiance. 

"4. The eleventh horn had a look more 
stout than his fellows. The Popes have 
claimed an unlimited superiority over other 
bishops, their equals in spiritual matters; 
and have affected greater authority than even 
sovereign princes in temporal matters. 
«Pope Paul the fourth/ says the historian of 

Q I. Newton, 



Eleventh Horn. 157 

the council of Trent 'never spake with am- 
bassadors, but lie thundered in their ears, 
that he was above all princes, that he would 
not that any of them should be too domes- 
tical with him, that he could exchange king- 
doms, that he was successor of him who had 
deposed kings and emperors, and did often 
repeat, that he had made Ireland a king- 
dom.' The popes indeed have pretended that 
the dominion of the whole earth belonged to 
them; and strictly acting upon this claim, 
they have gone so far as to divide all newly 
discovered countries between Spain and Por- 
tugal, assigning to the one the western, and 
to the other the eastern hemisphere. 

«5. The eleventh horn spake great words 
by the side of the most High, affecting an 
equality with God. So the Popes have not 
scrupled to lay claim to infallibility, an es- 
pecial attribute of God; and have sometimes 
blasphemously assumed even the name of 
God himself, and, as such, have impiously 
received divine honors. Accordingly, they 
are not offended at being styled, Our Lord 
God the Pope; another God upon earth; king of 
kings and lord of lords. Nor do they disap- 
prove of the impious flattery, which tells 
them, that the same is the dominion of God and 
the Pope; that the power of the Pope is greater 
than all created power, extending itself to 
things celestial, terrestrial and infernal; and 
that the Pope doeth whatsoever he listeth 9 
even things unlawful, and is more than God* 
14 



158 Eleventh Horn. 

Nor yet do they refuse, on the day of their 
election, to receive the adoration of the car- 
dinals on the very altar, and in the midst of 
the temple of the Lord of hosts. Tire other 
divine titles, by which that man of sin, the 
apostate bishop of Rome, suffers himself to 
be hailed, are Our most holy Lord; his divine 
Majesty; the victorious God and man in his 
see of Rome; the most great and excellent God; 
vice God; named God by the pions emperor 
Constantine 9 and adored as God by that empe- 
ror; the Lamb of God that taketh away the 
sins of the world; the most holy, who carrieth 
the most holy. Lord Lyttleton observes of 
the age of Henry II. that 'those times thought 
it no blasphemy to give to the Pope the hon- 
or of God. 5 

"6. The eleventh horn thought to change 
times and laws. So the Popes have perpet- 
ually changed the calendar by the canoniza- 
tion of new saints, and have departed from 
the original simplicity of the gospel, by the 
introduction of an infinite number of super- 
stitious laws and observances, 'instituting 
new modes of worship, imposing new arti- 
cles of faith, enjoining new rules of practice, 
and reversing at pleasure the laws both of 
God and man/ They have even dared to 
strike the second commandment out of the 
decalogue, because it so plainly reproved 
them for their multifarious idolatry. In 
short, 'the wisest and most impartial of the 
Roman Catholic writers, do not only ac- 
knowledge, but are even at pains to demon- 



Eleventh Horn. 159 

strate, that from the times of Lewis the Meek, 
who died in the year 840, the ancient rules 
of ecclesiastical government were gradually 
changed in Europe by the councils of the 
court of Rome, and new laws substituted in 
their place.' 

"7. The eleventh horn was to wear out the 
saints of the Most High, who were to be given 
into his hand by a formal grant of the secu- 
lar power,* during the space of three years 
and a half, or 1260 prophetic days; that is 
to say, during the same space of time, 
that the two apocalyptic witnesses were to 
prophesy in sackcloth, and the persecuted 
church was to be nourished in the wilder- 
ness. Accordingly, when the Pope was 
constituted Universal Bishop and Supreme 
head of the church, by the grant of th6 
tyrant Phocas, the saints were delivered 
into his hand, and placed under his control. 
They were no longer, as in the primitive 
church, subject, and that for conscience sake 
and for the real edification of their souls, to 
their respective diocesans; but they were now 
made the spiritual vassals of the man of sin, 
and were in consequence of it soon reduced 
by him to a state of worse than Egyptian 
bandage. By the instrumentality of the se- 
cular beast, he has already by far the greater 

* It is doubtful whether we are to understand from the 
prophecy that the saints were to he given into the hand of 
the eleventh horn by a formal grant of the secular power, 
or by the hajid of divine providence in some other way. 



160 Eleventh Horn. 

part of the predicted period, incessantly per 
secuted and worn out (so far as this present 
life is concerned) the faithful servants of God, 
who protested against his corruptions, and 
refused to partake of his idolatries. These 
persecutions indeed, like the more ancient 
persecutions of Paganism, have not always 
been universal; nor have they always raged 
with equal violence. They have moreover 
been greatly checked by the influence of tho 
Reformation, and, the consequent warring of 
the Papal power. Nevertheless the witnesses 
are still more or less prophesying in sackcloth; 
they are still throughout popish countries, in 
a degraded and humbled state; and in this 
state they will continue in one part or other 
of the world, to the end of the 42 months. 

"8. The eleventh horn was to subdue or de- 
press three out of the ten kings — or three of 
the first horns were to be eradicated before it. 
— As the three horns are to be sought for 
among the ten first horns, we must obviously 
learn what those ten first horns are, before 
we can inquire with any prospect of success 
for the three, which were to be eradicated be- 
fore the eleventh horn. The historian Ma- 
r hiavel, whom, I cannot but consider, as the 
best, because the most unprejudiced, judge of 
the manner, in which the Roman empire was 
divided, very undesignedly, and little thinking 
what he was doing, reckons up the ten pri- 
mary kingdoms, as follows; 1. The Ostro- 
goths in Mesia; 2. The Visigoths in Panno- 



Eleventh Horn. 161 

nia; 3, The Sueves and Alans in Gasgoigne 
and Spain; 4. The Vandals in Africa; 5. 
The Franks in France; 6. The Burgundians 
in Burgundy; 7. The Herulians and Thurin- 
giansin Italy; 8. The Saxons and Angles in 
Britain; 9. The Huns in Hungary; and 10. 
The Lombards, at first upon the Danube, af- 
terwards in Italy. The self-same catalogue 
is exhibited by that excellent chronologer, 
Bp. Lloyd — 

^These then, upon the concurring testi- 
monj of a historian and chronologer, are the 
ten kingdoms, into which the Roman empire 
was originally divided, and consequently they 
are the ten first horns, of which we are in 
quest. Hence, if three kingdoms were ever 
plucked before a little kingdom, which arose 
imperceptibly among the ten primary king- 
doms, they must be three, the names of whieh 
occur in the preceding list. Accordingly we 
shall find, that the kingdom of the Herulians, 
the kingdom of the Ostrogoths, and the king- 
dom of the Lombards, were successively erad- 
icated, before the little Papal horn, which at 
4ength became a temporal, no less than a 
spiritual power, at the expense of these three 
depressed primary states — 

u As for specifying what powers are now the 
ten horns, I cannot but consider it as absurd 
to attempt it. History has decidedly shown, 
that the kingdoms, into which the Roman em- 
pire was divided, never continued long in the 
same state; nor is it at all necessary for the 
*14 



162 Eleventh Horn. 

completion of the prophecy, that they should 
have done so — Still however the Komaii beas? 
is symbolically represented as having ten 
horns; because such was the original num- 
ber, into which the empire was divided."* 
Thus it is abundantly evident, that the Pa- 
pal power or kingdom, is symbolized by the 
eleventh horn. When, therefore, the saints 
shall have been delivered into the hand of 
the papal power for a time and times and t/te 
dividing of time, the judgment will sit upon 
that cruel, tyrannic and tremendous power; 
its dominion shall be taken away, and itself 
entirely consumed and destroyed.! Imme- 
diately the kingdom and dominion and the 
greatness of the kingdom under the whole 
heaven shall be given to the people of the 
saints of the Most High. The Millennium 
will commence, then, very soon after the ter- 
mination of the period, denoted by a time and 
times and the dividing of time. If then we 
can ascertain the length of this period, and 
time of its commencement, it will be easy to 
calculate the time of its termination, and thus 
to ascertain nearly, when the Millennium will 
commence. It is humbly hoped, that the 
length and commencement of this period may 
be ascertained with such evidence, as may 
appear plausible, to say the least. But in 
order to prepare the way for this, some other 
prophecies must be considered. 

* Faber on the 1260 years. Vol. 1, pp. 119—147. 
t Dan, 7:25,26. 



LECTURE IX. 

She first Apocalyptic Beast — The Dragon — - 
The second Apocalyptic Beast. 

Having attended, with some particularity, 
to the Roman beast of Daniel, and its eleventh 
horn, we are the better prepared to attend to 
other prophetic symbols, that may be sup- 
posed to represent the same powers. In the 
thirteenth chapter of Revelation, we find their 
pictures drawn in a manner so plain and 
striking, that surely no candid examiner 
can easily mistake the resemblance, or doubt 
what originals they are designed to repre- 
sent. Though it cannot be expected, that in 
so brief a discussion, I shall attempt to ex- 
plain every thing mentioned in this chapter, 
yet, for the sake of the connexion, it may be 
proper to insert the whole. "And I stood 
upon the sand of the sea, and saw a beast rise 
up out of the sea, having seven heads and ten 
horns, and upon his horns ten crowns, and 
upon his heads the name of blasphemy. And 
the beast, which I saw, was like unto a leop- 
ard, and his feet were as the feet of a bear, 
and his mouth as the mouth of a lion, and the 
dragon gave him his power, and his scat, and 
great authority. And I saw one of his heads 
as it were wounded to death; and his deadly 
wound was healed; and all the world wonder- 



164 Jpocalijjrtic Beasts. 

cd after the beast. And they worshipped the 
dragon, which gave power unto the beast, 
saying, Who is like the beast? who is able 
to make war with him? And there was given 
unto him a mouth speaking great things, and 
blasphemies; and power was given unto him 
to continue forty and two months. And he 
opened his mouth in blasphemy against God, 
to blaspheme his name and his tabernacle, and 
them that dwell in heaven. And it was given 
unto him to make war with the saints, and to 
overcome them; and power was given him 
over all kindreds and tongues and nations. 
And all that dwell upon the earth shall wor- 
ship him, whose names are not written in the 
book of life of the Lamb slain, from the 
foundation of the world. If any man have 
an ear, let Mm hear. He that leadeth into 
captivity, shall go into captivity; he that 
kiileth with the sword, must be killed with 
the sword. Here is the patience and the faith 
of the saints. 

And I beheld another beast, coming up out 
of the earth; and he had two horns like a 
lamb, and he spake, as a dragon. And he 
exerciseth all the power of the first beast be- 
fore him, and causeth the earth, and them 
which dwell therein, to worship the first 
beast, whose deadly wound was healed. And 
he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh 
fire come down from heaven on the earth in 
the sight of men, and deceiveth them that 
dwell on the earth by the means of those mira- 



First Apocalyptic Beast. 165 

cles, which he had power to do in the sight of the 
beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, 
That they should make an image to the beast, 
which had a wound by a sword and did live. 
And he had power to give life unto the image 
of the beast, that the image of the beast should 
both speak, and cause, that as many as would 
not worship the image of the beast should be 
killed. And he caused all, both small and 
great, rich and poor, free and bond, to re- 
ceive a mark in their right hand, or in their 
foreheads; and that no man might buy or 
sell, save he that had the mark, or the name 
of the beast, or the number of his name. 
Here is wisdom. Let him that hath under- 
standing count the number of the beast; for 
it is the number of a man; and his number is 
six hundred three score and six." 

The intelligent reader, tho he may never 
have thought particularly of the subject be- 
fore, has now probably been struck with the 
resemblance between the fourth beast of 
Daniel, and the first beast described in this 
chapter. They were alike in coming up out 
of the sea; each of them had ten horns, and 
each of them seemed too fierce and monstrous 
to be compared to any beast in nature. No 
doubt, they must have been designed to repre- 
sent one and the same power, tho they may 
symbolize that power in somewhat different 
respects. ^Daniel does not mention the seven 
heads of the beast, nor does he specially de- 
fine his formj he only observes, that he w r as 



166 First Apocalyptic Beast. 

dreadful, terrible, and strong exceedingly. But 
John amply supplies this deficiency, by in- 
forming us, that he had not only the ten 
horns, noticed by Daniel, but likewise! seven 
heads; and that his shape was compounded oi' 
all the three beasts, which preceded him, the 
Babylonian lion, the Medo-Persian bear, and 
the Macedonian leopard;" perhaps intimating 
that it had the fierceness, voraciousness, and 
cruelty , and all the othcr ; dreadful qualities to 
be found in any of these. "No doubt is to be 
made," says Bp. Newton, "that this beast 
was designed to represent the Roman empire; 
for thus far both ancients and moderns, Pap- 
ists and Protestants, are agreed. The only 
doubt and controversy is, whether it was 
Rome,Pagan or Christian, imperial or Papal." 
But that this beast was designed to represent 
a civil, and not an ecclesiastical, tyranny, 
may, I think, be established beyond a rea- 
sonable doubt. Being the same with Daniel's 
fourth beast, no doubt, like that, it represents 
the civil power. But this is not the principal 
argument. The first beast of Rev. 1 3: is un- 
questionably the same, that is described in 
Rev, 17: u So he carried me away in the spirit 
into the wilderness; and I saw a woman sit 
upon a scarlet-colored beast, full of names 
of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten 
horns. And the woman was arrayed in pur- 
ple and scarlet-color, and decked with gold, 
and precious stones, and pearls, having a 
golden cup in her hand, full of abomination 



First Apocalyptic Beast. 167 

and filthiness of her fornication. And upon 
her forehead was a name written MYSTERY, 
BABYLON THE GREAT, THE MOTH- 
ER OF HARLOTS AND ABOMINA- 
TIONS OF THE EARTH. And I saw 
the woman drunken with the blood of the 
saints, and with the blood of the martyrs of 
Jesus. And when I saw her, I wondered 
with great admiration. And the angel said 
unto me, Wherefore didst thou marvel? I 
will tell thee the mystery of the woman, and 
of the beast that carries her, which hath the 
seven Reads and ten horns. 9J Now as no 
candid person can possibly doubt, whether this 
mother of harlots and abominations of the 
earth, thus drunken with the blood of saints 
and martyrs, represents the ecclesiastical or 
Papal power of Rome; so it is manifest, that 
the beast, upon which she sat — the beast that 
carried her, must mean some other power. 
For surely the two symbols, so very different 
from each other, and so manifestly distinct, 
could not be designed to represent the same 
ecclesiastical power. The beast, then, must 
represent the civil power of Rome. 

The angel explains the seven heads of the 
beast to mean seven mountains; as Rome was 
built upon seven mountains or hills. The 
angel also intimates that the seven heads 
represent likewise seven kings; referring no 
doubt to the seven forms of the Roman gov- 
ernment. "The beast then" says Mr. Fa- 
ber, "is the secular Roman empire. His 



168 The Dragon, 



c5 c 



vSeven heads, (the last being his double, or 
septimo-octave head) are 1. Kings; 2. Con- 
suls; 3. Dictators; 4. Decemvirs; 5. Milita- 
ry Tribunes; 6. Augustan Emperors; 7,8. 
C3arlovingian Patricio-Emperors. And this, 
by the way, seems to furnish another conclu- 
sive argument, that the seven-headed, ten- 
horned beast was designed to represent the 
civil power, and not the ecclesiastical. 

But some suppose, that the civil power of 
Rome is represented by the dragon, men- 
tioned in Rev. 12:3. "And there appeared 
another wonder in heaven; and behold, a 
great red dragon, having seven heads and 
ten horns, and seven crowns upon his heads." 
But besides several passages, that seem to 
intimate, that the dragon is a power differ- 
ent from the civil power of Rome, we are 
assured in Rev, 20:2, that the dragon is the 
old serpent, the devil and Satan. 

As Satan had a great influence in raising 
up the Roman empire,and instigated the Ro- 
mans to commit the most abominable idola- 
tries and all kinds of wickedness, so in re- 
lation to his influence upon that people, he is 
symbolized by "a great red dragon, having 
seven heads and ten horns, and seven 
crowns upon his heads." All the Roman 
persecutions were the persecutions of Satan 
working in and by the Roman power. The 
dragon gave to the beast "his power and his 
seat, and great authority." People wor- 
shipped the dragon and the beast by submit- 



Two-homed Beast. 1G9 

ting to and applauding the abominable and 
blasphemous requisitions, which the dragon 
instigated the beast to make and enforce. 

But the two-horned beast is undoubtedly 
designed to symbolize the Roman ecclesias- 
tical power, or Papal hierarchy; the very 
same, as the eleventh horn of DaniePs fourth 
beast. With great probability Mr. Faber 
supposes, that the eleventh "horn and the 
two-horned beast represent the very same 
ecclesiastical power, the one symbolizing it 
at its first rise and describing it as after- 
wards having a look more stout than its fel- 
lows, and as influencing the actions of the 
whole ten-horned beast; the other symboliz- 
ing it, when it had grown up into a catholic 
empire, by having had the saints delivered 
into its hand." 

I shall add a short explanation of some of 
the principal characteristics of the second or 
two-horned beast, taken mostly from the 
writings of Mr. Faber, to whom I feel pecu- 
liarly indebted for the light, which he has 
afforded upon the prophecies, relating to the 
Ronton empire, the Papacy and Mahomet- 
ism. 

«1. The second beast sprung up out of the 
earth, and is described as being another beast 
perfectly distinct from the first. In the lan- 
guage of the Apocalypse, the earth denoted 
the Soman empire. 55 This presents another 
resemblance between the eleventh horn and 
the two-horned beast. As the eleventh horn 
15 



170 Two-kerned Beast. 

rose up out of the ten-horned beast, so the 
two-horned beast is represented as rising up 
out of that, which is another symbol of that 
which is symbolized by the ten-horned beast. 
Probably the reason, why the second beast 
Mas not represented as rising out of the first 
was the incongruity of one beast's rising out 
of another. As the second beast rose out of 
the Roman empire therefore, we must look 
to the Roman empire for the spiritual pow- 
er, which is symbolized by the second beast, 
"There accordingly we find the ecclesias- 
tical empire of the Pope. The sixth head of 
the temporal beast long claimed and exer- 
cised supremacy over the church. But in 
the year 606, the tyrant Phocas constituted 
Pope Boniface supreme head in spirituals, 
and bestowed upon him the title of Universal 
Bishop. In this year then the second beast, 
or the universal empire of the Pope, arose 
out of the earth. And it has ever been the 
policy of its ruler to separate it from the 
temporal empire, to keep it perfectly distinct 
as an empire within an empire 9 and never 
suffer it to lose its prophetic character of <an- 
other beast.' 

«2. He had two horns, like a lamb. As 
the secular beast is represented with seven 
heads and ten horns, so the ecclesiastical 
beast appears with only one head and two 
horns. Now since we have already seen, 
that the secular beast under his last head is 
the divided Roman empire under the line of 



Ttvo-horncd Beast. 171 

Carlovingian emperors; the ecclesiastical 
beast under his single head, who has co-ex- 
isted and co-operated with the secular beasfr, 
must necessarily be the corrupt church of 
Rome under the line of those pretended uni- 
versal bishops, the Popes. The Roman em- 
pire having existed under seven different 
constitutions is described by a beast with 
seven heads; but the Catholic church of 
Rome, never having existed under more 
than one form of government, namely the 
Papal, is therefore described by a beast with 
only one head. 

"This head, however, is furnished with 
two horns. In the language of symbols, 
horns are kingdoms; consequently the horns 
of an ecclesiastical beast must be ecclesias- 
tical kingdoms. Now I know not what idea 
we can annex to an ecclesiastical kingdom, 
subservient to the head of an ecclesiastical 
empire, except that of a regular organized 
body of ecclesiastics, subject primarily to 
their own immediate superior, and ultimate- 
ly to the head of the whole empire. If the 
church of Rome, then, be intended by the 
second beast, and the Pope by the head of 
that beast, it must comprehend two such ec- 
clesiastical kingdoms; that is, it must com- 
prehend two regularly organized bodies of 
ecclesiastics, distinct from each other, and 
subject primarily to their respective superi- 
ors, and ultimately to the Pope. — I am in- 
clined to think with Bp. Newton, that the 



172 Two-horned Beast* 

two horns are the Romish clergy regular 
and secular. The first of these classes com- 
prehends all the various monastic orders; 
the second comprehends the whole body of 
parochial clergy. These two classes, I con- 
ceive, to be the two ecclesiastical horns or 
kingdoms of the catholic empire of the Pope. 
In every particular they answer to thecharac- 
ter of horns, being two distinct regularly or- 
ganized bodies, subject to their own particu- 
lar superiors,and ultimately to the Pope, the 
head of the whole empire." 

From my great respect for Mr. Faber, 
I have quoted these observations concerning 
the two horns of the second beast. Honesty 
however requires me to say, that I have some 
doubt of their correctness. I am not satis- 
fied, that these two horns were designed to 
symbolize any particular kingdoms, or pow- 
ers, or governments, or orders of men, or 
any objects whatever. It is nothing unnatur- 
al, that a lamb should have two horns. Had 
there been any other number, I should have 
concluded without hesitation, that they were 
particularly symbolical; or if there had been 
any particular explanation or history given 
of either, or both of them, as of the principal 
parts of Nebuchadnezzar's image, I should 
have concluded that they were designed to 
represent some particular objects. I am 
rather inclined to think, that these horns do 
not represent any particular objects, any 
more than the mouth or feet of the first beast. 



Two-horned Beast. 173 

Tho the orders of the Papal clergy, men- 
tioned by Mr. Faber, are undoubtedly parts 
of the ecclesiastical beast, yet it is doubtful 
whether they are to be considered as any 
parts in particular. As the design of men- 
tioning the mouth and feet of the secular 
beast, was undoubtedly to characterize the 
beast, and not to symbolize any particular 
object, so it appears most probable, that the 
ecclesiastical beast is represented as having 
two horns, like a lamb, merely to character- 
ize that beast, and show that in some res- 
pect it was like a lamb. This idea also Mr. 
Faber includes in his explanation. "Now 
when we recollect that the second beast is 
styled a false prophet, Rev. 19:20, we can 
scarcely doubt, but that the symbol was so 
constructed in allusion to his spiritual char- 
acter. Accordingly the two ecclesiastical 
horns claimed to be the only servants of the 
Lamb of God, and affected to be like him in 
meekness and humility. Solemnly devoting 
themselves to a life of celibacy, and ever en- 
gaged in a round of religious ceremonies, 
they appeared to the deluded populace to be 
saints indeed, far removed from all the cares 
and vanities of this transitory world. And 
in order that this impression might not be 
too soon worn off, new saints were, at sea- 
sonable intervals, added to the calendar, and 
their names enrolled with those of the real 
servants of the Lamb, the holy apostles of 
the primitive church. Even the sovereign 



174 Two-homed Beast. 

pontiff himself, who had a look more stout 
than his fellows, delighted nevertheless to 
style himself with sanctified hypocrisy, the 
servant of the servants of God." I am dis- 
posed to think that the two horns like a lamb 
were designed to characterize the Papal 
beast, as a professed follower of the Lamb 
of God; and that whatever appearance of the 
Christian religion, or pretensiou to evan- 
gelical holiness, or to authority from Christ, 
have ever bmi discovered in the Papal king- 
dom, whether in the Popes, cardinals, arch- 
bishops, bishops, priests, monks, nuns, or 
other members of the Papal communion, are 
to be considered as symbolized by the two 
horns like a lamb, But if I could for a mo- 
ment suppose, that any particular part of the 
second beast was designed to represent any 
particular class or order of catholics, I 
should have no hesitation in concluding, 
that the head with the horns, was designed to 
represent the Pope, the pretended vicar of 
Christ, and head of the church universal. 

3. "But notwithstanding his lamb-like ap- 
pearance, hespakeas a dragon. The church 
of Rome, like a true child of that old serpent 
the devil, forcibly established and supported 
idolatry; claimed a proud superiority over 
all temporal dominion; advanced her inter- 
est with al! the wily cunning of the serpent; 
anathematized and persecuted to death the 
faithful servants of Christ; and esteemed 
vvery lye and every imposture, which advan- 



Two-homed Beast. 175 

ced her authority, a laudable awl even pious 
fraud. That no faith is to be kept with here- 
tics, is a well known maxim of this genuine 
offspring of the father of lyes. That kings 
excommunicated by the Pope, may be deposed 
and murdered by their subjects, is another of 
her maxims. That the end sanctifies the 
means, and that it is lawful to do evil that 
good may come, have been the avowed prin- 
ciples of the Jesuits," who have been the 
most zealous promoters of the Papal cause. 
Her dracontine cruelty and ferocity need no 
proof. Where Pagan Rome has slain her 
thousands, Papal Rome has slain her ten 
thousands. 'The fourth council of Lateran 
decreed, that all heretics should be delivered 
to the secular power to be extirpated — If a 
man had but spoken a light word against 
any of the constitutions of the church, he 
was seized by the bishop's officers. If any 
taught their children the Lord's prayer, the 
ten commandments, or the Apostles 5 creed, 
in the vulgar tongue, that was criminal 
enough to bring them to the stake, as it did 
six men and a woman at Coventry in the 
Passion week, 15 19!* 

'•Here it may be observed, that while the 
first or secular beast is represented as making 
war with the saints and overcoming them, it 
is no where said, that the second, or ecclesi- 
astical beast, and the image which he set up, 
should do more, than cause them to be killed* 
The above cited decree of the council of La* 



1 76 Two-homed Beast 

teran, shows how exact the prophecy has 
been in this particular. The eleventh horn 
lias always worn out the saints, by causing 
them to be killed, or delivering them over 
to the secular arm, not by literally slaying 
them itself. <Who can make any computa- 
tion/ says Bp. Newton, <or frame any 
conception, of the numbers of pious Chris- 
tians, who have fallen a sacrifice to the 
bigotry and cruelty of Rome? Mede has ob- 
served from good authorities, that in the 
Avar with the Waldenses and Albigenses, 
there perished of these poor creatures in 
France alone, a million. From the institu- 
tion of the Jesuits, to the year 1480, that is, 
in little more than thirty years, 900,000 or- 
thodox Christians were slain. In the Neth- 
erlands alone, the duke of Alva boasted, 
that within a few years he had dispatched to 
the amount of 36,000 souls, and those all by 
the hand of the common executioner. In the 
space of scarcely thirty years, the Inquisi- 
tion destroyed by various kinds of tortures 
150,000 Christians. Sanders himself con- 
fesses, that an innumerable multitude of 
Lollards and Sacramentarians were burnt, 
throughout all Europe; who yet, he says, 
were not put to death by the Pope and bish- 
ops, but by the civil magistrates; which 
perfectly agrees with this prophecy; for of 
the secular beast it is said, that he should 
make war with the saints, and overcome 
them. 5 



Two-homed Beast. 177 

u 4. He exerciaeth all the power of the 
first beast before him. Cardinals, prelates, 
and monks, were long the prime ministers 
of the European sovereigns. The names of 
Wolsey, Ximenes, Richlieu, and Mazarine, 
are handed down to posterity as the most 
intriguing and ambitious of statesmen. The 
second beast indeed is properly an ecclesias- 
tical person; but he intermixes himself much 
in civil affairs. He is the prime minister, 
mover, and adviser of the first beast. He 
holds an empire within an empire, claims a 
temporal authority, as well as spiritual; has 
not only the principal direction of temporal 
affairs, but often engages them in his ser- 
vice, and enforces his canons and decrees 
with the sword of the civil magistrate." The 
idea of the second beast's exercising all the 
power of the first, is strikingly represented 
in Rev. 17. One of the symbols is indeed 
different; but as the powers represented are 
certainly the same, the idea is no less clear- 
ly conveyed. The mother of harlots is rep- 
resented as riding upon the secular beast. 
As the rider directs the beast that bears 
him, and exercises the power of the beast 
according to his own pleasure; so the eccle- 
siastical Roman power is represented as ex- 
ercising and directing the civil power. < c In 
the former symbol Popery was described as 
the coadjutor and instigator of the temporal 
beast; in the present symbol it is represented 
in the plenitude of its power, riding trium- 



178 Two-homed Beast. 

phantly upon the neck of kings, and exalt- 
ing its authority far above those of its secu- 
lar colleague. 

u 5. He causeth the earth and all that 
dwell therein to worship the first beast, 
whose deadly wound was healed — Since it is 
impossible for the Roman empire to be lite- 
rally worshipped, the adoration here spoken 
of must mean a devotion to those principles, 
by which the empire was equally made a beast, 
both under its Pagan and its Papal empe- 
rors, both under its sixth head and its last. 
Those principles consisted in the worship of 
images and the persecution of the saints. It 
was the second beast who by his influence 
caused the whole Roman earth once more 
to adopt them under Popery, as it had here- 
tofore adopted them under Paganism, it was 
the second benst who made an image for the 
first, and caused all men to fall down and 
worship it. 

U G. He doeth great wonders, in order that 
he may make fire come down from heaven 
on the earth in the sight of men. 'Miracles, 
visions, and revelations, are the mighty 
boast of the church of Rome, the contrivan- 
ces of an artful cunning clergy, to impose 
upon an ignorant laity.' 

c <Nor has this claim to supernatural gifts 
been made solely during the thick darkness 
cf the middle ages. An anonymous Popish 
writer even of the last century insists upon 
the miraculous powers of the church of 



Two-horned Beast. 179 

Rome down to the then present time, and. 
enumerates many miracles, which he avers 
to have been performed, since the era of the 
Reformation. At the conclusion of his cata- 
logue of saints, endowed with such powers* 
he observes, that all the persons so conspic- 
uous for these supernatural gifts were zeal- 
ous members of the Catholic church; mean- 
ing doubtless to intimate, that if the Catholic 
church, (so the Papists think proper to de- 
nominate the church of Rome,) were not the 
only true church, its members would not 
have possessed those gifts. Here then we 
have another instance of the manner, in 
which the church of Rome proved itself 
to be the only true church, by lying won- 
ders. When that point was once establish- 
ed; when the strong faith of a determined 
Papist once admitted the reality of those 
miracles, and when once he drew from them 
the desired conclusion, that, since none but 
the true church could perform them, the 
church of Rome,whose members did perform 
them, must doubtless be the only true church. 
The rest would follow of course; no salvation, 
can be had out of the true church; therefore 
the church of Rome possesses an undoubted 
power to anathematize and excommunicate 
all heretics. 

"7. He deceiveth them that dwell on the 
earth, by means of those miracles, which 
he had power to do in the sight east, 

saying to them that dwell on the earth, that 



180 Two-horned Beast 

they should make an image for the beast, 
which had the wound by a sword, and did 
live. And he had power to give life unto the 
image of the beast, that the image of the 
beast should both speak, and cause tliat as 
many as would not worship the image of the 
beast should be killed." 

Mr. Faber has clearly proved, that by the 
image of the beast, we are not to understand 
the likeness of the beast, or an image resem- 
bling the beast; but an image belonging to 
the beast. "It is only natural therefore to 
suppose, that the making an image to the 
beast means making an image for the use 
and worship of the beast, and consequently, 
that the image of the beast imports, not the 
effigies of the beast, but the image,which the 
beast adored. 

"That such is the proper interpretation of 
the expression, will yet farther uppear, if we 
consider the context of the whole passage. 
It was by false miracles, that the ecclesiasti- 
cal beast induced the inhabitants of the 
earth to set up this image for the secular 
beast. Accordingly we are informed by Bp. 
Newton, that, 'miracles are thought so nec- 
essary and essential, that they are reckoned 
among the no-es of the Catholic church; and 
thev are alleged principally in support of 
purgatorv, prayers for the dead, the worship 
of saints t images, and relics, and the like (as 
ihey are called) Catholic doctrines. 5 One 
of the grand idols of the Romanists is the 



Two-Iiorned Beast. 181. 

Virgin Mary. 'They beg of her/ says Ju- 
rieu, in express terms, whatever is desired 
from God; heaven,pardon of sin,grace,repent- 
ance, victory of the devil. It is not enough 
to pray to the virgin; you must adore her. 
Every knee must bow to her, adoring her as 
sovereign queen of men and angels. And 
this adoration is not to be mere external ad- 
oration, but internal. — Those, who well per- 
form these services, tho never so negligent 
of their duty toward God, tho villains, rob- 
bers, debauchees, they cannot be damned, be- 
cause they have been clients of the virgin. 
This they prove by innumerable examples 
of those, whom the virgin hath by strange 
miracles brought back, as it were, from the 
gates of hell; because they hare been her vo- 
taries. And as an evidence how pleasing 
this adoration is to the virgin, she hath 
wrought more miracles within these last sev- 
en or eight hundred years, than God hath 
wrought since the creation, by Moses and 
the prophets, by Jesus Christ and his apos- 
tles, and by all the saints together. Her im- 
ages have spoken; they have sung; they have 
resisted the fire and the hammer; they have 
soared in the air, like birds: they have sweat 
blood; and oil and milk have run from them. 
Some of them have been turned into flesh; 
they have wept, lamented, groaned; they 
have made the lame to walk, the blind to see, 
the deaf to hear. They have cured jail kinds 
of diseases, and wrought all sorts of prorii- 
16 



182 Two-homed Beast. 

gies. For these reasons people will go to 
tiie end of the world to visit these conse- 
crated images. They kiss them, fall down 
before them, and render them an external 
worship, accompanied with a most fervent 
internal devotion. — That which we have dis- 
coursed concerning the virgin may be ap- 
plied to saints proportional)]}. There is no 
iblly or extravagance, that we have now 
related, but every order of monks say such 
like oft heir founder and author; the Cordeliers 
and Capuchins of their St. Francis; the Jac- 
opins, of their St. Dominic, and in general 
of all the pretended saints of their orders; 
they are more holy than seraphim; they 
raise the dead; they heal all diseases; the 
whole creation is subject to them.' Another 
of the. Popish idols is the consecrated wa- 
fer, or sacramental bread, the worship of 
which naturally followed the monstrous doc- 
trine of transubstantiation. This likewise 
has been honored by its own proper mira- 
cles, — The worship of images, which began 
very early to infect the church, and which 
was first openly established by Pope Boni- 
face the fourth in the year 607, was ultimate- 
ly confirmed by the second council of Nice 
in the year 787. 

"It is further said, that the second beast 
had power to give lite to the image, so that 
the image should speak, and cause the death 
of those who refused to worship it. We 
have already noticed some marvellous in- 



Two-homed Be-ast. 183 

stances of the speaking and moving statues 
of the virgin; and 1 doubt not but that they 
did appear to the deluded populace both to 
speak and move. The prophecy teaches us, 
that it was the ecclesiastical beast that en- 
abled them to perform these functions of ra- 
tional and animal life; and the ewent has 
proved the truth of the prediction. The 
ridiculous puppets, which were held forth as 
gods to the blind adoration of the secular 
beast, were so contrived with internal 
springs, as to be easily worked by a con- 
cealed operator; whose voice at proper inter- 
vals seemed to issue from the mouth of the 
miraculous image. At the Reformation, 
nothing tended so much to wean the people 
from their attachment to idolatrous super- 
stition, as the public exposure of these con- 
temptible tricks of the Popish ecclesiastics. 
"To these idols, thus impiously set up to 
be the gods of the Christian church, it may 
be said with truth, that no fewer human vic- 
tims have been immolated, than to the de- 
mons of Paganism. One special mark of 
heresy was a refusal to worship images; and 
that refusal, like the similar refusal of the 
primitive Christians to adore the idols of the 
Gentiles, never failed to subject the martyrs 
under Popery to the horrors of the most dread- 
ful of deaths. While every impunity and 
abomination, both in practice and doctrine 
was tolerated and sanctioned by the adulter- 
ous church of Rome; rhose holy and godly 



184 Two-homed BeasL 

men, whose sole crime was a determined re- 
jection of the poisoned cup of the mystic 
harlot, were inhumanly persecuted and tor- 
mented." 

It has been shown in what sense the image 
of the beast, supposing it to mean the images 
that the Papists invented for the Roman 
world to worship, was made to speak, and to 
cause them that would not worship it to be 
killed. There is no occasion therefore to 
suppose that the image of the beast was really 
some living power; as some have supposed it 
to be the Pope, the Carlovingian empire, &c. 
If the image of the beast had been designed to 
represent a real power, no doubt it must have 
been one enormously wicked, like the secular 
and ecclesiastical beast; and as upon this 
supposition it must have been firmly and in- 
timately leagued with them in working abom- 
ination, it must have received also of their 
plagues, and together with them have been 
cast into the burning lake. But we have no 
account of any punishment's being inflicted 
upon the image of the beast. ''And I saw 
the beast and the kings of the earth, and 
their armies, gathered together to make war 
against him that sat on the horse and against 
his army. And the beast was taken, and 
with him the false prophet, that wrought mi- 
racles before him, with which he deceived 
them that had received the mark of the beast 
and them that worshipped his image. These 
both were cast alive into a lake of fire burn- 



Two-homed Beast* 185 

ing with brimstone."* It is manifest from 
the connexion, that the false prophet here 
means the same as the two-horned beast. As 
nothing is said of punishing the image of the 
beast with them, we may conclude, that this 
image was incapable of either deserving or 
receiving punishment. 

Perhaps some may think, that in a book of 
symbols like the Revelation, idols would not 
be called an image. I must acknowledge, 
that this objection appeared so plausible, that 
it was with much hesitation that I adopted 
Mr. Faber's explanation of the image of the 
beast; and it was not till after repeated read- 
ings and very close consideration, that I was 
fully convinced of its correctness. More 
than once I despaired of ever feeling satisfied 
with regard to the import of this symbol, or 
supposed symbol. To receive light and sat- 
isfaction upon such a subject under such cir- 
cumstances, is like the day-spring to the be- 
nighted, bewildered, way-worn traveller. It 
is possible, that the considerations, which re- 
lieved my mind, may prove equally satisfac- 
tory to some, who may have been distressed 
with the same difficulty. These considera- 
tions have been partly stated in the preceding 
pages. It may be farther remarked, that the 
book of Revelation does not consist wholly of 
symbols; as might be shown by numerous ci- 
tations. Tho it may sometimes be very dif- 
ficult to determine whether Christ speaks 
plainly or by parable; yet it is not a difficulty^ 

#16 * Rev. 19:19,20, 



186 Two-horned Beast 

which is confined to this part of the bible. 
And not only in the scriptures, but in many 
human compositions it is often difficult to de- 
cide, whether the author meant to be under- 
stood figuratively or literally. And we must 
determine, whether an expression in Revela- 
tion is to be understood literally or symboli- 
cally, very much in the same manner, as we 
determine, with regard to expressions else- 
where, whether we are to understand them 
figuratively, or literally. The Revelation 
does not appear to differ in the nature of its 
language so widely from other compositions, 
as many imagine. The principal difference 
seems to be, that in the Revelation there is a 
greater abundance of figures, and those fig- 
ures are pufsued to a greater length. As 
some compensation however for the obscurity 
arising from the number and extent of the 
figures, they seem to be used with greater 
precision, than in almost any other composi- 
tion, except the kindred prophecies. But to 
return to the subject. The word image, as 
used in the phrase under consideration, ap- 
pears to be partly literal, and partly symbol- 
ical — literal, as it expresses something of 
the same kind — symbolical, as an individual 
is made to represent a multitude. If the 
beast had represented a great number of 
beasts, the case would be similar. There arc 
however in the Revelation and other parts of 
prophecy several cases very nearly or exact- 
ly similar. A king, is often made to repre- 
sent a kingdom; that is, one man is made to 



Two-horned Beast. 187 

represent a great number of men; the man of 
sin represents a succession of men; a day often 
stands for a year, and a woman for a church, 
or one human being for a great number of 
human beings. Thus every difficulty in the 
way of supposing the image of the btast to 
represent the idols worshipped by the beast 
and others, appears to be removed. 

Mr. Faber appears to have understanding 
to count the number of the beast; which he 
has probably done with more clearness and 
certainty, than any other man. From this, 
he most clearly demonstrates, that the first 
beast must mean the Roman empire. But as 
the discussion cannot be conveniently pre- 
sented to those, for whom these Lectures are 
principally designed, on account of its con- 
nexion with the Latin and Greek languages, 
1 shall not attempt an abridgment. 

"With regard to the mark of the least" 
says Mr. Faber, "1 think with Sir Isaac 
Newton, that it is the cross. This symbol 
has been abused by the Papists to the pur- 
poses both of the most infernal cruelties, and 
the most childish superstition. This was the 
very symbol, worn by all those, who at the 
instigation of the Pope undertook those dia- 
bolical expeditions against pretended here- 
tics, which were thence denominated cru- 
sades." I must confess, that I have some 
doubt whether Mr. Faber is correct in his 
explanation of the mark of the beast. 1 have 
no other to offer, however, as I have not yet 
been able to form an opinion upon the subject 



LECTURE X. 

The period of 1260 Days, or Fears. — The 
Time of the End. — The Commencement of 
the Millennium. 

Having gained some acquaintance with 
Daniel's fourth beast, and with the seven 
headed, ten-horned Apocalyptic beast, each of 
which represents the Roman empire; and also 
with the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth 
beast, and with the second Apocalyptic beast, 
both representing the Papacy or the ecclesi- 
astical kingdom of Rome, we are now in 
some measure prepared to attend to the fol- 
lowing inquiry, 

When did the period of A TIME AND 
TIMES AND THE DIVIDING OF 
TIME commence? It is said of the 
eleventh horn in Dan. 7:25. u He shall 
speak great words against the Most High, 
and shall wear out the saints of the Most 
High, and think to change times and laws; 
and they shall be given into his hand, until 
a time and times and the dividing of time." 
This time and times and the dividing of time, 
is the period, during which the saints of the 
Most High were to be in the hand of the 
eleventh horn, or, which is the same thing > 
in the hand of the second or two-horned 
beast; the period, during which this 4f eadful 



The 1260 Days. 189 

persecuting power should be engaged in 
wearing out the saints of the Most High. 
This then must be the period, in which the 
second beast was to "cause that as many as 
would not worship the image of the [first] 
beast should be killed;" and this, no doubt is 
the period, in which all the enormities and 
horrors of Papal persecution were to shock 
the world. When then did Papal persecu- 
tions begin? or rather, when were the saints 
of the Most High delivered into the hand of 
the Papal hierarchy, that that relentless and 
tremendous power might persecute them, 
and cause them to be killed, and wear them 
out from generation to generation? 

Bp. Newton supposes that this period 
commenced when the Pope was established 
as a temporal prince, in the eighth century. 
This excellent writer seems to suppose, that 
the Pope must be a temporal prince, or have 
the power of a temporal prince, in order to 
be capable of receiving the saints into his 
hand for the purpose mentioned in scripture. 
Now it is manifest, that, if the Papal power, 
should persecute and slay the saints directly 
and in his own name, he must be a temporal 
prince. But this is not the practice of the 
Papal power; noris it written in the scriptures 
of truth, that the eleventh horn,or the man of 
sin,or the two-horned beast,orthe false proph- 
et, should thus directly persecute and slay 
the saints of the Most High. Butthe eleventh 
horn was to have the saints delivered into 



190 The 1260 Days. 

his hand; he was to have great influence and 
power over them, of some kind, so that he 
could wear them out; and the two horned 
beast was to CAUSE them to be killed. 
But this does not imply, that he must have 
any degree of civil power, or authority. It 
must be incorrect, therefore, to conclude, 
that the saints were given into the hand of 
the Papacy in the eighth century, merely 
from the circumstance, that in that century 
the Pope, the head of the Papacy, became a 
temporal prince. As far as that circumstance 
is concerned, it might have been a thousand 
years before, or a thousand years after. But 
still it is manifest, that the Papacy must have 
great power of some kind in order to cause 
that the saints should be killed; and thus 
wear them out from age to age. And this 
power the Papacy had. The second beast 
exercised all the power of the first. This 
power he could direct and use, as he pleased. 
While the mystic Babylonian woman was 
ridingtriurnphantly upon the beast, she could 
turn and direct him whithersoever she would, 
and cause him to trample in the dust whomso- 
ever she pleased. Now the question is, not, 
When did the mother of harlots take the sword? 
for she is not represented as having a sword; 
but,When did she mount the tremendous and 
all-conquering beast? When did she prepare 
to ride forth in vengeance and fury, against 
those who refused to taste the poison of her 
golden cup, that she mi*jht tread them down t 



The 1£60 Bays. 19 1 

as the mire of the streets, by the iron hoofs 
of her faithful beast? Speaking of this event, 
Mr. Faber observes with great modesty, and 
I think with much probability, "It seems 
most probably to be the year, in which the 
Bishop of Rome was constituted supreme 
head of the church, with the proud title of 
Universal Bishop; for by such an act, the 
whole church, comprehending both good and 
bad, both the saints of the Most High, and 
those who were tainted with the Gentilism 
of the apostacy, considered individually,was 
formally given by the chief secular power, 
the head of the Roman empire, into the hand 
of the encroaching little (or eleventh) horn. 
This year was the year 606,when the reign- 
ing emperor Phocas, the representative of the 
sixth head of the beast, declared Pope Boni- 
face to be Universal Bishop. And the Ro- 
man church has ever since shown itself to be 
that little (or eleventh) horn, into whose 
hands the saints were then delivered, by 
styling itself with equal absurdity and pre- 
sumption the Catholic, or universal church. 
And now let us inquire, how long a period 
is denoted, by "a time and times and the di- 
viding of time. 97 There is no doubt, that 
primarily a time denotes a year; times, two 
years, and the dividing of time, half a year, 
making in the whole three years and a half. 
But the question is, whether this period is 
literally three years and a half, or a longer 
time? Altho the saints might be delivered in- 



192 The 1260 Days. 

to the hand of the eleventh horn in a short- 
er time than that, yet surely so short a 
time would not he sufficient for the horn 
to wear out the saints, it is manifest, that 
the eleventh horn, tho denominated little, 
from its being so small at first — yet it is 
manifest, that this horn was designed to rep- 
resent a great, extensive and mighty king- 
dom; and there is abundant reason from 
scripture to believe, that this kingdom was 
to wear out the saints during a great part 
of its existence. Surely then the period un- 
der consideration must be more than three 
years and a half. Now it is worthy of par- 
ticular notice, that in the symbolical repre- 
sentations of the prophecies, the symbols are 
generally made to represent objects vastly 
greater than themselves. Thus Daniel's four 
beasts are made to represent four great em- 
pires; the ten horns of the last, to represent 
ten kings, or kingdoms; and the eleventh 
horn , to represent a kingdom vastly greater, 
and more important, than either of the ten. 
A great number of other similar cases might 
he mentioned. Is it not reasonable to con- 
clude then, that the period, we are consider- 
ing, must be very much longer, than three 
years and a half? — nay, that it must be sev- 
eral hundred years? And we may be assured 
that it must be several hundred years from 
a consideration of the time, during which the 
saints have been persecuted, and worn out, 
hy the Papal power. There are certainly 
some instances, mentioned in the bible,where 



The 1260 Vays. 193 

a day is made to represent a year. Num. 
14:34. ''After the number of the days in 
which ye searched the land, even forty days 
each day for a year, shall ye bear your ini- 
quities, even forty years." Ezek. 4:4 — 6. 
a Lie thou also upon thy left side, and lay the 
iniquity of the house of Israel upon it; ac 
cording to the number of the days, that thou 
shalt lie upon it, thou shalt bear their ini- 
quity. For I have laid upon thee the years 
of their iniquity, according to the number of 
the days, three hundred and ninety days; so 
shalt thou bear the iniquity of the house of 
Israel. And when thou hast accomplished 
them, lie again on thy right side, and thou 
shalt bear the iniquity of the house of Judah 
forty days. I have appointed thee each day 
for a year." ( *We find that Daniels famous 
prophecy of 70 weeks has been proved by 
the event of our Lord's advent to mean 70 
weeks of years, or 490 years." When it was 
said to Nebuchadnezzar in Dan. 4:25. "They 
shall wet thee with the dew of heaven, and 
seven times shall pass over thee," these sev- 
en times no doubt mean seven literal years. 
But it is remarkable, that in this dream the 
tree waseyen greater than the person, whom 
it represented. We are not to think it 
strange, therefore, that the seven times 
should mean no more than seven years. From 
these considerations, it appears very evident, 
that the period under consideration consists 
of as many years as there are days 
17 " 



194 The 1260 Days. 

years and a half; allowing according to the 
ancient reckoning 360 days to a year. Ac- 
cording to this calculation the whole period 
is 1260 years. And this, 1 believe, is almost 
universally the opinion of those, who are 
qualified to judge upon the subject. Those, 
who are well acquainted with the prophecies 
often speak of the period of 1260 years, as 
tho it were a matter fully established, and 
generally known. Mr. Faber entitles one 
of his books u A Dissertation, &c. relative to 
the great period of 1260 years;" as tho it 
were generally known, what period is there- 
by designated. On the whole, the evidence 
appears so clear, as in my mind to preclude 
the shadow of a doubt. 

Having ascertained the commencement 
and length of the time and times and dividing 
of time, it is easy to calculate its termination. 
Beginning at the year 606, and reckoning 
downwards, 1260 years will give the year 
1866, as the termination of the period — the 
year of sweet release to the saints of the 
Most High, after a cruel bondage to the Pa- 
pal and imperial beast, of more than a thous- 
and years. 

The termination of this long and gloomy 
period, will be a grand jubilee to the Chris- 
tian world; an era more gloriously distin- 
guished than any other, from the ascension 
of Christ to the commencement of the Mil- 
lenial day. This era will be distinguished 
by other glorious events, besides the entire 



The 1260 Days. 195 

deliverance of the saints from the iron grasp 
of Romish tyranny. 

It is very remarkable, and to some it may 
appear wonderful, that a period of three 
years and a half is mentioned no less than 
seven times in the bible.* There is indeed 
some variety in the manner of expressing it, 
but in each place the period amounts to just 
1260 days, allowing 360 days to a year, or 
time, and 30 days to a month. And there 
is not the least reason to doubt that in each 
instance they are symbolical or prophetic 
days, representing 1260 years; and not only 
so, but that they are all designed to express 
one and the same period, commencing most 
probably in the year 606, and ending in the 
year 1866. The very circumstance of this 
period's being expressed in different words, 
and in several places, appears to be some 
evidence in favor of the conclusion, that in 
each case the same period is represented. 
Very great additional evidence might be de- 
rived from the circumstances in most or all 
the cases, where the period is mentioned. 
Some of this evidence, I hope to be able to 
bring to view, and also to show what are 
some of the great events, that are to take 
place at the conclusion of this period. 

The termination of the 1260 years will be 
distinguished not only by the deliverance of 
tho saints from the Papal and imperial beasts 

* See Dan. 7:25 and 12:7, Rev. 11:2,3. and 12:6,14. anil 
13:5. 



196 The 1260 Days. 

but also by the destruction of both those 
beasts. In Rev, 13:3 — 5. it is said of the 
imperial beast. "And I saw one of his heads 
as it were wounded to death, and his deadly 
wound was healed; and all the world won- 
dered after the beast. And they worshipped 
the dragon which gave power unto the beast, 
saying,\Vho is like unto the beast? who is able 
to make war with him? And there was given 
uuto him a mouth, speaking great things 
and blasphemies; and power was given unto 
him to continue forty and two months/' 

Tho the apostle saw the Roman beast with 
his seven heads standing together, yet it is 
manifest from the explanation of the angel 
in Rev. 17:10. that these heads should be 
successive. "And there are seven kings; 
five are fallen, one is, and the other is not 
yet come." 

The question now arises, Under what head 
was the beast existing, when brought upon 
the stage, as related in Rev. 13? It seems very 
manifest, from what is said of him, that he 
was existing under the head, that had been 
as it were wounded to death, «nd his deadly 
wound was healed; and he seems to be 
brought to view immediately after his deadly 
wound was healed, when the dragon in the 
profusion of his liberality had given him 
"his power and his seat and great authority." 
It appears then, that it was from the time 
that the deadly wound of one of his heads 
was healed, that the beast was to continue 
forty and two months, that is 1260 prophet- 



Tat 1£60 Days. 197 

ic days. Which then of the heads of the 
beast was wounded unto death? and when, 
and how, was it heaied of the deadly wound? 
There seems to be no doubt among commen- 
tators with regard to the head. It was un- 
doubtedly the sixth, or imperial head. How 
it was wounded and healed, is a point, upon 
which they are not so well agreed. 1 am 
decidedly of opinion with Mr. Faber, that 
the deadly wound was given about the time 
of Constantine's conversion to Christianity; 
and that the wound was given by the sword^ 
of the Spirit which is the word of God — 
the "sharp two edged sword," which John 
saw proceeding out of the mouth of Christ, 
when he first appeared to John in Patmos; 
and that the wound was healed, when the 
Roman power again rchpsed into idolatry 
and persecution. The sixth head commenc- 
ed in the person of Cesar Augustus, about 
thirty years before the birth of Christ. The 
Roman empire was then sunk in idolatry. 
About the middle of the first century, when 
Christianity had spread to a \qvy considera- 
ble extent, the Romans commenced the 
dreadful work of persecuting Christians. 
From that time persecution continued to rage 
for a considerable part of the time for 250 
years. But in attempting to extirpate Christi- 
anity,the Romans were fighting against God, 
and could not prevail. Christians became 
more and more numerous, and weredispersed 

* Rev. 13,14. 

#17 



198 The 1260 Days. 

throughout the Roman empire. At leu 
the emperor Constantine became a profess- 
ed disciple . of Jesus, and persecution and 
idolatry ceased. Then the old, idolatrous, 
persecuting Roman beast appeared to re- 
ceive a deadly wound in its sixth or imperial 
head. 

"A beast" says Mr. Faber, speaking of 
symbolical beasts, which prophecy exhibits, 
"A beast is a tyrannical, idolatrous empire. 
The life of a beast, therefore, or the vital 
principle whereby he is a beast, must ne- 
cessarily mean his tyranny and idolatry. 
Consequently the death of a beast, must 
be the very reverse of his life; that is to 
say, a beast is slain, not when a temporal 
empire is subverted, but when Ire ceases to 
be a beast, by abjuring his idolatry and ty- 
ranny. So again, as the death of a beast is 
his abjuration of tyranny and idolatry, the 
revival of a beast is his relapsing a second 
time into tyranny and idolatry. This being 
the case, the ten-horned beast received his 
deadly wound, and ceased to be, at the pe- 
riod, when Constantine embraced Christian- 
ity, and became the protector of the church; 
and his deadly wound was healed, and he 
began again to be, when Phocas set up a 
spiritual tyrant, to wear out the saints? and 
when the empire relapsed into idolatry — The 
five preceding heads simply fell, they died 
as it were natural deaths, and continued 
Pagan from their first rise to their fail. But 
the sixth head was io be slain. Like its five 



The 1260 Days, 19'9 

predecessors, it was to be Pagan at first, but 
not to continue so. It was to cease to exist 
as the head of a beast. — Not that all tempo- 
ral authority was to be annihilated through- 
out its dominions; but simply its life, or the 
principle whereby it was the head of a ty- 
rannical, idolatrous empire, was to be taken 
away. Yet notwithstanding its being thus 
slain, it was after a certain period to revive; 
its deadly wound was to be healed; the vital 
principle of beastiality, which was for a time 
extinct, was again to be infused into it; it was 
once more to become the living head of a 
beast, or an empire in direct opposition to 
the gospel; and all the world was to go a 
wondering after the new idolatry of the re- 
vived beast, as they had formerly wondered 
after his old Pagan idolatry. Accordingly 
we learn from history, that the Roman beast 
was slain, or ceased to be, under his sixth 
Hoed; that the empire continued, as a Chris- 
tian state,under the same sixth head; and that 
under the same sixth head likewise it revived, 
and once more came into existence, as a 
beast. In the year 313 then, when Constan- 
tine published his famous edict for the ad- 
vancement of Christianity, the beast was 
wounded to death in his sixth head: and in 
the year 606, when he delivered the saints 
into the hand of an idolatrous, spiritual ty- 
rant, his deadly wound was healed; he be- 
came a living anti-evangelical power, and 
he completely resumed ail his faiictfoi 9 
bis former Pagan character." 



200 The 1260 Days. 

Agreeably to this view of the subject, it 
seems, that the beast revived in his sixth 
head in the very year, and at the very mo- 
ment, when the saints of the Most High, 
were given into the hand of the eleventh 
horn, or Papal beast; and that the very act 
which thus delivered the saints, revived the 
beast. Hence it is obvious, that as the 
forty and two months, which the beast was to 
continue, began at the same moment, as the 
time and times and dividing of time, during 
which the saints were to be delivered into 
the hand of the eleventh horn, and as they are 
periods of the same length, they must end 
together; and they are really one and the 
same period. When therefore the saints are 
delivered, the beast will cease to continue; 
or it may seem more proper to say, that 
when the beast shall cease, the deliverance 
of the saints will be completed. It seems 
natural to conclude, therefore, that the saints 
will be delivered by the destruction of their 
dreadful enemy, the beast. And is not this 
agreeable to what is noted in the scriptures 
of truth? Does it not appear, that the beast is 
to be taken in the very act of warring 
against the saints? Nor shall he fall alone. 
His old friend, and partner in wickedness, 
with whom he had been so firmly leagued, 
and so zealously engaged in working abomi- 
nation, for so many ages, shall fall with him, 
Partakers in the same enormities, they shall 
drink together of the same cup of indignation 



The 1260 Days. 201 

and wrath. Behold then their awful doom, 
Jesus appeal's as a glorious conqueror. And 
he hath on his vesture and on his thigh, a 
name written, K£NG OF KINGS, AND 
LORD OF LORDS. The angel standing 
in the sun, cries with a loud voice* saying to 
all the fowls that fly in the midst of heaven, 
"Come and gather yourselves together unto 
the supper of the great God; that ye may 
eat the flesh of kings and tlie flesh of cap- 
tains, and the flesh of mighty men, and the 
flesh of horses, and of them that sit on them 
and the flesh of all men both free and bond, 
both small and great. And I saw the beast 
and the kings of the earth and their armies 
gathered together against him that sat on the 
horse, and against his army. And the beast 
was taken, and with him the false prophet, 
that wrought miracles before him, and with 
which he deceived them that had the mark of 
the beast and them that worshipped his 
image. These both were cast alive into a lake 
of fin burning with brimstone"* 

At the end of the 1260 years, the holy 
city shall cease to be trodden under foot by 
the Gentiles; the mystic witnesses will cease 
to prophesy in sackcloth; and the mystic 
woman will come up from the wilderness. I 
place these together for the sake of brevity, 
and because they appear to be intimately 
connected. We read of them in Rev. 1 l;l— C., 

*Rev. 19, 



202 The 1260 Bays. 

and 12:6,14. "And there was given me a 
reed, like unto a rod; and the angel stood 
saying, Rise and measure the temple of God, 
and the altar, and them that worship therein. 
But the court, which is without the temple, 
leave out and measure it not; for it is given 
unto the Gentiles; and the holy city shall 
they tread under foot forty and two months. 
And I will give power unto my two witnes- 
ses, and thev shall prophesy a thousand two 
hundred and threescore days, clothed in sack- 
cloth. And the woman fled into the wilder- 
ness, where she hath a place prepared of 
God, that they should feed her there a thou- 
sand two hundred and threescore days — And 
to the woman were given two wings of a 
great eagle, that she might fly into the wil- 
derness, into her place; where she is nour- 
ished for a time and times and half a time 
from the face of the serpent." 

There seems not the least reason to doubt, 
that the holy city will be trodden down, the 
witnesses will prophesy in sackcloth, and the 
woman will be nourished in the wilderness 
during one and the same period — a period of 
1260 prophetic days, or years. Even if we 
could not ascertain the meaning of these 
symbols, as it must he taken for granted, 
that they refer to important events, they 
might be sufficient to characterize the ter- 
mination of the 1260 days, or years, as an 
era peculiarly important. But it is confi- 
dently believed, that the meaning of these 



The 1260 Daijs. £03 

symbols is not entirely sealed from Chris- 
tians of the present generation. If some cir- 
cumstances relating to these symbols, have 
not yet been correctly explained, yet I can- 
not but think, that most of them have been 
explained with such a degree of clearness 
and force of evidence, as is suited to give 
great satisfaction to humble, candid inquir- 
ers, who delight to take fast hold of prophe- 
tic instruction. Particularly to discuss 
them here, however, would protractthis part 
of these Lectures to too great a length. A 
few observations must suffice. 

There seems no reason to doubt that the 
holy city in this passage means the visible 
church; that by its being trodden under foot 
of the Gentiles means, that it is infested and 
overwhelmed by false professors, who have a 
name that they live, while they are dead in 
trespasses and sins — who say they are Jews 
and are not, but do lye — who pretend that 
they are Israelites indeed, w hile they are in 
heart Gentiles and of the synagogue of 
Satan. We have only to look to Rome to 
see, that the holy city has long been trodden 
under foot by such pretended Jews, such 
lying Gentiles, who have really no lot nor 
part with the true Israel of God. 

But even in Rome, within the limits of the 
mystical Babylon, God has always reserved 
to himself some, who would not bow the 
knee to the harlot's idols, nor kiss her ima- 
ges. We arc not to suppose, however, that 



£04 The 1260 Daijs. 

they were ever reduced to so small a num- 
ber, as two; tho their number, no doubt, has 
been generally small, compared with the 
144,000, that were sealed at the Reforma- 
tion. The witnesses are represented as be- 
ing two, probably because, that is the least 
number which, according to scripture, is 
sufficient to prove a (act by testimony. «h\ 
the mouth of two or three witnesses shall 
every word be established " The two wit- 
nesses probably represented hundreds even 
in the darkest times of Papal delusion. 
These were God's witnesses. They often 
showed the wicked around them, that they 
had something to say on God's behalf. They 
testified against the abominations of the se- 
cular and ecclesiastical beast. No wonder, 
they should prophesy in sackcloth. But 
when the 1260 years shall be ended, the 
Lord's witnesses will arise, and put on their 
beautiful garments, and the days of their 
mourning shall be ended. 

The woman that fled into the wilderness 
undoubtedly represents the true church, and 
probably symbolizes the same persons, as 
the two "witnesses, considered in somewhat 
different respects. No doubt the dragon 
made use of the beast, and indeed of both 
beasts, as his instruments in persecuting the 
woman. But at the end of the 1260 years, 
when both beasts shall go into perdition, they 
will then be able to persecute the spouse of 
Christ no more. Leaning on her Beloved, 



The 1260 Bap. £05 

she will come up from the wilderness, she 
will leave the desert, and upon the height of 
Zion she will shout. "Alleluia, for the Lord 
God omnipotent reigneth." 

Mr. Faber is decidedly of opinion, that 
the Mahometan kingdom, or apostasy, was 
destined to continue exactly through this 
same period of 1260 years; that it commenc- 
ed in the year 606, and that it will end in 
the year 1866. If so it will add one more 
very important distinction to this period, and 
to the era of its termination. 1 have very 
little doubt that Mr. Faber is correct upon 
this point, as well as upon most otheivgreat 
points, relating to this wonderful period. 
His reasoning upon this subject, however, 
is too long and intricate, to admit of insert- 
ing even an outline in these Lectures. 

But however it may be with regard to 
Mahometan abominations, there is no doubt 
that the close of the 1260 years will be great- 
ly distinguished by the divine dealings with 
the Jews. When it was inquired how long 
it should be to the end of certain wonders, 
which Daniel had been inspired to foretel, 
the prophet "heard the man clothed in linen, 
which was upon the waters of the river, 
when he held up his right hand and his left 
hand unto heaven, and sware by him, that 
liveth forever and ever, that it shall be for 
a time, and times and an half; and when he 
shall have accomplished tosjeatter the power 
IS 



206 The 1260 Days. 

of the holy people, all these things shall he 
finished." 

There seems very little reason to doubt, 
that by the holy people here we are to un- 
derstand the Jews. At the end of the 1260 
years, God will have accomplished to scatter 
this people, or he will cease to scatter them; 
or begin to gather them; or they will be 
completely gathered, and no more be in a 
scattered state. At this distinguished era 
then, we may expect that God will begin to 
gather his ancient people in his church, and 
perhaps to bring them back to the land of 
theii* fathers, or that he will have completed 
this gathering and restoration. 

The termination of the 1260 years then 
will be an era scarcely less interesting tojthe 
Christian, than the commencement of the 
Millennium itself. And no doubt many pas* 
sages of scripture, that are often applied to 
the Millennium, were more particularly de- 
signed to apply to this era. Then, we have 
reason to believe, will commence what Mr. 
Medc calls the reign of the mountain in dis- 
tinction from the reign of the 8tov£, which 
commenced at the birth of Christ, or rather 
at the beginning of the gospel dispensation, 
when the vail of the temp'e was rent in 
twain. At the end of the 1260 years, the 
stone cut out of the mountain without hands, 
shall have fallen apov the image and broken 
it to pieces; and then the stone will be- 
gin to be a mountain, and continue increas- 



The 1260 Days, 207 

ing,till at the commencement of the Millenni- 
um, it will fill the world. At the end of the 
1260 years what is called the latter day glo- 
ry may be said to begin; at least in one very 
important sense, it may be said to begin. 
Then shall Zion arise, and shake off the 
dust and ashes, with which she was covered 
for 1260 years, she shall lay aside her sack- 
cloth, in which she prophesied through the 
same dismal period; she shall arise and shine; 
a happy degree of her light will be come, 
and in a great measure the glory of the Lord 
will be risen upon her; she will look forth 
as the morning — as the morning after a long 
and dreary night — she will "look forth as the 
morning, fair as the moon, clear as the sun, 
and terrible as an army wirh banners/ 5 As 
the church can never be terrible, except to 
her enemies, she can hardly be said to be 
terrible in the Millennium, when she will 
have no enemies to contend with. It is prob- 
able the church will be more terrible to her 
enemies from the end of the 1260 years to 
the beginning of the Millennium, than in any 
other period of her whole existence, in time 
or eternity. At the end of the 1260 days, 
the mountain of the Lord's house shall be es- 
tablished in the top of the mountains, and 
shall be exalted above the hills; many na- 
tions shall flow unto it; all other nations shall 
be flowing unto it; tho all nations shall not 
actually flow unto it, until the Millennium. 
In short, at the end of the 1260 years, a pe- 



2$ 8 The Time of the End. 

riod will commence, which for the sake of 
distinction at least, may be called THE 
TIME OF THK END, a period that will 
be really more bright and glorious, and de- 
sirable, than many have imagined even the 
Millennium will be. But the time of the end 
will not be the Millennium. Tho the impe- 
rial and ecclesiastical beast, or in other 
words, the beast and the false prophet^vill be 
gone into perdition; tho Papal superstition 
and idolatry will be no more; tho Mahometan 
delusion will probably be entirely eradicat- 
ed; tho the bible will be read in every 
tongue; tho many will have run to and 
fro, and knowledge will be greatly increas- 
ed; tho the vail that has been so long upon 
the heart of the Jews in reading the Old 
Testament, shall be in a great measure tak- 
en away, and great numbers or the whole 
of the stock of Israel shall be regrafted into 
their own olive; tho vast improvements will 
have been made in all the useful arts and 
sciences, still the Millennium will not have 
arrived. Tho great encroachments will 
have been made upon Satan's kingdom at the 
time of the end, that kingdom will not theri 
be destroyed; tho Satan will be much mord* 
limited in his operations, than before, yei 
lie will not be cast out. Tho war may not 
rage so extensively, it will not cease; nor 
will Satan, the great instigator to wars and 
fightings, be cast out from the earth, and 
confined to the bottomless pit, till the blessed 



The Time of the End. 209 

and glorious THOUSAND YEARS shall 
actually begin, 

We have seen, that probably the 1260 
years will terminate, and the time of the end 
commence, In the year 1866. The question 
now arises, How long will be the time cf the 
end? and when will the Millennium com- 
mence? Tho 1 would by no means feel con- 
fident with respect to a future period, upon 
which the torch of prophecy has hardly 
cast a single beam of light, yet 1 am inclin- 
ed to think, that the time of the end will be a 
period of 75 years, and that the Millennium 
will commence in tiie year 1941. 

It seems that a considerable length of time 
must elapse from the end of the 1260 years, 
to t!?e beginning of the Millennium. Very much 
rubbish, a great part of the sweepings of 
dark and filthy ages, will be to be clear- 
ed away. Tho at the end of 1260 years, the 
church will have the ascendancy, and no 
weapon formed against her shall prosper; yet 
considerable time must be necessary for her 
to put all her enemies under her feet. It is 
doubtful, whether at that era one quarter 
part of mankind will be real Christians. 
Grea<, very great things must be done there- 
fore during the time of the end, for the intro- 
duction of the Millennium. Surely a hundred 
years, nay two hundred years would be a 
very short period, for the accomplishment of 
all this. If it were not that the Lord has 
promised to hasten the glorious day, when a 
*18 



210 The Time of the End. 

little one shall become a thousand— when 
the people shall be all righteous, and shall 
inherit the land forever,* we might reasona- 
bly conclude that the time of the end would be 
a period of three or four hundred years. But 
he will hasten it, and probably he will hasten 
it faster and faster, as the day approaches 
nearer and nearer. Then the faithful heralds 
of salvation will not have to take up the bitter 
lamentation, that they have labored in vain, 
and spent their strength for nought — that 
year after year, they have stretched forth 
their hands to disobedient and gain-saying 
people. Houses of public worship will then 
be thronged; and congregations will seem to 
be all eye, all ear, all attention. The chil- 
dren of Zion will be increased by thousands 
and by millions. The earth will seem to 
bring forth in a day, and a nation to be born 
at once. In seventy five years therefore 
may be accomplished what might seem the 
work of hundreds. 

That the time of the end is to be a period 
of 75 years, is by no means a mere conjecture 
of mine. It is the decided opinion of Mr. 
Faber; which he mentions repeatedly in his 
work on the 1260 years. Speaking of the 
prophet Daniel, Mr. Faber observes "He 
teaches us that 75 years will elapse between 
the termination of the 1260 years, and the 
commencement of the time of blessedness, or 
the Millennium. Hence it seems most rea- 

°i3 60:21)83. 



The Time of the End. £11 

sonable to conclude, that these 75 years con- 
stitute what Daniel styles the end, or tht 
time of the end; as being that short portion 
of intermediate time, which cuts off and di- 
vides the great period of 1260 years, from 
the great period of the Millennium" The 
passages upon which this remark is ground- 
ed is Dan. 12:7,11,12. •• And i heard the man 
clothed in linen, which was upon the waters 
of the river when he held up his right 
hand and his lefc hand unto heaven, and 
swore by him that liveth forever, that it shall 
be (that is the end of wonders predicted)^?- 
a time, times* and an half; and when he shall 
have accomplished to sratter the power of the 
holy people, all these things shall be finished. 
— And from the time that the daily sacrifice 
shall be taken away, and the abomination 
that maketh desolate set up, there shall be a 
thousand two hundred and ninety days. 
Blessed is he that waiteth, and cometh to the 
thousand three hundred and five and thirty 
days." 5 Here are three periods mentioned. 
The first is the famous period of 1260 pro- 
phetic days, or years; the second is 1290; and 
the third 1335. We have seen, when the 
first period probably begins and terminates. 
This then may be considered as a period well 
known to those who are well acquainted with 
the prophe c i eg But the other two are no 
where else mentioned in thebible;and as there 
seems to be no ot j ier p om t of time intima- 
ted, from vvl.ich the commencement of either 



£12 The Time of the End. 

of them can be dated, we are necessitated to 
conclude, that they commenced with the first; 
and consequently that the second will close 
SO years after the first; and that the third will 
close 75 years after the first. The close of 
the second, no doubt, will mark some very 
important era. There is no doubt, that the 
third period will terminate at the commence- 
ment of the Millennium. "Blessed is hethat 
waiteth and cometh to the thousand three 
hundred and five and thirty days." If all 
must be blessed who arrive at that era, then 
surely that era will be in the Millennium; for 
as there is no true blessedness to the wick- 
ed, the time, when all shall be blessed, must 
be in that glorious period, that is predicted 
and p omised, when all shall know the Lord 
from the least unto the greatest. 

We may conclude therefore as the third 
period will end 75 years after the first, and 
as the Millennium will begin at the termin- 
ation of the third period, that the Millenni- 
um will commence 75 years after the close of 
the 1260 years; and that the duration of the 
time of the end will be 75 years. 

If, then, the 1260 years commenced in the 
year 606, they will terminate in the year 
1866; and if the opinion is correct, that the 
Millennium will commence 75 years after, 
then that glorious period will begin in the 
the year 1941. 



LECTURE XI. 

The Millennium more than a literal thousand 
years. — Argument from an expression in 
the Second Commandment. — The period be- 
tweeiithe comiiig of Christ and the Mitten* 
nium represented as comparatively nothing. 
— The waxing old of the earth and heav- 
ens. — The period between David and the 
Millennium short, compared with the Mil- 
lennium. — Meaning of the thousand years 
mentioned in Rev. 20: — The Millennium 
360,000 Fears. — Objections answered; So 
long a period inconceivable. — The earth 
must be overstocked with inhabitants.-** 
Nearness of the day of judgment* 

We come now to consider the Third gen- 
eral Inquiry, 

What will be the duration of the Millen- 
nium? 

To some, it may possibly appear like tri- 
fling to inquire the length of a thousand 
years. But the inquiry is really a serious 
one; and surely there is no more improprie- 
ty in inquiring what is the meaning of this 
phrase in such a book as the Revelation^ 
than to inquire what is meant by a locust, 
or a serpent. 

The first question, that naturally occurs 
respecting the thonsand years^ is whether 



214 Duration of the Millennium. 

they are literal or prophetic years? If they 
are understood as prophetic, it may be still 
asked, whether they represent a definite pe- 
riod, or one that is indefinite? and if a defin- 
ite period, what is its length? 

The first question is, Will the Millennium 
consist of a thousand literal years, or a thou- 
sand prophetic years? To me it is very evi- 
dent that the Millennial years are to be un- 
derstood as prophetic years, and that they 
represent a period vastly longer, than the 
literal meaning of the expression. 

I endeavored to show, in the first Lecture, 
that the bruising of the serpent's head by the 
Seed of the woman, implies that by far the 
greater part of the human race will be saved; 
Day that almostthe whole of mankind will be 
saved. But if almost all the human race are to 
be saved, when are they to be gathered into 
thofold of Christ? Surely not before the Mil- 
lennium. That long period of nearly 6000 
years could afford but u here and there atrav- 
eUer" in the strait and narrow way. Nor 
are the great majority of the human race, 
nor indeed any considerable part of man- 
kind, to be brought in, after the Millennium. 
The period between the Millennium and 
the end of the world, will be a little sea- 
son. It will be little, compared with the 
amount of all preceding periods; and no 
doubt, as it is mentioned in connexion with 
the Millennium, it will be short compared 
with that period; and if the Millennium is to 



Duration of the Millennium. 21 & 

be only a literal thousand years, the period 
after, cannot be supposed to be more than 
twenty or thirty years. Besides, during that 
little season, there will be a great declension 
in religion; Satan will be let loose to devour 
the nations, and a considerable part of man- 
kind will take up arms against the saints. 
We must look to the Millennium, then, for 
such a gathering of the people to Christ, as 
shall constitute the great majority of Adam's 
race. But granting (what I am very much 
disposed to grant) that all, who live and die 
during the Millennium, will be heirs of the 
kingdom and blessed indeed, can we sup- 
pose, that almost the whole of the human 
race will live in the course of a literal thou- 
sand years? It is indeed probable, that during 
one thousand of Millennial years, more peo- 
ple will live upon earth, than all that had 
lived before; but to suppose, as some have 
done, that they will be more than a thousand 
times as many, appears to he extravagant, 
not to say wild. I can by no means sup- 
pose, that a sufficient number will live in 
one thousand years to answer the prediction 
of bruising the serpent's head, I should 
therefore be constrained to believe, from this 
consideration alone, if there were nothing 
else, that the Millennium will be mere than 
1000 years. 

There is a remarkable passage in the sec- 
ond commandment, which seems clearly to 
show, that the Millennium will continue 



216 Duration of the Millennium. 

more than a thousand years. "For I the 
Lord thy God am a jealous God, visiting the 
iniquity of fathers upon children unto the 
third and fourth generation of them that hate 
me; and shewing mercy unto thousands of 
them that love me and keep my command- 
ments." By thousands here we are unques- 
tionably to understand thousands of gener- 
ations. To say that God will show mercy 
to thousands of people, would be saying very 
little comparatively, and surely, not the ten. 
thousand millionth part of the truth. But it 
seems very manifest from the connexion, 
that it refers to generations. And this is 
agreeable to the opinion of Poole, Orton, 
Scott, and Adam Clark. Upon this pas- 
sage Mr. Clarke strikingly remarks, "What 
a disproportion between the works of 
justice and mercy! justice works to the 
third or fourth, mercy to thousands of gen* 
erations." But if the Millennium is to con- 
tinue but 1000 years, all the generations of 
the world according to the usual method of 
computation, so far from amounting to 
thousands, will not amount to a quarter of 
one thousand. Perhaps some may object, 
that the word thousands here is meant to ex- 
press what is called a round number, and 
does not mean any definite number. But 
even allowing this to be the case, can we 
suppose thousands to mean less than £40? 
Suppose a general should say, that his ar- 
my consisted c>f thousands, what should we 



Duration of the Millennium. 217 

think to find the whole number of his men 
less than 240? There is no doubt, that the 
thousands here mentioned should be under- 
stood, as expressing an indefinite number; but 
we cannot suppose it to mean less than one 
thousand. Probably it means many thou- 
sands. Surely then the Millennium must be 
a period much longer than 1000 years. 

When the prophets speak of gospel-days, 
they often carry our views forward to the 
Millennium, without considering the inter- 
vening period. Thus Jacob prophesiej con- 
cerning Shiloh, "The sceptre shall not de- 
part from Judah, nor a lawgiver from be- 
tween his feet, till Shiloh come; and unto 
him shall the gathering of the people be." 
This seems to imply, as tho the people were 
to be gathered to Shiloh immediately after 
his coming. I will produce one more in- 
stance, as a specimen, from Is. 11: "And 
there shall come forth a rod out of the stem 
of Jesse, and a branch shall grow out of his 
roots." After giving some account of the 
qualifications of this righteous and glorious 
branch, the prophet goes on to describe the 
happiness of the Millennial state. "The 
wolf also shall dwell with the lamb, and the 
leopard shall lie down with the kid," &c. 
If the prophets thus pass over nearly 2000 
years, as unworthy of their notice, when 
about to speak of the Millennium, may wa 
19 



218 Duration of the Millennium. 

not conclude, that most probably that period 
will be more than 1000 years? 

The bible informs us, that the earth shall 
wax old like a garment; and of the heavens 
it is said, "They all shall wax old as doth a 
garment." Do the heavens or the earth be- 
gin to manifest any marks of decay? is there 
any reason to think, that the sun shines with 
less effulgence,than it did in the beginning of 
time? or that the planets run their races 
with less vigor, than when they were first 
launched from the hand of Omnipotence? 
And is the earth waxing old, and becoming 
unfit for use? So far from it, that it seems but 
just beginning to come into use. Scarcely 
the hundredth part of the earth lias yet been 
cultivated to such a degree as to deserve the 
name of culture. The earth was made to be 
inhabited. "He created it not in vain," 
says the prophet, "he formed it to be inhab- 
ited."* But by far the greater part of it has 
not yet been inhabited,' nor has the hundredth 
part of it yet been inhabited, as it may 
be — as it will be. And can we suppose, that 
ninety-nine hundredths of a planet, made on 
purpose to be inhabited, will be waste for 
6000 years, and then be inhabited only 1000 
years? n?y less than 1000? for the Millen- 
nium must commence some hundreds of 
years before the earth will be replenished. 
But the earth 13 not only to be inhabited,* but 
it is to be worn out by culture. Will it wear 

*Is. 45:18. 



Duration of the Millennium. £19 

out in 1000 years? China has already been 
cultivated for more than twice that period. 
The earth wear out in 1000 years! In that 
short period it will scarcely be subdued; at 
least some of the rough, rugged, rocky, or 
miry places, may be hardly conquered in 
that time. How many thousand years then 
must elapse, before the earth will wax old as 
a garment! 

We have seen in a former Lecture, that 
evil doers shall be cut off; but those that 
wait upon the Lord shall inherit the earth. 
"For yet a very little while, and the wicked 
shall not be; yea thou shalt diligently consi- 
der his place, and it shall not be; but the 
meek shall inherit the earth, and delight 
themselves in the abundance of peace. The 
righteous shall inherit the earth forever." 
There seems to be no solid ground for the 
opinion, that the latter part of this passage 
means, that the righteous shall inherit the 
land of heaven forever. The connexion 
shows it to be confined to the earth. It is the 
very same place, from which the wicked 
shall be exterminated. The word forever 
must be understood here, as in several other 
places, to mean a very great extent of time. 
Thus it is said, that "the earth abideth for- 
ever." There are other passages, which 
represent the triumphant reign of the saints 
on earth as beingforever. The stone, cut out 
of the mountain without hands, is to become 
a great mountain, and fill the earth, and last 



220 Duration of the Millennium. 

forever. Thus it is manifest, that the moun* 
tain is to last in the earth forever. The God 
of heaven will set up a kingdom, that shall 
not be destroyed; and the kingdom shall not 
be left to another people, and it shall stand 
forever. God says to Zion, "I will make thee 
an eternal excellency, a joy of many genera- 
tions. Thy sun shall no more go down; 
neither shall thy moon withdraw itself; for 
the Lord shall be thine everlasting light, and 
the days of thy mourning shall be ended. 
Thy people also shall be all righteous; they 
shall inherit the land forever — A little one 
shall become a thousand, and a small one a 
strong nation."* Surely no person can 
doubt, whether these passages are descrip- 
tive of the blessed state of the church during 
the Millennium; and this state is represent- 
ed as being forever — as being everlasting. 
Must we not conclude, then, that the Millen- 
nium, which is thus represented as everlast- 
ing, will be more than 1000 years? 

But the argument does not rest wholly, 
nor principally, upon the meaning of the 
vords forever and everlasting, thus simply 
considered; but considered in contrast with 
n little while. "Yet a little while" says 
David, "and the wicked shall not be." This 
does not mean merely that the wicked, who 
were then alive, would be removed from the 
earth in a little while. It was equally true, 
that the righteous, who were then upon 

•Is, *3:15,19— 22, 



Duration of the Millennium* £2,1 

earth* should be removed in a little while. 
But in a little while, there would be no wick- 
ed upon earth. His place should be diligent- 
ly considered, and not be.* The wicked 
should have no place on earth. But the 
meek were to inherit the earth, and delight 
themselves in the abundance of peace. This 
Utile while then was the whole lapse of ages, 
from the days of David to the Millennium, 
almost 3000 years. Compared with the 
Millennial period, 3000 years is to be consi* 
dered a little while. If in this reckoning 
then 3000 years is to be considered a little 
while, how long must be the period denoted 
by forever and everlasting? Surely it cannot 
be short of hundreds of thousands of years. 

And now let us go to the book of Revela- 
tion, where the Millennial period is particu- 
larly mentioned, and where alone it is men. 
tioned as being 10Q0 years; and see what 
farther light we can gain respecting its du- 
ration. 

In the first place it may be observed, that 
this wonderful book is in a great measure a 
book of symbols. This is intimated in the 
beginning of the book. "The Revelation of 
4fcsus Christ, which God gave unto him, to 
show unto his servants things, which must 
shortly come to pass; and he sent and signi- 
fied it by his angel unto his servant John." 
The revelation was signified, or made known 
by signs, or symbols. Accordingly, we find 

* Ps. 37:10, 
*19 



222 Bwatim'ef the Millennium. 

in this book an account of more symbolical 
representations, than in any other book in 
the bible. Almost every revelation contain- 
ed in this book, is more or less presented by 
symbols. Accordingly the highly favored 
apostle had a view of seven stars and seven 
golden candlesticks, which were particularly 
explained as symbols. Some of the other re- 
presentations, mentioned in this book, arc 
explained, as being symbols. It is worthy of 
observation, that the symbol is generally, 
and perhaps always, either really or appa- 
rently less than the object symbolized. Even 
the stars are apparently much less than the 
angels or pastors, that they represent. Both 
the true church, and the false church, are 
each represented by a woman. The Raman 
empire is represented by a beast, &c. 

Are we to suppose, that when time is men- 
tioned in such a book as this, it is to be un- 
derstood literally? Is it not much more rea- 
sonable to conclude, that, when any portion 
of time ifl mentioned, it is designed to re- 
present a much longer portion? Accordingly 
we have seen, that the period of 1260 days, 
which, with some variety of expression, 
mentioned five times in this book, undoub 
edly represents 1260 years. In almost all 
other instances, in which time is expressed 
in this symbolical book, it appears to be the 
opinion of most commentators, that much more 
than the literal import of the expressions 
Is signified. In the opinion of comnienta- 



Duration of the Millennium. 223 

tors in general there is one grand exception. 
It is the Millennial period, the thousand 
years we have heen considering — a period, 
which appears incomparably more important 
than any preceding. Is it not very aston- 
ishing, that commentators should apply the 
magnifying glass of symbolic representation 
to all the instances, in which time is mention- 
ed in the Revelation, except to this, which is 
most important of all? — nay far more im- 
portant than all the rest? If any of the peri- 
ods mentioned in Revelation is to be consid- 
ered an exception to the general rule, surely 
it should be any other, rather than this. Nay, 
if we were certain that every other expres- 
sion of time in the whole bible were to be un- 
derstood literally, yet surely the THOU- 
SAND YEARS must be understood as pro- 
phetic. 

The church is represented as being in the 
wilderness 1260 days. These undoubtedly 
mean 1260 years. The glorious and trium- 
phant state of the church on earth is predict- 
ed to last a thousand years. Can we sup- 
pose, that this period, which the prophets 
foresaw with such rapture, and foretold in 
such glowing and magnificent language — 
which they so labored to describe — can we 
suppose that this blessed period of a thousand 
years, is to be really shorter, than the wofui 
period of 1260 days? Can we suppose, that 
the period of mourning, lamentation, and wo, 
which the church must linger out in the wit- 



£24 Duration of the Millennium. 

derntss is really longer than the period of 
her rejoicing? Can we suppose, that when 
God speaks of the church's tribulation, he 
makes a year signify 360 years; but that in 
speaking of her triumph, a year is dwindled 
down in its signification, to mean no more 
than a literal year? Is this the manner of the 
Most High? Is this the manner of Him, who, 
while he visits the iniquities of fathers upon 
children unto the third and fourth generation 
of them that hate him, shows mercy unto 
thousands (of generations,) of them that love 
him, and keep his commandments? Is it the 
manner of the glorious Jehovah, whose na- 
ture and whose name is love? Does he thus 
magnify his indignation and wrath upon his 
dear people, and as it were diminish the ex- 
pressions of his goodness, his mercy, his 
grace? Is this the manner of him, who said 
to his afflicted people, "For a small moment 
have 1 forsaken thee; but with great mercies 
will I gather thee. In a little wrath I hid 
my face from thee for a moment; but with 
everlasting kindness will I have mercy on 
thee?" To oue who is jealous for the Lord 
God of hosts, is it not shocking to admit a 
thought so dishonorable? Surely, surely the 
language of the exceeding great and pre- 
cious promises, which God has made to his 
church, is to be interpreted in at least as 
great an extent, as wide a latitude, as the 
language, which expresses his displeasure 
and vengeance. If there were a difference 



Duration of the Millennium, 2£5 

in the expression of these things, it would be 
the other way; his promises must be under- 
stood in a larger sense, than his threatenings. 
His work of punishment, especially the pun- 
ishment of his dear people, is his strange 
work; but his works of love and mercy and 
grace and salvation, are most peculiarly, 
and most eminently his own: they are his 
unspeakable delight. The thousand years 
of the church's peace and glory on earth 
must be prophetic, or symbolic years, repre- 
senting a period vastly longer than their 
literal import. 

The question now arises, Will the Millen- 
nium be 360,000 years? Mr. Faber seems to 
take it for granted, that the Millennium is a 
definite period; that, if it is more than a lit- 
eral thousand years, it must be 360,000; 
tho he seems doubtful which it will prove to 
be. Others who are decided in favor of 
what may be called the long Millennium, sup- 
pose it will be a very long indefinite period, 
perhaps hundreds of thousands of years. 

That the Millennium must be very nearly 
360,000 years appears to be probable from 
what has been said; and I am inclined to 
think, it will be exactly that period. I be- 
lieve in every other instance mentioned in the 
bible, in which any portion of time represents 
a longer portion, a day is put for a year; 
except that the word day is often used to de- 
note a period of indefinite length. In those 
cases, however, the word day seems to be 



226 Duration of the Millennium* 

used as nearly synonymous with time. From 
the many scripture-examples, in which a 
day represents a year, does there not appear 
to be a very strong probability, that the 
Millennial years are to be so understood; 
and that that blessed period will continue 
360,000 years? 

But some may be ready to inquire, Why 
may we not expect the Millennium to con- 
tinue 365,000 years, if a day represents a 
year? This is indeed possible. But as the 
three years and a half are interpreted to 
mean 1260 days, which allows only 360 to a 
year. lam inclined to think, that the Mil- 
lennium will continue 360,000 natural years; 
or (what will amount to the same,) 365,250 
of 360 days each. <J 

To this long period however some may ue 
ready to object, as some have objected: 
"360,000 years! This is too much; it is too 
great; it is inconceivable!" Has not the great 
Jehovah given an answer to such objectors? 
"For my thoughts are not your thoughts, 
neither are your ways my ways, saith the 
Lord. For as the heavens are higher than 
the earth, so are my ways higher than your 
ways, and my thoughts than your thoughts.* 

1 know of but two objections of any plau- 
sibility, that have been offered against the 
long Millennium. In the first place it is said, 
that the earth will be overstocked with in- 
habitants. But we have seen, that in that 

* Is. 55:8,9. 



Duration of the Millennium. 227 

blessed period, the earth will bring forth 
by handfuls — in vast profusion. And who 
can calculate or anticipate the wonders, that 
Hiay yet be effected by chemistry. It is pos- 
sible that wholesome food may be manufac- 
tured in the greatest abundance from sub- 
stances that are now considered of very little 
value. God can easily feed his people with 
manna or quails, as he did the Israelites. 
But after all, the answer to this difficulty, 
which appears most satisfactory, is, that the 
Lord can provide. Does it not appear too 
much like limiting the Almighty, to make 
this objection? 1 am inclined to think it is a 
difficulty, which God has left, on purpose to 
try our faith; and surely, if our faith is a 
quarter as strong as Abraham's was, it will 
not be staggered with such .a difficulty as 
this. It is a difficulty, arising merely from 
our ignorance — a difficulty, which involves 
no contradiction, nor absurdity. Ignorance 
and unbelief are ready to ask, "Behold if 
the Lord would make w indows in heaven, 
might this thing heV'% But those, who are 
strong in faith, giving glory to God, can 
rejoice, that with God all things are possi- 
ble; that he will accomplish his purposes in 
the best manner, whatever difficulties may 
seem to forbid; they will patiently wait with 
the assurance, that what they know not now, 
they shall know hereafter. 

* 2 KiDgs 7:2> 



£28 Duration of the Millennium* 

It has also been objected, that the scrip* 
tures represent the day of judgment as near; 
which can hardly be consistent with the long 
Millennium. Such words as near, distant, 
great, small, &c. must be understood as mere- 
ly relative. From the days of Daniel to the 
accomplishment of some of his prophecies, 
the time was to be long; and yet it was not so 
long, as from the days of the apostles to the 
day of the general judgment, even if the 
Millennium is to be only a literal thousand 
years. If the bible does represent the day of 
judgment, as actually near, with what is the 
intervening time compared? If an event, 
which is nearly 3000 years distant, is con- 
sidered near, what event can be considered 
as remote? Surely not auy that took place 
before it, since the beginning of time; for 
3000 years cannot be considered a short pe- 
riod compared with 4000. But if we compare 
it with an event in eternity, or with eternity 
itself, even 360,000 years may be a short pe- 
riod; and the day of judgment may be con- 
sidered as near, tho the long Millennium is to 
intervene. 

As at death our accounts are to be sealed 
up to the day of judgment, there may be a 
kind of propriety in representing the judg- 
ment as near, on account of the nearness of 
death, as death may be considered in a cer- 
tain sense, as introducing us to judgment. 

But after all, I am not certain, that the 
bible docs, either directly or implicitly, rep- 



Duration of the Millennium. 229 

resent the day of judgment as near. There 
are passages, that represent the coming of 
Christ as near; but he is represented as com- 
ing, in other senses and at other times, be- 
sides his coming to judgment. I would glad- 
ly see it proved, if it can be proved, that the 
bible represents the day of judgment as near. 
Tho I would by no means speak confidently 
upon this point, yet I am inclined to think, 
. that all the passages of scripture, that repre- 
sent the coming of Christ as near, refer to 
some other coming, besides his coming to 
judge the world. 

The apostle Peter indeed represents Chris- 
tians as "looking for, and hasting unto, the 
coming of the day of God, wherein the heav- 
ens being on fire, shall be dissolved, and the 
elements shall melt with fervent heat. This 
probably means the day of judgment, or the 
end of the world, which will immediately pre- 
cede the day of judgment. It is not said, 
however^ that this day is near. Christians 
may be looking for, and hasting unto, a day 
that is very remote. 

On the whole, the more I think of the sub- 
ject, the more I am confirmed in the doctrine 
of the long Millennium; the mere confident I 
am, that it will be a period of 360,000 years. 
By no iueans, however, would I have any one 
receive my confidence as an argument sepa- 
rate from the reasons, on which it is founded. 
Search the scriptures for yourselves. There 
CO 



230 Duration of the Millennium* 

are many, which I have not adduced, which 
appear to furnish arguments to prove the 
point. Search them, for yourselves; cry af- 
ter knowledge, lift up your voice for under- 
standing, plead with the Father of lights, that 
you may be enabled to judge and know for 
yourselves. And let us all remember, that it 
is much more important that we should pos- 
sess the temper of the Millennarians — that 
we should exert ourselves to bring on the 
blessed day, than that we should know its 
duration.* 



* I was induced to believe in the long Millennium, by a 
sermon from the glowing pen of President Nott. To him 
I am indebted for some of the arguments adduced in this Lec- 
ture. But, as I have not the sermon at hand, and have 
not read it for several years, it is impossible for me to ac- 
knowledge my obligation more particularly. 



LECTURE XIL 

Importance, Methods and Means of attending 
to the Prophecies and the Signs of the 
Times. — The Duty and Importance of being 
supremely devoted to the Advancement of 
Christ's Kingdom. — Expostulation with 
such as are unwilling. 

Having considered what will be the state 
of the world during the Millennium; when 
it will commence, and how long it will con- 
tinue, the most important inquiry, at least as 
it respects ourselves, by far the most impor- 
tant inquiry, yet remains to be considered. 
It becomes us most seriously to inquire, What 
are these things to us? Are they designed 
as mere speculations to amuse curiosity? or 
are they addressed to conscience, with a most 
solemn commission to engage our hearts and 
hands? This leads us to the Fourth general 
Inquiry, 

What duties are inculcated by the subject 
of the Millennium? 

Are we not called upon, my brethren and 
friends, to examine this subject with more at- 
tention, than we have done; at least those of 
us, who have not made it our particular study 
before? My object in addressing you, has 
not been so much to instruct you directly, as 
to call your attention to the subject, that you 



232 Duties relating to the Millennium. 

may instruct yourselves. Even if I have 
been so happy as to communicate to you some 
degree of information upon one of the most 
noble and most interesting subjects that can 
possibly engage the attention of men or an- 
gels, you cannot expect long to retain what 
you have acquired, without attending farther 
to the subject by yourselves; but if you will 
faithfully improve the means, with which God 
has furnished you upon this subject, you may 
gain much more clear, thorough, extensive* 
and delightful views; you may increase your 
present stock of information upon this sub- 
ject, thirty, sixty, or a hundred fold. 

Let no one be discouraged from this pur- 
suit from an apprehension, that the prophe- 
cies and promises cannot be understood, till 
they are accomplished. The exceeding great 
and precious promises would scarcely have 
any preciousness, if we could not understand 
them. With regard to the promises, there is 
no doubt, that the greater part of them may 
be understood in a good degree, before their 
accomplishment. And tho some of the proph- 
ecies may be more difficult, it is my decided 
opinion, that the greater part of them, that 
have been accomplished, have been under- 
stood, before their accomplishment. Daniel 
understood the prophecies of Jeremiah re- 
specting the desolations of Jerusalem;-* and 
this knowledge seems to have been of vast 
importance, as it respected the welfare of 
Zion. Saints who were waiting for the con- 
* Dan. 9:2. 



Duties relating to the Millennium. 23a 

solation of Israel, about the time that Christ 
came, were no doubt induced thus to wait, 
from understanding something of the proph- 
ecies relating to his coming. With regard 
to some of the prophecies of Daniel, it is said, 
"Whoso readeth, let him understand." But 
some alas, at the present day would tell us, 
"Whoso readeth the unaccomplished proph- 
ecies, let him not attempt to understand." 
But if w r e cannot understand, why should we 
read? And yet concerning some of the most 
difficult prophecies, concerning the proph- 
ecies contained in the Revelation, it is said, 
"Blessed is he that readeth, and they that 
hear, the words of this prophecy, and keep 
those things which are written therein." 
What if great and good men have had very 
different and various opinions concerning the 
Millennium? What if many of their opinions 
must have been incorrect? Must we con- 
clude, that nothing can be known upon the 
subject? Might we not with equal propriety 
draw the same conclusion concerning almost 
every branch of study? Upon such a prin- 
ciple, we might sit down, fold up our hands, 
and indolently conclude, that the precept is 
unreasonable, which requires us to take fast 
hold of instruction. Let us remember, that 
"great men are not always Wise;" and that 
no one is infallible. The most learned and 
most accurate may make mistakes; and these 
mistakes may be discovered and corrected by 
persons comparatively ignorant and weak, 
*£0 



234 Duties relating to the Millennium. 

It is not impossible, that a child may discover 
the meaning of some prophetic passage, that 
had eluded the scrutiny of both the Ncwtons. 
Tho some parts of the scriptures are hard to 
be understood, especially some parts of the 
prophetic scriptures, let us not be discourag- 
ed. They are designed to exercise our spirit- 
ual senses,* to improve our faculties, to trv 
our patience, to try our faith. If the task be 
arduous, let us apply ourselves to it with so 
much more resolution and assiduity. No 
doubt the great reason, why most Christians- 
are so ignorant of the prophecies, is because 
they have made so little exertions to know 
them. 

Let us then study the scriptures diligently, 
prayerfully and daily, and endeavor to learn 
what the Lord has promised and predicted, 
concerning that great and blessed period, when 
the earth shall be full of the knowledge and 
glory of God. 

Various methods may be pursued to gain 
a knowledge of the prophetic scriptures; and 
that method, which is best for one,may not be 
best for all. To study the scriptures with 
advantage, however, in any method, in order 
to become acquainted with the doctrines, 
precepts, promises, threatenings, or predic- 
tions of the bible, it is vastly important, not 
to say indispensable, that we should be well 
acquainted with the history, which the bible 
contains, More than half of both the Old 

* Heh 5:14 



Miiiies relating to the Millennium. 2§5* 

Testament and the New, is history- and the 
other parts of the bible are so interwoven and 
connected with the historical parts, that it 
seems impossible to gain much acquaintance 
with the former, without considerable knowl- 
edge of the latter. In the second place, in 
order to understand any difficult part of the 
scriptures, or any other writings, it is im- 
portant to ascertain, as far as possible, the 
design and general scope of the writer; and 
also to consider the immediate and remote 
connexions of the passage. A familiar ac- 
quaintance with scripture history, and par- 
ticular attention to connexion, will undoubt- 
edly afford a person more assistance in un- 
derstanding difficult passages, than a knowl- 
edge of all the learned languages. In order 
to gain a knowledge of the prophetic scrip- 
tures, it may be of great use to attend particu- 
larly to the symbols, that are mentioned in 
the various parts of the bible; especially to 
those symbols or signs, that are more or less 
particularly explained by the pen of inspira- 
tion; such as Abraham's horror of great dark- 
ness, Joseph's dreams, and others, that he 
interpreted, the burning bush, &c. &c. 
Abundance of these may be found in the his- 
torical writings of the prophets and evange- 
lists. If I do not greatly mistake, the most 
striking and important parts of these symbol- 
ical representations are particularly signifi- 
cant, while circumstances less striking and 
important are sometimes mentioned, merely 



236 Duties relating to the Millennium, 

to complete the picture without any particular 
typical import. No doubt persons have often 
wearied themselves in attempting to conjec- 
ture the spiritual meaning of certain parts of 
parables, which really have no spiritual 
meaning; while others have fallen into the 
more dangerous extreme of concluding, that 
a symbolical representation had no particular 
meaning, because they could not immediately 
discover it; or because great and good men 
have had very different opinions of its mean- 
ing. A great number of the sacred symbols, 
God has been pleased most clearly and most 
fully to explain; and this he has undoubtedly 
done, to give us some idea of the import of 
symbolic language, and to enable us to under- 
stand those, that are not divinely explained. 
To ascertain the meaning of the unexplained 
symbols, we should proceed with care and 
caution, with patience and prayerfulness, with 
fear and trembling; we should suppress the 
sallies of the imagination and of passion, and 
let every thing be decided by reason, enlight- 
ened and guided by scripture. 

If we would understand the difficult proph- 
ecies, we should pay particular attention to 
those which are easy. Some prophecies are 
easy in consequence of the plain and easy lan- 
guage, in which they are expressed; some are 
rendered easy by their fulfilment; and others 
by the explanation, which God has given of 
them. After we are well acquainted with 



JBuiies relating to the Millennium 237 

those that are easy, we are prepared to inves- 
tigate such as are more difficult. If inter- 
preters of prophecy had proceeded as gradu- 
ally and as cautiously from things easy and 
well known, to such as are unknown and dif- 
ficult, as the interpreters of nature have done, 
the science of the prophecies would probably 
be considered equal in point of clearness, 
certainty, and extent, to the science of natu- 
ral philosophy. And there is no doubt, but 
that most Christians in the common walks of 
life, might gain a very respectable acquaint- 
ance with the prophecies, without neglecting 
any duty, if their attention could be properly 
directed. Within one hundred years, it is 
probable, that the study of prophecy will be 
considered a branch of common education, 
no less than the study of arithmetic. 

A distinguished writer has observed, "A 
distinct general view, or outline, of all the 
essential parts of the study in which they are 
engaged; a gradual and judicious supply of 
this outline; and a due arrangement of the 
divisions, according to their natural order 
and connexion, appear to be among the best 
means of enlightening the minds of youth, 
and of facilitating their acquisition of knowl- 
edge." This remark may be of great use 
in studying the prophecies. The outline, 
which I have attempted to draw in the pre- 
ceding Lectures, imperfect as it is, may per- 
haps be feuud useful to the youthful student. 



£33 Duties relating to the Millennium. 

One of the best methods of ascertaining 
what information God has given us relating 
to the Millennium, may be to read the bible 
through with a particular view to this object, 
to note in a book made for the purpose, under 
distinct, appropriate heads, the chapter 
and verse of every passage, that appears 
to relate to the subject, and then consult the 
passages referred to under each head, with a 
particular attention to their connexion. 
Many passages will be found, which I have 
not had room to mention in so small a work. 
Great advantage may be derived from con- 
sulting Scott's Commentary upon such pas- 
sages, as may appear obscure. Those, who 
have a sufficient acquaintance with history, 
may gain much light and satisfaction from 
the writings of Bp. Newton and Mr. Faber. 
I would not be understood however as inti- 
mating, that I consider these writers correct 
in all their opinions. In some points they 
have undoubtedly failed; and whether Mr. 
Faber is correct in supposing Antichrist to 
he a power different from the man of sin, I 
have not yet been able to form a decided 
opinion; tho I fear he is wrong. 

But, my brethren and friends, we have 
something else to do in relation to this sub- 
ject, besides attending to the prophecies. Are 
we not called upon, with a voice equally loud 
and clear, to attend to the signs of the times? 
It is only some of the most prominent and 
important of these, that we have been able to 



Duties relating to the Millennium. £39 

consider, in these Lectures; and these we 
have noticed in a very cursory and imperfect 
manner. If it is interesting, laudable and 
important, for the statesman and merchant 
to observe and consider the signs of the 
times in relation to the kingdoms of this 
world, how much more interesting, im- 
portant and laudable, must it be for those 
who are waiting for the consolation of Israel, 
to consider the signs of the times, as they 
relate to the kingdom of heaven. With what 
solemn, tender and trembling solicitude, did 
we watch the signs of the times, during the 
late war. How did our hearts exult, when 
we could discover the least tokens of an 
honorable and testing peace. And shall we 
not be equally solicitous with regard to every 
indication of that blessed period, when war 
shall entirely cease; when we shall be en- 
tirely free from the dismal apprehension — 
when the art of war shall be unstudied and 
unknown! and not only when war shall 
cease, but when those dreadful lusts and pas- 
sions, whence wars and fightings proceed, 
shall be, not merely restrained, but almost 
entirely extirpated; and when the cessation 
of war shall be only a part, and compara- 
tively a small part, of the blessings, that 
shall constitute the blessedness, which God 
has promised, If we could feci indifferent to 
the signs of such a time — of such a period, 
would it not seem enough to make the stones 
cry out, and the beasts of the field rise up i/i 
judgment against us? 



£40 Duties relating to the Millennium* 

But how shall we gain a knowledge of 
these important signs? In reply to this ques- 
tion, I shall make a few remarks. It was 
observed in a former Lecture, that in order 
to have a clear view of the wonders of the 
present age, we must have some acquaintance 
with former ages — we must know something 
of history. For this purpose, you will per- 
mit me to recommend to you three books, 
which I consider better than any other. In 
the first place, 1 would recommend the bible, 
which is incomparably the best book, that 
ever was written, not only upon doctrines 
and duties, but also upon history. By this 
book we are led back to the foundation of the 
world, and into the abyss of eternity — to the 
eternal purposes of Him, who worketh all 
things after the counsel of his own will. In 
this book the history is ali true and impartial; 
the facts are selected and arranged by infinite 
wisdom; and so related, ae strikingly to show 
their importance, and connexion with the 
kingdom of God. Next to the bible. I would 
recommend Edwards's History of Redemp- 
tion. It is probable that no man uninspired 
ever wrote a more valuable book upon the 
subject of history than this. To gain la clear 
idea of the signs of the times, however, some- 
thing more is necessary. 1 very much regret, 
that after making diligent search for several 
years, I have been unable to find a compend 
of history, that I can in all respects recom- 
mend. Perhaps no book is more needed for 



Duties relating to the Millennium. 241 

the benefit of the rising generation, than a 
well-written work of this kind. Whelpley *s 
Compend of History, tho in some respects 
very imperfect, is probably the best work of 
the kind, that has yet appeared. It unites 
two grand excellencies, which I have not 
found in any other. It is in general very in- 
teresting, and in a good degree serious. 
With regard to the present state of the world, 
I know of no book, to which I can refer the 
young reader for complete information. 
Horn, Staughton, Lord and Brown have 
published books upon missions, which may 
doubtless be read or consulted with advan- 
tage. But missions constitute but a single 
feature of the present age. Much valuable 
information upon the present state of the 
world, with regard to religion, may be col- 
lected from the Christian Observer and Pan- 
oplist. A work that has been more partic- 
ularly devoted to this object, and is still de- 
Toted to it, from week to week, is the Boston 
Recorder. It is probable, that no where else 
in so short a compass, shall we find so much 
information, upon this subject, as in this ex- 
cellent paper. Next to a good compend of 
History, a well written volume of a moderate 
size and price, upon the happy and distin- 
guishing characteristics of the present age, 
appears to be most desirable. 

A private weekly meeting, held by a se- 
lect number of friends either male or female, 
for the purpose of reading select portions of 
21 



£*42 Duties relating to the Millennium. 

religious intelligence, from the Panoplist or 
Recorder, and conversing together upon the 
wonderful works of grace and mercy, that 
God is now accomplishing in tke world, may 
be attended with great advantage; especial- 
ly if such meetings are introduced and con- 
cluded with fervent effectual prayer. The 
advantage of such meetings, however, will 
depend very much upon the temper and abil- 
ity with which they are conducted. There 
is reason to fear, that social reading is some- 
times almost useless, in consequence of the 
very imperfect manner, in which it is per- 
formed. As very few are capable of read- 
ing to others, with even tolerable propriety, 
what they have not read before, it may be 
advisable for those who read in these meet- 
ings, to devote a little time to prepare them- 
selves to perform this important exercise 
in the best possible manner. If those, who 
take the lead in these meetings,are sufficient- 
ly qualified, their usefulness may be greatly 
increased by having them open for the at- 
tendance of all who may be disposed. The 
monthly concert for prayer, is in some 
places conducted in a manner very^imilar 
to what has now been described. It seems 
exceedingly desirable, that such meetings 
should be attended as often as once a week, 
at least, till those, who attend them, gain a 
good general acquaintance with the signs of 
the times, 



Duties relating to the Millennium. £43 



l £> 



But the subject of the Millennium calls 
for something more than merely exertions to 
gain information respecting the signs of the 
times, and the duties they involve. The 
great end and use of knowledge, is action. 
If this knowledge does not excite us to be 
up and doing for the advancement of Christ's 
kingdom, we may as well be without it. 
Nay, to us it will be worse than in vain; 
"For to him that knoweth to do good, and 
doeth it not, to him it is sin/ 5 If the word 
and providence of God are unitedly pro- 
claiming, "Behold the Bridegroom cometh," 
surely we are bound, not only to attend to 
the call, but to use our utmost exertions to 
prepare for his reception, and to bring him 
on his way. If proclamation were made, 
that our much respected chief magistrate 
was on his way to visit us, would it not in- 
stantly excite a deep and lively attention? 
And should we not, in such a case, feel dis- 
posed to make preparation to give him a re- 
ception, corresponding to the dignity and 
importance of his character and office? Shall 
we not then exert ourselves to honor Him, 
who is Head over all things to the church; 
the King of Zion, and the Lord of lords? 
Shall we not exert ourselves to hasten his 
approach? 

But what is to be done? and what can we 
do for the promotion of an object, so great, 
so glorious, and so desirable? Much; there 
is much to be done, and my brethren and 



244 Duties relating to the Millennhitn. 

friends, there is much for us to do. The 
glorious Millennial period is to be introduc- 
ed by means. Even if the age of miracles 
should return, and they should become as 
common, as in the days of the apostles, we 
may be assured, that means will not be su- 
perseded. They were very far from being 
superseded then. Never were the servants of 
Christ more laborious in spreading the gos- 
pel. But there seems no reason for expect- 
ing, that the age of miracles will return, or 
that any thing miraculous will take place to 
introduce the Millennium, except the de- 
struction of vast multitudes of the wicked, 
immediately before that day, and perhaps 
some other things which may be very inti- 
mately connected vvith that destruction. 
Christ will then tread the wine press of his 
wrath alone, and of the people there shall be 
none with him.* The wonderful and amaz- 
ing events that will introduce the Millenni- 
um will be principally effected by human in- 
strumentality. Behold the stupendous 
wheels of divine providence already in mo- 
tion, the wheels within wheels, urged for- 
ward by the hand of omnipotence, and roll- 
ing forward to the blessed consummation. 
Tho the Spirit of God must move the wheels, 
yet he makes use of human agents at every 
turn. To assist in urging forward these 
wheels, we are allowed the distinguished 
honor of using our exertions; and not only 
allowed, but required — most urgently are 

•Is. 63*& 



Duties relating to the Millennium. 245 



n & 



we required to apply our hearts, our 
tongues, our counsels, our property, our in- 
fluence, our prayers, our talents, our ut- 
most exertions, our every effort, to the bless- 
ed work. 

Some may imagine, that they have no time 
to engage in this work; that they have so 
much to do for themselves, their families and 
fellow men, that they have no time to spare 
for the advancement of Christ's kingdom. 
Dear reader, is this your case? Is the king- 
dom of Christ then nothing to you? Is death, 
judgment, eternity, nothing to you? nothing 
to your family? nothing to your fellow 
men? And are the overwhelming scenes of 
the world to come, scenes, in which you 
and they are to have a part, nothing to 
you? Are you willing it should be forev- 
er true, as it relates to you and them, 
that Christ is dead in vain? Are you will- 
ing, that to you and them the pearly 
gates of Paradise should be opened in vain? 
And are you certain, that notwithstanding 
all the cares and toils, to which you are call- 
ed from day to day, you have nothing to 
do, for the salvation of your ow;n soul, or the 
souls of others? — nothing to do for the ad- 
vancement of the glory of God, or the king- 
dom of the Redeemer? Are you certain, that 
it is your duty to seek first what you shall 
eat, what you shall drink and, wherewithal 
you shall be clothed, and how the temporal 
Avants of your connexions and friends shall 
21* 



246 Duties relating to the Millennium. 

be supplied? Do you entertain a hope, that, 
if you diligently seek these things, all tiro 
blessings of the kingdom of heaven will be 
added? Are you certain, that, when Christ 
invites you to the marriage supper of the 
Lamb, it is your duty to go to your farms 
and your merchandise? Dear friend, be not 
deceived. Eternity is at hand; behold, the 
Judge standeth at the door; and all the felic- 
ities and glories of the upper world are de- 
pending — are depending upon your exertions 
— upon the exertions of perhaps a single day. 
O then, he entreated to awake from your dire 
delusion; to awake without delay — to awake 
to righteousness. <c JBehoId the Bridegroom 
cometh, go ye out to meet him." If you are 
determined to lull yourself down in this fatal 
security, to say to the inviting, pleading Sa- 
vior, "Go thy way for this time," and to 
say to yourself, "A little more sleep, a little 
more slumber," you may have your wish; 
but he assured it will be bitterness in the end; 
you may have your wish, but at the last it 
will bite like a serpent and sting like an ad- 
der — you may do according to the desire of 
your heart, but know thou, that for all these 
things, God will bring thee into judgment. 
And how wilt "thou mourn at the last, when 
thy flesh and thy body are consumed, and 
say, How have I hated instruction, and my 
heart despised reproof, and have not obeyed 
the voice of my teachers, nor inclined mine 
ear to them that instructed me!" Be entreat- 
ed then, dear reader, if still regardless of the 



Duties relating to the MillentAum. 247 

kingdom of Christ, be entreated immediately 
to repent, immediately forsake thy wicked 
ways and thy unrighteous thoughts, and turn 
unto the Lord, and he will have mercy on 
thee — he will abundantly pardon. Precious 
immortal soul, be not deceived. Do not 
vainly imagine, that you have no time to at- 
tend to the kingdom of Christ. This is so 
far from being true, and when you come to 
stand before the judgment seat of Christ, 
you will see and feel, that it is so far from 
being true, that God does not allow you 
time to do any thing else. He requires, that 
whatever you do, or say, or think, should 
be directly or indirectly conducive to the ad- 
vancement to the kingdom of his Son. 
Whether you eat or drink, or whatsoever 
you do, you must do all to the glory of God. 
Tho you may now find it easy to excuse your- 
self to your conscience in neglecting to en- 
gage in the service of Christ, yet, be assured, 
you will not find it so easy to excuse your- 
self, when God taketh away your soul — you 
will not find it so easy to excuse yourself, 
when you stand at the bar of Christ. Tho 
it may now be easy for you to make lyes 
your refuge, yet be assured, the storm of al- 
mighty wrath is gathering, and the hail 
shall sweep away the refuges of lyes, and 
the waters shall overflow the hiding places. 
Once more then, O unbeliever, permit me 
to entreat you, as your eternal all is at 
stake, permit me to conjure you, if you 
have the least regard for your own salvation* 



248 Duties relating to the Millennium* 

or the salvation of others, to flee from the 
wrath to come, to lay hold upon the hope set 
before you, and engage With all your heart, 
and with all your powers, in building up that 
kingdom, which is not meat and drink, but 
righteousness, peace and joy in the Holy 
Ghost, if you thus engage, and persevere 
in your exertions, and are never weary in 
well doing, the Omniscient alone can tell, 
how much you may do to promote the best of 
causes— how much you may do for your own 
soul and the souls of thousands. But if you 
refuse — No! you must not refuse; you must 
not neglect so great salvation. Heaven for- 
bids; hell forbids; your own conscience for- 
bids; God forbids; Christ forbids; the Holy 
Spirit forbids; angels forbid. "The Spirit 
and the bride say, Come; and let him that 
heareth, say, Come; and let him that is 
athirst, come, and whosoever will, let him 
take of the water of life freely." 



LECTURE XIII. 

Address to Ministers; — to Students in Theol- 
ogy; — to Christians; — to Parents. 

Shaix I presume, to address the ministers 
of the gospel upon a subject, that is peculiar- 
ly delightful to their hearts? Dearly belov- 
ed and highly respected Fathers and Breth- 
ren, it is with fear and trembling, that I 
presume to offer a word of exhortation to 
those by whom I ought rather to be exhort- 
ed myself. Tho I may be able to suggest 
little or nothing, but what you have known 
before, it may possibly be useful to stir up 
your pure minds by way of remembrance. No 
doubt, my brethren,you have often been able 
to witness from your own experience, that 
"this is a true saying, If any man desire 
the office of a bishop, he desireth a good 
work " And have you not frequently upon the 
bended knees of your souls rendered most hum- 
ble and hearty thanks to Jesus Christ your 
Lord who hath enabled you for that he count- 
ed you faithful, putting you into the minis'* 
tr^?"# But never before did the above say- 
ing appear so strikingly true; and never be- 
fore had ministers in general such abundant 
season to thank Jesus Christ for putting 

n Tim. 1:12, aEd 3rl. 



£50 To Ministers. 

them into the ministry; Happy /thrice hap- 
py ye, who are able to execute the sacred, 
the more than angelic office, with vigor, with 
constancy ,with singleness of mind, and with 
success; who have health to be instant in sea- 
son and out of season, who are not compelled 
to leave the word of God to serve tables, but 
by night and by day can give yourselves 
continually to reading, to meditation, to 
prayer, and to the ministry of the word. How 
bright and animating is the prospect before 
you! "Lift up your eyes, and look on the 
fields; for they are white already to harvest." 
Never before could the spiritual reaper an- 
ticipate such an abundant harvest, such glo- 
rious wages. Never before at any one time 
were there so many, who, after going forth 
and weeping, bearing precious seed, have re- 
turned with rejoicing, bringing tlieir sheaves 
with them. Ye officers in the army of Jesus, 
your almighty Captain is leading you on 
from conquering and to conquer; with the 
dear, precious little bands committed to 
your charge, he is leading you on to vic- 
tory, to triumph, to glory. If you can- 
not scale, nor batter down the broad and 
lofty walls of Babylon, you shall be enabled 
to divert the waters of Euphrates; the long 
hidden treasures of wickedness shall be 
brought to light and destroyed; and Baby- 
lon shall be as when God overthrew Sodom 
and Gomorrah. Ambassadors of God, you 
will not be compelled hereafter, as you have 



To Ministers. 251 

been in time past, to take up the dishearten- 
ing, heart-rending complaint,*' Who hath be- 
lieved our report?" The time is near, or has 
already arrived,when the word of God from 
your lips, like the rain and the snow that 
water the earth, and make it fruitful, shall 
not return void, but shall accomplish the 
pleasure of the God of grace, and prosper in 
the thing whereto he sends it. Ye heralds of 
salvation, thank God and take courage. 
You are honored with an agency in the 
work of salvation and in introducing the 
Millennium, above men of any other profes- 
sion, and probably above the angels them- 
selves. In proportion to their numbers, the 
faithful ministers of Jesus, have perhaps ten 
times more influence in building up his 
kingdom, than other Christians. Tho the 
happy state of the world, that will charac- 
terize the Millennium,will consist in a great 
variety of things, yet it will consist most pe- 
culiarly an,d most eminently in the holy love, 
that will glow in the hearts of all. The 
grand instrument of producing this love, is 
the gospel; and the principal instruments 
of dispensing the gospel, and making it ef- 
fectual to the salvation of sinners, are the 
faithful ministers of Christ. Generally 
speaking, it is by the foolishness of preach- 
ing that God is pleased to call in his chosen* 
O ye ministers of the everlasting gospel, it 
is to youj* that angels are looking, as the 
kading and most distinguished instruments 



252 To Ministers. 

of ushering in that blessed day, that shall fill 
heaven with new raptures, and bring a rev- 
enue of glory to God, that shall transcend 
the anticipation of angels. Arise, then, ye 
highly favored of the Lord, and with reno- 
vated ardor apply yourselves to the great 
and difficult work, to which all your powers 
and faculties have been so solemnly conse- 
crated. 

In general you know your duty much 
better than 1 can tell you. My younger 
brethren, however,will pardon a few sugges- 
tions, designed more particularly for them, 
and which possibly may prove useful to 
some. Every day then, most solemnly 
charge your own souls to be wholly devoted 
to the great and honorable work, in which 
you are engaged. Let nothing but the most 
imperious necessity, divert you for a mo- 
ment, from the business of jour high and 
holy calling. Generally speaking, it is the 
duty of your people to afford you the neces- 
saries, the comforts, the conveniences, and 
perhaps some of the delights of the present life. 
But, if those to whom you minister are unable 
or unwilling to afford you all these, do not 
hastily conclude, that it is your duty to leave 
undone any part of your sacred work, for 
the sake of procuring them. Surely you 
ought to content yourselves with \evy indif- 
ferent accommodations and indifferent fare, 
rather than neglect the souls of tyour people, 
and famish your flocks with sermons unfit to 



To Jfinisters. 25$ 

be beard. If your people so rebel against 
Christ, as to refuse to make reasonable ex- 
ertions for your comfortable support, it is no 
doubt, in most cases, your duty to leave- 
them, and shake offthedustofyour feetagainst 
them, rather than leave your sacred work 
for secular employments. Take the most 
earnest heed, that you do not engage in any 
study or any pursuit, that will turn you aside 
from the duties of your office. Of this you 
may be constantly in danger. Do not seek to 
excel in any art or science, tint is not most 
directly and intimately connected with your 
profession. Almost all the arts and scienc- 
es have a remote connexion with theology; 
but a very inconsiderable acquaintance with 
most of them, such as may be acquired in a 
few years, should satisfy a minister of the 
gospel. Ought we not to consider it really 
disgraceful for a minister to be a great nat- 
ural philosopher, a great mathematician, a 
great botanist, a great chemist, a great 
anatomist, a great farmer, a great gar- 
dener, or a great mechanic, &c. &c? Tho he 
might find it of some advantage in his pro- 
fession, to be great in these respects, yet 
there is reason to fear, that by withdrawing 
Ms attention and affection from more impor- 
tant pursuits, the disadvantage would be ten 
times greater. It is indeed desirable, ex- 
ceedingly desirable, as it respects the ad- 
vancement of Christ's kingdom, that some 
Christians should be great in all these res 



254 To Ministers; 

pects; but not for the ministers of the gospel, 
who are most solemnly bound to give them- 
selves wholly to their sacred work. If I 
•had the charge of souls, as I once had, I 
should infinitely prefer to have a few thou- 
sand select passages of scripture engraven 
upon my memory and deeply impressed up- 
on my heart, to being a Cicero in Latin, a 
Newton in philosophy, or a Silliman in 
chemistry. If a minister is well acquainted 
with the human heart, especially with the dis- 
tinguishing exercises of the righteous and the 
wicked, if he is well instructed unto the king- 
dom of heaven, if he is mighty in the scrip- 
tures, if he is an eloquent man, apt to teach, 
and a workman that needeth not to be 
ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth, 
the intellectual attainments, which he may 
Want, should be considered as nothing com- 
pared with those he has acquired. Were all 
ministers such, the prospect of the Millen- 
nium would be much more animating than 
it is. 

But tho ministers must give themselves 
wholly to their sacred work, they must take 
heed that they do not go beyond their 
strength. Had I exercised sufficient caution 
in this respect, during three or four of the 
first years of my ministry, no doubt it might 
have prevented a separation from a dearly 
beloved iiock, which was so exceedingly try- 
ing to me and to them. Some seem to im- 
agine, that there is no sin in a person's de- 
stroying his constitution, his usefulness, and 



To Ministers. £55 

perhaps his life, in the course of a few years, 
if he is but engaged in advancing the king- 
dom of Christ. But surely the health and 
strength of a gospel minister is too precious 
to be thus abused and destroyed. It is in- 
deed better to wear out, than rust out; but to 
break the constitution, and to destroy health, 
usefulness and life at once, is by no means 
wearing out. It is no doubt the duty of ev- 
ery person fairly to wear himself out in the 
service of the best of Masters, and to do the 
most possible labor through the whole 
course of life in the advancement of the best 
of causes. But the solemn declaration of the 
apostle, < ( Do thyself no harm," is designed 
for the admonition of alh In the precious 
seasons of Religious revival, however, as they 
are not generally of Jong continuance, it 
may be the duty of ministers to do more, than 
they are able to do habitually from year to 
year. 

Let me earnestly entreat my young minis- 
terial brethren, who are anxious to do their 
utmost for the advancement of Christ's king- 
dom, to take heed to themselves, especially 
to take heed to their deportment among their 
people. This is perhaps the most difficult 
of ministerial duties. It is no doubt, impos- 
sible to lay down rules, that will in all cases 
regulate the performance of this duly. 
Much must be left to that wisdom, which is 
profitable to direct. And yet, no doubt, the 
danger lies principally upon one side. My 
dear young brethren, if you would not de 



£56 To Ministers. 

stroy the precious souls, that you are watch- 
ing arid praying and striving to save, if you 
would not plant your dying pillows with 
thorns and the stings of scorpions, beware 
of indulging in trifling, in levity, in jesting, 
in secular conversation, with your people. 
Tho your conversation must needs be at 
times in some measure secular, yet, if possi- 
ble, let it be always mingled with a savor of 
spiritual things; let it be seasoned with the 
salt of grace. If you are bidden to a dinner 
or a supper, neither the precepts nor the ex- 
ample of Christ forbids you to go. But O 
do not forget, nor let any of your associates 
forget, that you are ministers of Christ, 
But take heed, that no man despise you. 
Should any of you attend a convivial party, 
and there appear intirely conformed to a 
vain, trifling and wicked world, and then 
plead the example of Christ in your justifi- 
cation, be assured, you can hardly be guilty 
of a more flagrant perversion. Thus did not 
Jesus; thus did not Paul. If any of you feel 
confident, that you cannot attend such par- 
ties, and there maintain the character of 
faithful ministers of Jesus, decline the invi- 
tation; — tho you offend some, whom it may 
seem most desirable to please, decline the in- 
vitation — tho you expose yourselves to the 
danger of removal, decline the invitation — 
tho you expose your lives, decline. Or if you 
are called to perform official duties at such par- 
ties, perform them, and withdraw 7 . In no case 



To Ministers. %5? 

be conformed to the criminal customs of the 
world. Scarcely any thing else is so suited 
to harden sinners in their iniquities, and 
confirm them in their evil ways, as such 
conformity in ministers. If you conform to 
their practices, or even yield them the smiles 
of approbation, they may indeed show you 
much kindness, they may regularly attend 
upon your public ministrations, l>ut they will 
not care for your preaching*. Have no com- 
munion, then, with the unfruitful works of 
darkness; but rather reprove them. Re- 
prove them from the pulpit; and let your most 
cutting reproofs be your habitual deportment 
and conversation. 

But the subject of these Lectures calls 
upon ministers to attend to those topics, 
which relate more particularly to the Millen- 
nium. Scarcely any subjects are more en- 
livening and delightful to Christians, than 
the exceeding great and precious promises 
relating to that blessed period. The in- 
creased attention, that ministers have re- 
cently paid to these promises, and to the 
signs of their speedy fulfilment, in their 
preaching and exhortations, has no doubt 
been one of the principal means, that have 
excited Christians to more fervent and 
abundant prayer, in answer to which such 
great things have been done for Zion's wel- 
fare. Preaching upon these subjects has 
also had an influence to engage Christians 
w various exertions conducive to the sains 



258 To Theological Students. 

great end. Have we not reason to hope, 
that, if ministers would preach still more 
clearly, more abundantly and more earnest- 
ly, upon subjects relating to the Millenni- 
um, the same effects would follow in still 
greater abundance. 

Students in theology cannot but feel most 
deeply interested in view of the great and 
delightful work, which they have in pros- 
pect. And not only they, but the whole 
Christian world, have reason to be most ar- 
dently thankful, that so many of them enjoy 
opportunities so much superior to what have 
been enjoyed by those who have gone before 
them. It is astonishing, that any who are 
qualified to judge upon the subject, should 
consider three years a long period to be de- 
voted to theological studies, preparatory to 
so great and difficult a work- 

If it is important for ministers to take 
head to themselves, especially to their habit- 
ual deportment, in their intercourse with 
the world, it is scarcely less important for 
theological students to do the same. They 
are regarded by most persons, as almost in- 
vested with the sacred office. The habits 
and characters, which they form or estab- 
lish, in this exalted grade of their pupilage, 
may have an influence upon their future use- 
fulness, beyond their power to calculate. It 
may be, that some of them are far from re- 
alizing, how critically their actions are 
scanned by all around them; probably very 



To Christians. £59 

few of them have an adequate idea, with 
what derout solicitude, with what ardent 
hopes, with what fear and trembling, many 
of their Christian friends are looking for- 
ward to the time, when they shall blow the 
silver trumpet from the heights of Zion; and 
probably none of them are fully sensible of 
the exceeding precionsness of the golden op- 
portunities, by which they are distinguished. 
Could they know what arrows of agony have 
often pierced the hearts of ministers in con- 
sequence of their ignorance of what they 
ought to have known, and what they might 
have known, theological students would 
tremble at the thought of wasting a mo- 
ment's time, or devoting a moment to pur- 
suits, that are not intimately connected with 
their high and holy calling. I would, how- 
ever, most earnestly exhort them to pay very 
particular attention to their precious, prec- 
ious health, upon which under God so much 
is depending. 

Eut tho the gospel ministry is so impor- 
tant, so honorable, and so essential to the 
accomplishment of the purposes of everlast- 
ing love, yet let not Christians, who are not 
devoted to the sacred office, be tempted to 
feel for a moment, that they are lightly es- 
teemed,!)}' their Lord and Master. If the 
least sparrow is not forgotten before God, 
in what exalted estimation must he hold im- 
mortal souls — immortal souls for whom the 
Son has bled, and in whom the Spirit dwells. 



£60 To Christians* 

If the Lord had need of a humble beast of 
burden, how much more must he need the 
saints, who are the excellent of the earth— 
the saints, who are his fulness — the saints, 
who are destined to reflect his richest glo- 
ries to unnumbered worlds, and shine for- 
ever as jewels in his crown. Christians in 
the humblest walks of life, are as really need- 
ful in building the spiritual temple, as the 
ministers of the gospel, tho they are not 
called to act a part so conspicuous. Tho 
many members, Christians are one body. 
"And the eye cannot say unto the hand, I 
have no need of thee; nor again theJiead to 
the feet, I have no need of you." 

Christians, you have a great work to do 
for your Lord and Master, in accomplishing 
the promises, which the great Unchangeable 
has sworn to fulfil. There is much for you 
to do, which, if neglected, the cause of Christ 
will fail, and the gates of hell will prevail 
against the church. It is to be deeply la- 
mented, that the promises aud purposes of 
God are so often misunderstood and pervert- 
ed. Many imagine, that, if God has pur- 
posed and engaged to build up his church, 
they may fold their hands, and sit down un 7 
concerned and inactive. If any in the visi- 
ble church have such feelings, I would say 
concerning them, «Wo to them that are 
at ease in Zion."* I will not say, that the 
church cannot be built up without the exei% 
tinns of such. There is reason to fear, th^t 

* Amos 6:1, 



To Christians. 261 

tho they have a name that they live, they 
are dead. But as surely as God is unchange- 
able, the church cannot be built up without 
the exertions of Christians. He has not 
promised to build it up without their exer- 
tions; but by their exertions. Now, if he 
should build it up in any way, different 
from what he has promised, his promise 
would fail. Alas, in how many ways do 
men turn the grace of God into idleness, and 
into lasciviousness. The promises of God 
afford the greatest encouragement to Chris- 
tians, to be up and doing, working with their 
might. It is by the promises of God, that 
they know that their labor is not in vain in 
the Lord. 

Arise then, dearly beloved brethren and 
sisters, the great Master-Builder of the spir- 
itual temple is calling aloud to you, "Arise 
and build." O that all hearts may most 
cheerfully respond, "The God of heaven he 
will prosper us; therefore we his servants 
will arise and build."* Tho the sure Founda- 
tion has long been laid in Zion; yei, for a 
superstructure there is comparatively speak- 
ing scarcely one stone raised upon another. 
Be assured, Christians, this Foundation has 
not been laid in vain. The superstructure 
must rise; by Christian exertions, it will 
rise to a height no less glorious, than aston- 
ishing. Christians, it is time to awake out 
of sleep. You have every encouragement 
that you can reasonably wish. It is high 

*Neh. 2:18.20. 



2§2 To Christians. 

time, it is more than time, that every be- 
liever was wide awake, and engaged in the 
service of the almighty Builder, with a de- 
gree of resolution and zeal, that the world 
has never witnessed. In rearing this great 
house, amazing labors, and a vast variety 
of operations, are requisite. Ten thousand 
hands, ten thousand hearts, ten thousand 
tongues, and ten thousand times ten thous- 
and more, may all find employment. What 
clouds of holy incense must ascend; how 
many millions of fervent effectual prayers 
must he accepted and answered, before 
the saints will take the kingdom. The 
Lord will be inquired of by his people, to 
do for them, the things that his grace has 
promised. Soldiers of Immanuel, be contin- 
ually at your pasts. It is here, that you can 
do exploits. It is here, you can put to flight 
the armies of aliens, and vanquish the le- 
gions of darkness. Without fainting and 
without ceasing, pray to Him, that seeth in 
secret, who will reward you openly, and pour 
you out a blessing, that will fill earth and 
heaven with amazement. Morning and even- 
ing, let the fragrant incense rise from the 
family altar. From Sabhath to Sabbath, 
and from time to time, forsake not the as- 
sembling of yourselves together, in the house 
of God and at other places, where prayer is 
wont to be made. Especially remember the 
first Monday of the month. Let not one of 
these precious seasons pass by unobserved. 



To Parents, £63 

If you cannot attend with many, attend with 
few, or even with one. If you canuot enjoy 
the privilege of uniting with even one, let 
your devotions be secret; but do not omit a 
single season for uniting in heart with Chris- 
tians of all denominations in the four quar- 
ters of the world, in supplications for the 
best of blessings upon all mankind* 

Not only pray, but watch and work. Bi- 
ble Societies, Missionary Societies, and ten 
thousand other objects of vast importance, 
are constantly claiming the attention and as- 
sistance of Christians. It is impossible, 
that any one can afford particular aid to so 
many objects. Let every one devoutly con- 
sider, what objects have the strongest claims 
upon his talents, his influence, his property; 
and these objects, let him promote to the 
very utmost of his power. 

Ye fathers and mothers, surrounded by 
your prattling babes, and tender offspring, 
yourselves in miniature, that are fast rising 
into childhood, into youth, into manhood, do 
you know what a treasure is committed to 
your trust? Immortals, germs of everlasting 
existence, each of them of more value, than 
all the stars in the firmament. Do you de- 
sire their salvation? Do you desire to shine 
and shout with them, when stars and suns 
shall be extinguished? Be faithful to your 
precious, your most endearing charge; de- 
vote them to Christ, train them up for Him, 
from whom you have received them; and 



264 To Parents. 

then you may have reason to hope, that you 
will finally be able to present them before 
him, and say, "Behold I, ><l the children, 
which God hath given me. 5 ' 

The encouragements and obligations of 
parents, to train up their children in the 
way they should go, has always been great. 
But never before were these obligations and 
encouragements so great as at present. From 
the signs of the times, and the promises of 
God, there is reason to hope, that a very con- 
siderable proportion of those who are now 
children, in Christian lands, will be heirs of 
the kingdom. What accumulated wrath, 
what aggravated woes, impend the heads of 
those unnatural parents, those monsters of 
cruelty, who are practically saying, that 
they are willing, that their children should 
be trained up for Satan, and die for lack of 
knowledge. 



LECTURE XIV. 

Address to Teachers; — to Magistrates;— to 
the Affluent; — to the Young. 

Ye, who sustain the important and hon- 
orable office of teachers, are these things 
nothing to you? Surely the subject of the 
Millennium can hardly fail to interest your 
feelings. The advancement of schools and 
other seminaries in almost every branch 
of literature, is among the favorable signs, 
that distinguish the present age. In this 
you have rejoiced, and are rejoicing more 
and more, from year to year. With 
what raptures then, must you look forward 
to the day, when these institutions shall be 
as much superior to What they are at present, 
as they are now superior to the schools of 
the dark ages. 

Instructors of youth, your profession is 
undoubtedly next in importance to the sa- 
cred ministry itself. In proportion to your 
numbers, you can do more to enlighten and 
reform the world, and introduce the Millen- 
nium, than persons of any other profession, 
except the ministers of Christ. Is it not 
important then, my brethren and sisters, (for 
thus I may now address you) is it not un- 
speakably important, that we should make 
£3 



£66 To Teachers. 

full proof of our noble office,* that we should 
exert all our talents, to unfold the faculties, 
and to advance the literary and religious 
improvement of our pupils — that we should 
exert ourselves to the very utmost, to raise 
the succeeding generation above the present; 
and see how much can be done by teachers, 
for the benefit of mankind, and the regenera- 
tion of the world? 

To many of my fellow teachers, who are 
rich in experience and reflection, I can look 
up for instruction. Most gladly would I 
sit at their feet and learn. To some of my 
younger brethren and sisters, I may perhaps 
be able to offer a few hints, which they may 
find useful in pursuing a branch of business, 
which, according to its importance, is prob- 
ably less understood, than any other. 

It should be the great business of a teach- 
er to endeavor to excite and promote in his 
pupils a thirst for knowledge; to unfold and 
properly direct their faculties, and to culti- 
vate them all in due proportion; to store their 
minds with the most useful information; to 
direct and assist them in forming such hab- 
its corporeal and mental, as will be most im- 
portant in the business of life; in short to 
instruct and train them in such things and 
in such manner, as may be most conducive 
to their usefulness and happiness in this 
world, and to their glory, honor anil immor- 
tality in the world to come.. 

* 2 Tim. 4:5 



To Teachers. 26f 

In the first place then, my dear young 
friends, you will permit me to recommend 
that you endeavor to be qualified for your 
business. It is doubtful whether there is any 
other employment, in which those who are 
pursuing it, are so indifferently qualified for 
their work, as are many of those, who un- 
dertake the business of instruction. Take 
heed, then, that to the very utmost of your 
power, you be well acquainted with what 
you attempt to teach; that you be apt to 
teach;* and that you be able to govern and 
regulate a school. If any of these qualifica- 
tions be lacking, you will not be likely to 
succeed. How can you teach what you do 
not know? You may indeed give your pu- 
pil a lesson, and then take the book and hear 
him repeat the words of the author; but this 
can hardly be called teaching. It seems de- 
sirable, that you should be able to explain 
to him, what he may not understand, to 
question him upon his exercises, to answer 
the questions that he may ask, and to tell 
him much more about the subject, than he 
finds in his lesson. How ridiculous is it for 
any one to attempt to teach an extensive and 
important branch, to which ho has never de- 
voted his attention for a single month. 

Aptness for teaching, or facility of com- 
municating instruction, is a requisite scarce- 
ly less important, than knowledge itself. If 
the teacher has no talent for communicating 

* 1 Tim. 3:% 



268 To Teachers. 

his knowledge, it cannot benefit his pupils. 
A spirit of government also seems absolute- 
ly essential. It is hardly to be supposed, 
that scholars will gain much information 
without being well governed and regulated; 
but even if they could, it would only be pre- 
paring them for misrule and mischief. 

Tho the two latter qualifications may be 
considered more especially the gift of nature; 
yet they are, no doubt, susceptible of very 
great improvement. 

But whatever talents you may possess for 
this business, they will be vain, unless they 
are exerted. Let me therefore advise you, 
in the second place, to be ardently engaged 
in your employment. If it be possible give 
yourselves wholly to it. There is great diffi- 
culty, to say the least, in serving two mas- 
ters. If, while out of school, you are ear- 
nestly engaged in other pursuits, there is 
reason to fear, that you will not attend to 
your pupils with that singleness of mind — 
that you will not feel that deep and lively 
interest in your business, which is indispen- 
sable to success. To excel in any pursuit, 
we must be heartily engaged in it; especial- 
ly to excel in school-keeping. One of the 
most important and most difficult things in 
this business, is to rouse the mind, that the 
pupil may take fast hold of instruction* 
This cannot be done by a cold, lazy, slug- 
gish, stupid manner. No, you must be en- 
gagedj you must be zealously affected in so 



To Teachers. £69 

good a cause.* 1 It is desirable, that even 
while out of the school, you should be en- 
gaged, as far as health and circumstance and 
business will admit, upon the great business 
of urging forward your pupils in the ways 
of knowledge and virtue. 

In the third place, I would recommend, 
that you make it your daily study and exer- 
tion, to gain the affections of your pupils to 
yourselves and to your instructions. In or- 
der to do this, it seems important, not to 
say necessary, that you should love them — 
that you should love them, with almost par- 
ental affection. If you cannot love your pu- 
pils, quit the business, and pursue any other 
lawful employment, rather than that of teach- 
ing. You need not make great professions 
of attachment, however. Let it be manifest 
by your conduct. Let it glow in your coun- 
tenance, and sparkle in your eye, and flow 
forth in all you do and say. By your unaf- 
fected smiles, by your condescension, by 
your affability, by your assiduity to assist 
them to the utmost, make them feel, that jou 
are sincerely and deeply attached to their 
welfare — that their improvement is more 
precious to you than gold. You must indeed 
maintain your authority; you must be abso- 
lute in your little empires; your word must 
be law; but, like that of the illustrious Gra- 
ham, let it be "the law of kindness.' 5 ! 

*Gal. 4:18. 

•j\Pror. 31:26 applied to the late Mrs. Graham by Dr* 
Vinson of y.ew York, 
23* 



270 To Teachers. 

Should you be compelled to chastise, which 
it is to be hoped, will seldom if ever be the 
case, let the culprit feel, and let all thft 
spectators feel, that it is indispensable, that 
it is a painful, heart-rending duty, And that 
you would much rather receive the stripes 
yourselves, could they answer the same pur- 
pose. It is to be hoped, however, that the 
time is near, when such distressing remedies 
will be superseded by milder applications. 

The love of your pupils, however, which 
it is so important for you to gain, must be 
considered as a subordinate object. It is 
valuable and desirable principally on ac- 
count of its assisting you to excite in them a 
love of learning. The delight, which you 
may justly feel, in being the objects of their 
fond attachment, is a trifle, compared with 
the advantage it w ill give you in this respect* 
If children love the teacher, they can hard- 
ly fail to love the teaching. Indeed if he 
gains their affections in the faithful dis- 
charge of bis duty, they will identify his 
instructions with himself. While they love 
to see him, and to hear him, and to speak of 
him, and to think of him, they will hardly 
know themselves, whether it is his person., 
or his instructions, to which they are most 
attached. Endeavor, then, to improve the 
love your pupils feel for you, to excite and 
increase their love of learning to the very 
utmost. For the same important end you 
will exert yourselves, to render your inatruo 



To Teachers. £71 

tions as pleasant and delightful, as possible. 
It is my decided opinion, that every step of 
the way to the very pinnacle of the temple of 
science, may be strewed with flowers — with 
flowers of the most fragrant odors and the 
richest hues — that children may be made to 
love their studies and instructions,better than 
their toys, or their sports or any sensual de- 
lights. 1 cannot pretend, however, that it 
is in my power thus to teach. Most gladly 
would 1 go "from Britain to Japan,* 5 and 
from Japan to California, if I could gain 
this most important art. I have dared to 
hope, how ever, that in the course of twenty 
years, which 1 have yi a great measure de- 
voted to the business of instruction, religious 
and literary ,1 have been enabled to gain some 
important information upon the subject. 
From a deep conviction of its unspeakable 
importance, I can most earnestly recom- 
mend it to the consideration of every meta- 
physician, of every minister, of every teach- 
er, of every parent. But I cannot here en- 
large upon the subject. Two or three hints 
must suffice. Endeavor to teach the several 
branches, and as far as possible, the parts of 
each branch in the order, that is most nat- 
ural, most intelligible, and most easy. Teach 
those things first, which can be most easily 
understood by themselves, and are most need- 
ful for the understanding of ethers. The want 
of due attention to this, has conduced, more 
than perhaps almost any thing e!se,to lender 



272 To Teachers. 

some studies dark, intricate, perplexing and 
disgustful. Endeavor to explain every thing, 
that needs explanation, in the most plain, 
simple,intelligible and striking manner. Ask 
your pupils many questions relating to their 
studies, and if time will admit, indulge and 
encourage them,in asking as many questions 
as they please. Cautiously guard against 
embarrassing, distracting, perplexing and 
weakening their minds by too great a vari- 
ety of studies at the same time, or by pass- 
ing too rapidly from one to another. On 
the other hand, however, you must gnard 
against wearying,discouraging or disgusting 
them, by too great atonfinement to a single 
branch. In the whole business of teaching 
there is perhaps scarcely any thing more 
difficult to be properly adjusted than this. 

Suffer me in the fourth place to recom- 
mend, that you endeavor to show the use 
and importance of every thing you teach; 
and never attempt to teach any branch, ex- 
cept perhaps to those who are very young, 
unless you are able to show its importance. 
Surely no branches ought to be taught, but 
such as are useful; and for your pupils to 
know the advantage, may be a powerful 
stimulus to urge them forward in the prose- 
cution; and by keeping this advantage habit- 
ually in view, they will be likely to gain a 
much more practical knowledge of the 
branch. 



To Teacher*. 273 

I would advise in the fifth place that you 
endeavor to keep the attention of your pupils 
directed, not only to those things that are 
unquestionably useful, but to such as are of 
the greatest importance. Some may be im- 
portant to one, that are not equally so to 
another. It is a good general rule, never to 
give up a greater advantage for the sake of 
securing a less. So in teaching, never neg- 
lect any branch, for the sake of attending to 
one of interior utility. 

As my last and most earnest advice, my 
beloved friends will permit me to recommend 
a particular attention to religious iustruc- 
tion. As it is the particular duty of minis- 
ters and parents to give religious instructions 
to those under their care, some may imagine 
that teachers of shoolsmay be excused. But 
bow often, alas, is the religious instruction of 
children almost entirely neglected by parents 
and ministers; and then, if it is neglected by 
their teachers, there seems to be nothing, but 
destruction before them. JtJut even if minis- 
ters and parents are faithful in this business, 
is there nothing left for teachers to do? 
Where is the child, that has as much reli- 
gious information, as it is desirable for him 
to possess? or that has made as great ad- 
vances in holiness, as are desirable, so as to 
leave no need of the religious instructions 
and earnest, affectionate exhortations, of a 
dearly beloved and much respected teacher? 
Teachers often have advantages to give re* 



£74 To Teachers. 

ligious instruction and exhortation to their 
pupils, that no other person can be supposed 
to enjoy. How can they answer it to their 
consciences and to their Judge, and how will 
they dare to meet their pupils at the bar of 
Christ, if they neglect such opportunities of 
doing good? Especially, as the teacher, who 
does not inculcate religion upon his pupils, 
can hardly fail to inculcate irreligion. If he 
does not teach religion, his pupils will natur- 
ally conclude that he considers it of no im- 
portance; and therefore, that it is of no im- 
portance to them. Such instruction, as this, 
many children are but too ready* to receive. 
If the teacher gives verbal instructions, and 
then contradicts them by unchristian con- 
duct, there is reason to fear, that they will 
be worse than in vain. It seems infinitely 
important, therefore, that every teacher 
should be a decided, well informed, consist- 
ent, zealous Christian; that he should pray 
with his pupils and for them, most sincerely, 
and fervently; and that he should train them 
up in the nurture and admonition of the 
Lord. 

And here I cannot deny myself the pleas- 
ure of transcribing a few sentences from the 
Christian Observer for last November. "We 
may confidently affirm, that imperfect and 
essentially defective must be every plan to 
form the human character, which is not 
founded on the basis of religious instruction. 
For, if true religion can alone restore man 



To Teachers. 275 

to those high hopes, blissful employments, 
and ennobling privileges, for which he was 
originally created, and which assimilate and 
unite him to pure and holy spirits, 'who circle 
God's throne rejoicing;' if it is well describ- 
ed, as 'an active, vital, influential principle, 
operating on the heart, restraining the de- 
sires, affecting the general conduct, and as 
much regulating our commerce with the 
world, our business, pleasures and enjoy- 
ments, our conversations, designs, and ac- 
tions, as our behavior in public worship, 
or even in private devotion; — if this be true, 
shall we for any weak and frail weapons of 
human device, reject those arms of heavenly 
temper, that panoply divine, which has in 
every age defeated the strongest and most 
inveterate enemies of the human race? Shall 
we, for any ineffectual mixture of our own, 
neglect that medicine presented by Infinite 
AYisdom, which has so often cured the most 
fatal and inveterate diseases, to which man's 
fallen nature is subject? Would we then 
qualify our children, for the discharge of du- 
ties, domestic, social and political; — would 
we, that they should possess the substance, 
of which the world admires only the empty 
shadow; that they should be directed by the 
inward dispositions and principles, rather 
than exhibit only the outward form; let us 
instruct them in that 'faith, which worketh 
by love/ that 'wisdom, which is from above, 9 
and which is first pure, then peaceable, gen- 






276 To Magistrates. 

tie, and easy to be entreated, full of mercy 
and good fruits; without partiality, and with- 
out hypocrisy. 5 " 

If any of our civil fathers should conde- 
scend to cast an eye over these pages, they 
will doubtless feel, that I am a debtor to 
them. So much is depending upon the con- 
duct of those, who are raised to stations of 
honor and trust by the voice of a free and 
enlightened people and the providence of 
God — so much is depending upon the con- 
duct of those, whose important duty it is, to 
enact, to explain, to execute the best of 
human laws, that I dare not pass them by in 
silence. Respected and beloved rulers, may 
you have the unspeakable satisfaction of do- 
ing much, very much, for the introduction of 
that blessed day, when kings and queens 
shall be nursing fathers and nursing mothers 
to the church. For this, your abilities, your 
opportunities, your obligations, are greater 
than I can express. How much may you 
do, by your example, by your wisdom, by 
your influence, by your prayers, by your 
zeal for your country and your God; how 
much may you do to banish or crush the 
monster vice, to promote truth, integrity and 
every good work, to promote the cause of 
sound and useful learning, to advance true 
religion, to renovate and bless the world. 
Vicegerents of God on earth, your offices 
are vastly important. Under him, you carry 
in your hands the destinies of the nation; 
and your conduct may have a great and ex- 



To Magistrates. 277 

tensive influence upon other nations. To 
you much is given; of you therefore much 
will be required. You are as much account- 
able to Him, who shall judge the judges, as 
the least of those, over whom you are pro- 
moted; nay your accountability is as much 
greater than theirs, as your talents and op- 
portunities are superior. Take heed, O re- 
spected magistrates, take heed to yourselves, 
and to the duties of your honorable stations, 
lest your accumulated responsibility should 
only prepare the way, for the accumulated 
displeasure of the King of kings. What you 
do for your Savior, your race, your country 
or your own souls, either as magistrates or 
as men, you must do quickly. You cannot 
long hold the important stations you now oc- 
cupy. You will not be suffered to continue 
by reason of death Already the grim mes- 
senger is on his way. "How swift the shut- 
tle flies, that weaves your shrouds." The 
cloth that shall array the sad procession, and 
blacken the way to your graves, may have 
already passed the loom. What you do in 
the land of the living, you must do quickly. 
JBe wise therefore ye rulers, be instructed 
ye magistrates of the land. "Serve the Lord 
with fear, and rejoice with trembling. Kiss 
the Son, lest he be angry, and ye perish from 
the way, when his w rath is kindled but a lit- 
tle. Blessed are all they that put their trust 
in him." Beloved guardians of liberty, 
fathers of the people, may this blessedness 
be eternally yours, 
04 



278 To the Affluent. 

Those, who are favored with a large por- 
tion of the good things of this world, ought 
to feel that they are distinguished and bles- 
sed, above most of their fellow citizens, 
above the opulent of former ages, aud proba- 
bly, above the opulent in ages to come. Hap- 
py, thrice happy ye, if indeed ye have a dis- 
position to make such distribution as the 
Lord requires. Once it was said by one 
of the greatest and best of poets, and 
the saying was true in the sense intended, 
"Gold glitters most, where virtue shine no 
more.** But now it may be said, if never 
before, 

"Gold brightest shines to eyes that glow with love, 
Love to the Savior, love to souls redeem'd." 

If in any age it can be in any sense proper 
to say, "Blessed are the rich," surely that 
age is the present. God has opened so many 
channels, in which their wealth may flow out 
for the most important purposes; he has put 
it in their power to do good upon such a 
vast and extensive scale, that, if they faith- 
fully improve their talents, they may have 
reason to hope, that generations yet unborn, 
and whole nations will rise up and call them 
blessed. The names of Thornton, and Phil- 
lips, and Norris, and Abbot, and many oth- 
ers, who have liberally given back to the 
Lord of what he had so liberally bestowed 



To the Affluent. 279 

upon them, will be music in the ears of those, 
who shall flourish as the palm-tree in the 
Millennial Paradise. Ye sons and daughters 
of affluence, ye stewards of the bounties of 
Heaven, would ye know the bliss of these 
worthies, the bliss which they felt in giv- 
ing, the bliss which they now feel in 
the presence of the Lamb — would ye know 
how much better it is to give than to receive, 
go ye, and do likewise. 1 do not ask, that 
you should expose your families to want, nor 
incapacitate yourselves for future benefac- 
tions; but according as every one has re- 
ceived, so let him give; and let him give lib- 
erally and freely of what he has so freely 
received from the great Source of every 
gift. Bible Societies, Missionary Societies, 
Education Societies, Theological Semina- 
ries, &c. &c. are loudly calling for all the 
silver and the gold, that you can spare; 
which the Lord has put into your hands, 
which he considers as still his own,* and 
which he requires you to use in his service. 
The Lord has opened a thousand treasuries, 
by which, as with so many mouths, he is 
calling upon the affluent, saying, "Give, 
give." Most of the vast machines, that are 
rolling forward toward the glorious consum- 
mation, predicted and promised, must move 
on golden wheels, and be urged forward by 
weights of gold. Blessed are they, who can 

* Joel 3:5. 



239 To the Youns. 



©• 



sincerely and cheerfully give up a liberal 
portion of their treasures, to promote the 
glorious cause. They will find it, after many 
days; they will find it to be treasure laid up 
in heaven, that will be increasing and bright- 
ening to all eternity. 

Nor will this blessedness come upon the 
affluent alone. Blessed are they, whether 
rich or poor, who are willing to labor and 
toil, who are willing to rise up early and sit 
up late, and eat the bread of carefulness, for 
the sake of advancing the Redeemer's king- 
dom. The two mites of the poor widow, will 
never be forgotten before God. And we 
shall know in another world, what vast sums 
have been raised, what blessed purposes have 
been answered, by Cent Institutions, Mite 
Societies, &c. formed principally by those, 
who could afford to contribute only a few 
cents from month to month, or from year to 
year. 

But even if there are any, who are denied 
the privilege and delight of helping forward 
the work of the Lord in this way; if there 
are any who can say with the indigent apos- 
tle, "Silver and gold, have we none;" still 
they may give something in the important 
cause. They may give their hearts, their 
influence, their prayers. 

But to none, perhaps, does the subject of 
the Millennium speak in strains more af- 
fecting,* than to the rising generation. My 



To the Fomim* 281 



"S 



dear young friends, you live in an age pecu- 
liarly eventful, peculiarly interesting. We 5 
who have come upon the stage before you* 
have within a few years, seen great things — 
great things indeed, whereof we are glad — 
things, which "prophets and kings desired 
to see; but died without the sight.' 5 Some 
of the most important of these, were men- 
tioned in the Lecture upon the signs of the 
times. So great and glorious are the events 
that have taken place within a few years, 
that some persons in the overflowings of 
their joy and praise, have concluded, (hat 
the Millennium has already begun. But 
they mistake. Satan is not yet bound. Ye, 
who are now coming upon the stage, will 
see greater things than these; and some 
of you will be the blessed instruments of 
accomplishing much greater things than 
these. And now, my young friends, who of 
you are prepared, willingly to offer your- 
selves to engage in a work, so great, ana so 
glorious? There is enough for you all to do. 
In the figurative and beautiful language of 
the prophet, "Every valley shall be exalted, 
and every mountain and hill shall be made 
low; and the crooked shall be made straight, 
and the rough places plain; and tbeglorj of 
the Lord shall be revealed; and all flesh 
shall see it together." All this is to be ef- 
fected principally, if not wholly, by human 
instrumentality. And this is more than the 
*24 



£82 To the Young. 

present and succeeding generation will be 
able to accomplish. But there is reason to 
believe, that the succeeding generation will 
excel the present, in the work of the Lord, as 
much as the present excels all the preceding. 
And to me it appears highly probable, that 
the generation, that is to succeed the present, 
will do more toward introducing the Millen- 
nium, than any before or after it. It is to 
those who are now in their pupilage, that we 
must look, as the principal instruments in 
the hand of Zion's King, to raise the church 
above her enemies, that she may "look forth 
as the morning, fair as the moon, clear as the 
sun, and terrible as an army with banners." 
Surely this will be the most important step 
toward the Millennium, tho that blessed pe- 
riod will not probably commence, till 75 years 
after the church has gained the ascendancy, 
and laid aside her sackcloth* With what 
veneration and awe, then, may the teacher 
look upon his pupils, and the hoary-headed 
grandsire, upon his children's children. 

Dear respected youth, a considerable pro- 
portion of you will live — (that is, if I have 
been enabled to understand the scriptures 
relating to this subject) a considerable pro- 
portion of you will live, to see the commence- 
ment oiike time of the end; and many of you 
will have a most important agency in intro- 
ducing that illustrious era. Who of you is 
desirous of such an honor? of such a bliss 1 ? 



To the Toung. 2£$ 

Such an honor, such a bliss, you may every 
one enjoy, if your lives are spared. It is 
only for you to engage with all your hearts 
in the work of the Lord, and persevere in 
the ways of well-doing; and you shall be 
enabled to "tread Satan under your feet 
shortly." Nay, if you do not live to see 
"the mountain of the Lord's house establish- 
ed in the top of the mountains, and exalted 
above the hills," yet, if you will sincerely 
enlist yourselves under the banners of the 
King of kings, and heartily engage in the 
service of the Captain of salvation, tho you 
fall in the first onset, you sl^ll in no wise 
lose your reward; you shall receive from 
your Judge, the heart-thrilling plaudit, "Well 
done," and he will declare to assembled 
worlds, that you "did well, that it was in your 
hearts," to engage in his service — that it was 
in your hearts to fight in his cause, till you 
should be covered with honorable scars, and 
honorable wounds. Dear youthful reader, 
are these things nothing to you? and can you 
be so unwise as to care for none of these 
things? The King of Zion, your Creator ar.i 
Preserver, now calls you to his service. Can 
you be deaf to the call? The great Captain of 
salvation, who has shed his most precious 
blood for you, now summons you to the field- 
Will you, can you, neglect and despise the 
summons? Hark! the trumpet gives a certain 
sound. It bids you instantly gird on the 



284 lo the Young. ' 

gospel harness, and prepare yourself for the 
battle. The victory is declared to be cer- 
tain; and the triumph, most glorious and 
eternal. Can you refuse? can you doubt? 
can you hesitate? If angels could look into 
your heart, with what overwhelming so- 
licitude must they witness your exercises, 
while you are discussing within your own 
breast, the momentous question 'wheth- 
er you shall follow the standard of Im- 
nianuel, or the standard of the prince of dark- 
ness — a question, upon the decision of 
which hangs your eternal destiny. Are you 
almost persuaded to yield to the invitation of 
Christ? Mmost persuaded? That is not suffi- 
cient. It was not enough for Agrippa;* it is 
not enough for you. Remember, you are 
still in the enemy's ranks, while you are only 
almost persuaded to leave them. If you con- 
tent yourself with being almost persuaded, 
you are lost forever. This most important 
decision, which will seal you over to everlastr 
ing life, or everlasting death, must be formed 
without delay. Unbelieving reader, your 
time is short. O do not, 1 beseech you, do 
not decide against your Savior, against his 
kingdom, against your own soul, against 
your eternal salvation. And now, methinks, 
I see you just ready to form the decision, as 
Satan would have it, and as it were sealing 
your own death-warrant, that consigns you 

* Acts 20:28.29. 



To the Young. £65 

*>ver to everlasting darkness and despair. 
And now, you seem to whisper to yourself, 
"Farewell, Savior; farewell, angels of light; 
farewell, saints; farewell, heaven; farewell 
peace; farewell, hope. Hail, ye powers of 
darkness; ye everlasting horrors, hail. I 
come, I come to dwell with you. — No! I can- 
not, I cannot renounce my Savior, my heav- 
en, my hope, my all, for such a prison, for 
such companions. Jesus, I am thine; bless- 
ed Redeemer, I yield my soul to thee. But 
canst thou accept of one so vile and filthy; 
so wretched, and miserable, and poor, and 
blind, and naked? 

'And can so vile a sinner find 
A just and holy God so kind? 

And can I trust his grace? 
Yes, my Redeemer lives, he lives! 
Joy to my soul, my hope revives; 

I sett his smiling face. 9 

Lord what wilt thou have me to do? Here 
am 1, send me — send me to India, to China, 
to the remotest isle of the sea, to the ends of 
the earth, to prison, to tortures, to death, if 
1 may but glorify thy blessed name. Lord 
what wilt thou have me to do?" Are these, 
O youthful reader, are these the honest in- 
quiries of thy heart? — of a heart humble, bro- 
ken, and reconciled to God, and in love with 
the Savior? If so, I can most joyfully say, 
Dear brother, or dear sister, go to thy bible, 
to thy spiritual guide, to thy Christian 
friends, and especially to the throne of grace, 



&S6 To the Young. 

and it shall be made known to thee, what 
thou slialt do. Be not in haste to decide a 
point of such vast importance. Perhaps the 
Lord intends to send thee far hence unto the 
Gentiles; and perhaps thou art destined to 
fill a humble, narrow sphere in the village 
that gave thee birth. 

Let me again entreat you, my dear youth- 
ful readers, to devote yourselves to the 
Lord and to his service most unreservedly 
and most fervently. Youth was always a 
very interesting and important period of 
life. It is peculiarly so at such a day as 
the present. It is now your seed time. Ne- 
glect this, and you will have no harvest; none 
but a harvest of weeds; or rather of tares, of 
briars and thorns, fit only for the burning 
flame. How important, that you should sow 
good seed, and none but good, in a soil so 
noble. And take the most diligent heed that 
the enemy do not sow tares. u Cease, my son 
to hear the instruction, that causetL to err 
from the words of knowledge.'* Sow your 
seed with a liberal hand. With such a bless- 
ing, as you may humbly expect, the soil is ca- 
pable of producing a most glorious and abun- 
dant harvest; if it be properly sown, and prop- 
erly cultivated 

Young candidates for glory, honor and 
immortality, your time is precious. Time 
was always precious. "The man is yet un- 
born, who duly weighs an hour." Time is 
peculiarly precious to you. You have no 



To the Young. £8f 

time to indulge in vain amusements, however 
harmless they may seem to "fools reputed 
wise." Surely they cannot he harmless, if 
they roh you of that, which "worlds want 
wealth to buy." You have no time for the 
gratification of vain curiosity. Whatever 
study, or book, or pursuit, may solicit your 
attention, let your first, your grand inquiry 
be, "Is it useful? is it conducive to the salva- 
tion of souls? to the advancement of Christ's 
kingdom? to the glory of God?" Remember, 
you are tasting forbidden fruit, whether you 
eat or drink, or converse, or read, or write 
or whatever you do, unless it is conducive to 
the glory of God. God is glorified by good 
works; especially by such as are immediately 
conducive to the salvation of souls. Assidu- 
ously engage in forming such habits, in cul- 
tivating such dispositions, and acquiring such 
knowledge, as may appear most conducive 
to your usefulness below, and your bliss 
above. 

If any of you, my young friends, have such 
gifts and graces, as to render it probable that 
with a proper education, you may be useful 
in the ministry, it is vastly important, that 
you should be brought forward and educated 
for the sacred office. The call for faithful 
ministers is so loud and urgent from the four 
quarters of the world, that it seems that no 
one, who has the requisite qualifications 
ought to be excused from engaging in the 



288 To ML 

work. All pious and promising youths, who 
are indigent, may unquestionably be assisted 
in obtaining the best education, that the 
country can afford. And let no parent pre- 
sume to withhold his son, his only son, |f the 
Lord appears to have called him for the ser- 
vice of the sanctuary. 

Dear reader, farewell. We shall meet at 
the bar of Christ. May it be at his right 
hand. And, O may we have the unspeakable 
satisfaction to find, that these imperfect pages 
have not been written, nor read, in vain, 



THE ENB* 







Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
*$* Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: August 2005 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



4 • • 5 Si Ct. "o . y * A, 




